Traffic Manual Complete Fixed

TRAFFIC MANUAL
0/100 GENERAL PROVISIONS
0/101 DEPARTMENT TRAFFIC MANUAL ESTABLISHED
The Traffic Manual of the Los Angeles Police Department is hereby established and shall hereafter be
referred to as "The Department Traffic Manual." It is, and shall be, a composite of current traffic policies and
procedures. All Department employees shall comply with the provisions contained herein.
0/102 ADHERENCE TO REPORTING POLICY
The reporting policies contained in this Traffic Manual outline the minimum information necessary to
complete a traffic collision report. It is permissible to include any additional information at the discretion of
the investigating officer or supervisor.
The OIC of each traffic detective section may require additional information over and above that which is
contained in this manual; however, less information will not be acceptable.
0/103 GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION
The following rules of grammar shall apply throughout the Los Angeles Police Department Traffic Manual:
CONSTRUCTION OF TENSES - The present tense includes the past and future tenses; and the future, the
present.
CONSTRUCTION OF GENDERS - The masculine gender includes the feminine and neuter genders.
CONSTRUCTION OF SINGULAR AND PLURAL - The singular includes the plural; and the plural, the
singular.
MANDATORY AND PERMISSIVE VERBS - "Shall" is mandatory, "may" and "should" are permissive.
0/104 LEGALITY OF CONTENTS
If any section, subsection, item, clause, or phrase contained in the Department Traffic Manual is found to be
illegal or otherwise incorrect or inapplicable, such finding shall not affect the validity of the remaining portions
of the Department Traffic Manual.
LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
0/105 ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations shall apply throughout the Traffic Manual of the Los Angeles Police Department:
AOI - Area of Impact

BAC - Blood Alcohol Count
CHP - California Highway Patrol
CPI - City Property Involved
DHD - Detective Headquarters Division
DMV - California Department of Motor Vehicles
DRE - Drug Recognition Expert
EOW - End of Watch
FAIT - Forensic Accident Investigation Team
HBD - Had Been Drinking
IOD - Injured On-duty
LAFD - Los Angeles Fire Department
LAPD - Los Angeles Police Department
MT - Medical Treatment
OIC - Officer-in-Charge
PC - California Penal Code
POI - Point of Impact
POST - State of California Commission on Peace Officer Standards and Training
SCID - Specialized Collision Investigation Detail
SFST - Standardized Field Sobriety Test
SID - Scientific Investigation Division
SWITRS - State Wide Integrated Traffic Reporting System
TCS - Traffic Coordination Section
TDS - Traffic Detective Section
VC - California Vehicle Code
Department Manual - Manual of the Los Angeles Police Department

Traffic Manual - Traffic Manual of the Los Angeles Police Department
0/106 DISTRIBUTION OF THE DEPARTMENT TRAFFIC MANUAL
Copies of the Department Traffic Manual shall be issued to all officers assigned to a traffic division and to
each division or office where repeated references to the Department Traffic Manual are made by
Department employees.
0/107 AMENDMENTS TO THE DEPARTMENT TRAFFIC MANUAL
A request for revision to the Department Traffic Manual shall be prepared on an Intradepartmental
Correspondence, Form 15.2, and forwarded through the chain of command to the Department Traffic
Coordinator. The Department Traffic Coordinator shall cause the requested revision to be researched and,
if appropriate, issued as an amendment to the Department Traffic Manual.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/100 CITING GUIDELINES
1/101 PATROL OFFICERS' RESPONSIBILITIES
Historically, patrol officers have been assigned the primary responsibility for traffic enforcement in the City of
Los Angeles, and that tradition is still in effect. It is incumbent upon every patrol officer to keep abreast of
traffic collision patterns and to aggressively enforce traffic violations in an effort to reduce collisions and
injuries, and to facilitate the safe and expeditious flow of vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Therefore,
whenever patrol officers observe a traffic law violation, they should stop the violator and take some type of
enforcement action. Enforcement action may consist of a warning, citation, application for complaint or
physical arrest.
In situations where the violation(s) is defined in the Vehicle Code as a misdemeanor, officers shall stop and
take enforcement action.
1/102 TRAFFIC OFFICERS' RESPONSIBILITIES
Officers assigned to traffic divisions supplement the efforts of patrol officers in the area of traffic
enforcement. These officers shall be knowledgeable regarding traffic collision patterns in their assigned
areas and shall concentrate their enforcement efforts on those violations that are identified as the primary
causes of traffic collisions.
Officers assigned to these specialized divisions shall conduct their enforcement activities in a highly visible
manner. When a particular traffic enforcement problem exists, they may park in a conspicuous location to
observe traffic.
1/103 VISIBLE PATROL
The tendency of motorists to knowingly violate traffic laws is deterred by open and visible patrol. Officers are
expected to aggressively enforce traffic laws while engaged in routine patrol. The opportunity to take
enforcement action impacts the traffic death and injury rate in this City and should not be overlooked. When
there is an unusual or continuing enforcement problem at a particular location, officers may park in a
conspicuous location and observe traffic.
1/104 GENERAL CITING PROCEDURES
In order to avoid confusion for both the violator and the Court, officers should adhere to several citing
procedures. Officers shall not alter any pre-printed wording on citations, quote bail when issuing a
personal service citation, or indicate that a pay-by-mail envelope will be provided by the Court. Officers
should refer the violator to the reverse side of the citation for instructions.
If a violator makes inquiries regarding traffic school, officers should state that attendance is at the discretion
of the Court. Officers shall refrain from suggesting traffic school as an alternative to adjudication of the
citation. Additionally, officers shall not recommend nor suggest any specific traffic school.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/105 GENERAL ENFORCEMENT POLICY
When the operator of a motor vehicle or other conveyance commits a violation which obstructs or delays the
normal flow of traffic (vehicle or pedestrian), the violator shall be stopped and should be cited.
1/106 SELECTIVE ENFORCEMENT
The Department conducts surveys to determine which violations are causing collisions. Based on this
information, the Department deploys its personnel in specific areas to observe violations and take
enforcement action. When the Department receives complaints of a traffic problem, it
specifically assigns personnel to investigate and take necessary enforcement action.
Officers shall give primary attention to hazardous, collision-causing violations. Officers shall take
enforcement action at those locations where serious injury collisions occur.
1/107 CITING POLICY FOR UN-LICENSED DRIVERS
When the operator of a motor vehicle is stopped for a traffic violation and cannot provide a valid driver's
license, the citing officer shall cite or may book the violator for 12500(a) VC (un-licensed driver) or
14601(a) VC (suspended license). The citing officer may cite the violator for 12951(a) VC (license not in
possession) when the violator's driver’s license status is unavailable.
1/108 VIOLATOR CONTACT
Traffic violation enforcement is one of the many tasks performed by officers. For the violator, it is frequently
an emotional and traumatic experience. In many cases, this is the only contact that a person has with our
Department. Officers should be aware of these factors and should strive to make each contact educational,
leaving the violator with the impression that the officer has performed a necessary task in a professional and
courteous manner.
1/109 NON-RESIDENT VIOLATORS
Since a uniform VC is being followed by a majority of the states including California, non-residents are rarely
subjected to unfamiliar traffic signs or inconsistent regulations. Therefore, unless the traffic regulation
violated is one unique to the Los Angeles area, no immunity should be granted because a person is a non-
resident.
1/110 FALSE INFORMATION TO A PEACE OFFICER - 31 VC
An officer engaged in the enforcement of the CVC who becomes aware that a person has knowingly
provided false information shall arrest and book the violator for Section 31 CVC.
NOTE: A Notice-to-Appear/Release From Custody may be completed after booking the violator if
conditions are met, and the procedures for release are followed (Department Manual
Section 4/216.65).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/110
Officers shall cancel a Notice-to-Appear on which false information was recorded by completing a Citation
Cancellation Request, Form 4.45, and documenting the cancellation of the citation in the narrative of the
arrest report.
Any additional violations listed on the cancelled citation shall also be documented in the narrative of the
arrest report as additional filings. A photocopy of the cancelled citation shall be included as a page of the
arrest report.
1/111 CITING COMMON CARRIERS
Citations issued to operators of common carriers (taxicabs, buses including MTA buses, and mail delivery
vehicles) shall be completed in the same manner as citations issued to any other motorist. No other reports
or notifications are required.
1/112 CITING EQUIPMENT VIOLATIONS
Officers shall stop and should cite equipment violations which contribute to traffic collisions (defective
brakes, brake light malfunctions, "bald" tires, and cracked or broken windshields). Officers should stop and
may cite for other minor equipment violations based upon the situation, the establishment of probable
cause, and the decision that the traffic stop will further the traffic enforcement objectives of the Department.
1/113 SUBSEQUENT STOPS OF THE SAME VIOLATOR
After an officer cites a violator, the officer and partner officer should normally not stop nor cite the same
violator for another violation committed immediately after release. If the violator deliberately commits a
flagrant and dangerous violation, the officer may again stop the violator. The officer shall then request the
presence of a supervisor prior to taking any further enforcement action.
1/114 PARKING VIOLATIONS
Officers shall direct their enforcement efforts toward parking violations that impede the flow of traffic and
create safety hazards. Officers are reminded that handicapped persons displaying a disabled person
placard or a distinctive license plate are exempt from the time limits for metered parking.
United States postal vehicles are exempt from the parking regulations while collecting, transporting and
delivering the United States mail.
1/115 MISDEMEANORS AND INFRACTIONS
By definition, most commonly cited traffic violations are infractions; however, some violations of the Vehicle
Code are misdemeanors. A complete listing of violations is located in the back of the Vehicle Code.
Additionally, the most commonly enforced violations are identified in the Los Angeles Police Department
Citation Guide, Form 16.65.0, as either infractions or misdemeanors.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/116 PHYSICAL ARREST OF TRAFFIC VIOLATORS
A. A physical arrest may be made for a traffic infraction or misdemeanor under the authority of
40302 VC. However, officers are encouraged to use the authority of this section only when
it is absolutely necessary.
B. Section 40302(a) VC provides that persons shall be arrested if they fail to present their
driver's license or other satisfactory evidence of identity. Violators who do not have proper
identification but whose identity may be established by other documents or within a
reasonable time should not be booked. The decision to book should be based upon careful
consideration of the facts, flagrancy of the violation, and the effective utilization of the
employee's time. Absent exigent circumstances, non-drivers shall not be booked under
the authority of this section.
C. Section 40302(b) VC provides that an arrest may be made when a violator fails to give a
written promise to appear. The violator shall be informed that the signing of the citation
does not constitute an admission of guilt, but merely a promise to appear.
D. When the violator continues to refuse to sign the citation, the citing officer shall request the
presence of a supervisor. If at a ny time prior to the booking process the person indicates a
willingness to sign the citation, the person shall be permitted to do so and then be released.
The person shall be transported back to the location where the vehicle is parked or to the
place of arrest. If for some reason this is impracticable, the person should be taken to a
suitable transportation facility. Under no circumstances is the individual to be left in a
location which would cause undue hardship or cause the person to become the object of
further police action.
1/117 VIOLATIONS COMMITTED AGAINST AN OFFICER
When a traffic violation is committed against an officer, the officer may stop and may cite the violator. The
citing officer should be cognizant of the fact that the Court will take the officer's personal involvement into
consideration during adjudication of the citation.
1/118 TRAFFIC COLLISION - PERSONAL SERVICE CITATION
A. An officer may issue a personal service citation at the scene of a traffic collision only if all
of the following conditions are met:
1. The officer has successfully completed a POST approved course in collision

investigation.
2. There is reasonable cause to believe that the person involved in the collision has
violated a provision of the Vehicle Code not declared to be a felony or a Los
Angeles Municipal Code Section, and the violation was a factor in the occurrence
of the traffic collision.
3. All of the essential elements of the violation can be proven by physical evidence
only and testified to by the officer issuing the citation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/118
EXAMPLE: A vehicle collides with a parked vehicle, tire marks indicate a violation of
22350 VC, there are no witnesses to the violation. Issue a personal
service citation for 22350 VC provided there is no filing request or arrest.
NOTE: Due to advice from the City Attorney, the Department has determined that
officers shall not issue a citation when the essential elements of the
violation are established by the statements of an independent witness
(including an officer) and physical evidence. In those instances, an officer
shall continue to request a filing for those violations on a traffic collision
report (CHP Form 555) or arrest report. When a traffic collision report or
arrest report is not completed an officer may complete an application for
complaint.
B. Any officer (POST requirement does not apply) may issue a personal service citation at the
scene of a traffic collision when all of the following apply:
1. All elements of the violation can be testified to b y the citing officer as a result of the
on-scene investigation (physical evidence).
2. The cited violation was not a factor in the occurrence of the traffic collision.
3. The below listed violations are involved:
a. 4000(a) VC through 5204 VC - Registration of Vehicles
b. 12951(a) VC - Driver's License Not in Possession
c. 16028 (a) VC - Evidence of Financial Responsibility
d. Division 12 of the VC - Equipment of Vehicles
NOTE: Officers witnessing a traffic collision may issue a personal service citation only
when the violation is one listed above (1/118 B 3) and there is no arrest or filing
request. Officers are considered the same as any other witness for the purpose of
issuing a personal service citation and a filing request on the traffic collision report
or arrest report. Officers shall list themselves as a witness on the traffic collision
report or arrest report
C. Officers shall request filings for all misdemeanor violations on the traffic collision report
(CHP Form 555) or arrest report. All violations must be handled in the same manner to
avoid "Double Jeopardy", this includes infractions. Any citations issued shall also be noted
on the traffic collision report.
If any party, passenger or witness is arrested, the officers shall not issue a personal
service citation to that person.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/118
D. If a personal service citation has been issued at the scene of a reportable traffic collision
at a Photo Red Light (PRL) intersection, officers shall note the citation number and CVC
section cited in the “Remarks” section of the traffic collision report.
1/119 TRAFFIC COLLISION - ABSENTEE CITATION
An officer issuing an absentee citation for a parking violation at the scene of a traffic collision shall ensure
that:
A. All essential elements of the violation have been observed by the officer; AND
B. The citation number and description of the parked vehicle are listed in the "Remarks"
section of the Traffic Collision Report.
1/120 CITATION BY OFF-DUTY OFFICER
A traffic citation shall not be issued by an off-duty officer involved in, or witness to, a traffic collision.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/200 GENERAL TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT POLICY
1/201 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT OBJECTIVES
The traffic enforcement objectives of the Department are to reduce traffic collisions and injuries and to
facilitate the safe and expeditious flow of vehicular and pedestrian traffic. The Department seeks to achieve
these objectives through a combination of voluntary compliance, education, and enforcement.
The Department attempts to educate the public regarding traffic regulations through programs aimed at
identifying specific problems. This is accomplished by publishing traffic collision and injury statistics, issuing
notices and warnings of changes in traffic laws, and taking enforcement action.
The Department will take enforcement action upon the detection of an illegal and potentially hazardous act
without regard for such factors as attitude, intent, or excuse. Enforcement action may consist of a warning, a
citation, or physical arrest.
1/202 LEADING CAUSES OF TRAFFIC COLLISIONS - MAJOR VIOLATIONS
The following violations have been identified as the major primary causes of traffic collisions. Officers shall
give special attention to these violations in an attempt to reduce the number of fatal and injury collisions in
the City of Los Angeles:
A. Right of Way
B. Speed
C. Traffic Control
D. Driving Under-the-influence
E. Pedestrian
1/203 RIGHT OF WAY
A. Information
Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 11, Chapter 4, for specific violations.
B. Enforcement Policy
Officers shall stop and should cite violators.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/204 SPEED VIOLATIONS
A. Information
Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 11, Chapter 7, for specific violations.
B. Enforcement Policy
1. In areas where the prima facie or posted speed is less than 65 miles per hour,
officers should cite 22350 VC (Basic Speed). This section provides that, although
a vehicle may be traveling at the posted speed limit, conditions may exist (weather,
visibility, etc.) which make this speed unsafe.
a. At ten miles per hour or more over the "safe" speed, violators shall be
stopped and should be cited.
b. From five to nine miles per hour over the "safe" speed, violators should
be stopped and may be cited.
c. Up to five miles per hour over the "safe" speed, an officer may stop and, if
facts are observed which sustain a violation of the basic speed law, may
cite.
2. When a violator exceeds the prima facie or posted speed of 65 miles per hour,
officers should cite 22349 VC (Maximum Speed Law).
a. At ten miles per hour or more over the posted speed limit, violators shall
be stopped and should be cited.
b. From five to nine miles per hour over the posted speed limit, violators shall
be stopped and may be cited.
c. Up to five miles per hour over the maximum speed limit, an officer may
stop and, if facts are observed which sustain a violation, may cite.
3. Paced Speed - Officers enforcing speed violations by "pacing" shall cite for a
speed of three miles per hour less than the "paced" speed. The paced speed
shall appear in the officer's notes on the citation.
NOTE: When an officers needs to appear in court for a citation based on a paced speed
the officer shall bring a copy of the calibration card with them.
4. Estimated Speed - When speeds are estimated, officers shall cite for a speed of
five miles per hour less than the estimated speed. The estimated speed shall
appear in the officer's notes on the citation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/204
5. Radar Speed Enforcement - Radar enforcement of speed law violations shall be

used only by personnel who have undergone the required training (Traffic Manual
1/211). Officers using radar shall stop and should cite for speeds more than five
miles per hour over the posted speed. Officers shall cite for the indicated speed on
the radar unit.
1/205 TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. Information - Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 11, Chapters 2 - 6 and Chapter
8, for specific violations.
B. Enforcement Policy - Officers shall stop and should cite violators.
1/206 DRIVING UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL AND/OR DRUGS
A. Information - Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 11, Chapter 12, for specific
violations.
B. Enforcement Policy - Violators shall be stopped, given the appropriate tests, and arrested
if found to be under-the-influence of alcohol, alcohol and drugs, or drugs. Normally, the
violator shall be booked and detained for DUI.
1/207 PEDESTRIAN
A. Information - Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 11, Chapter 5, for specific
violations.
B. Enforcement Policy - Officers shall stop and should cite violators.
1/208 ENFORCEMENT OF BICYCLE VIOLATIONS
The bicycle has become an important means of transportation. Field officers should be aware that bicyclists
have the same duties and responsibilities as automobile drivers. Enforcement of laws pertaining to bicycles
will contribute to a reduction in the number of fatalities and injuries involving bicyclists.
A. Bicycle
1. Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 11, Chapter 1, Article 4, for specific
violations.
2. Refer to the Los Angeles Municipal Code, 26.01(b), No Bicycle License, and
56.15.1, Riding Bicycle on Sidewalk, for specific information.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/208
B. Motorized bicycle (moped) licenses
1. Information
a. LAMC Section 26.01(a)2, Motorized Bicycle Defined: "Any two-wheeled

or three-wheeled device having fully operative pedals for propulsion by
human power or having no pedals if powered solely by electrical energy,
and an automatic transmission and a motor which produces less than 2
gross brake horsepower and is capable of propelling the device a
maximum speed of not more than 30 miles per hour on level ground."
b. Refer to the California Vehicle Code, Division 3, Chapter 1, Article 8.1, for
specific violations.
2. Enforcement Policy
An officer who becomes aware of a person operating a motorized bicycle (moped)

without a license issued by the DMV shall stop and should cite the operator for
12500(b) VC.
1/209 RADAR ENFORCEMENT
A. The traditional method of traffic enforcement by visible patrol has limited effectiveness on
many narrow and winding streets within the City. It has been determined that radar as an
enforcement tool can be superior to conventional methods under certain conditions. The
goal of the radar enforcement program is the reduction of speed-related collisions.
B. Radar enforcement of speed law violations shall be used only by personnel who have
undergone the required training, and it shall be used only on streets which are either
topographically or operationally impractical for traditional enforcement methods: AND
1. Have a history of speed-related collisions; OR
2. Are the subject of numerous citizens' complaints regarding excessive speed.
NOTE: Officers should follow the guidelines set forth in 40802 VC.
C. 40802 VC ("speed trap" defined) provides that radar may now be used to measure speed
of moving objects on local streets and roads without first obtaining an engineering and
traffic survey if the following conditions are met:
1. The location must be a local street as defined by the latest Functional Usage and
Federal-Aid System Maps as submitted to the Federal Highway Administration;
OR
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/209
2. When these maps have not been submitted, the following definition shall be used:
A local street or road primarily provides access to abutting residential

property and shall meet the following three conditions:
a) Roadway width of not more than 40 feet.
b) Not more than 1/2 mile of uninterrupted length. Interruptions include traffic
control devices as defined in 445 VC.
c) Not more than one traffic lane in each direction.
D. When the conditions within 40802 VC are not present, a City engineering and traffic survey
of the street in question shall be obtained prior to any radar enforcement. Also, if an
engineering and traffic survey does exist, the survey shall have been conducted within five
years prior to the date of the alleged violation.
E. Trained officers may use radar in school zones while children are en route to school or
home or while they are present during the noon recess. Use of radar in school zones is not
otherwise authorized.
NOTE: Citations must show the exact speed indicated by the radar.
1/210 RADAR ENFORCEMENT REQUEST PROCEDURE
An officer requesting a radar survey shall complete an Employee's Report, Form 15.7, directed to his
divisional radar coordinator. The concerned radar coordinator shall review each request and conduct a
radar feasibility study to determine if the location meets the criteria for radar use and if approved, forward
the request to the concerned Department of Transportation District Traffic Engineer.
An officer of this Department may request radar on streets which:
A. Are topographically impractical for traditional enforcement methods (narrow or winding

streets that may present hazards); AND
B. Have a history of speed-related collisions; OR
C. Are the subject of numerous citizens' complaints regarding excessive speed.
NOTE: Radar requests for locations which do not meet the criteria for "local" streets will
continue to be handled as delineated in Traffic Manual 5/104.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/211 RADAR TRAINING
A. Only personnel who have successfully completed the required training may use radar
equipment to enforce speed law violations.
B. Required training shall consist of any of the following:
1. Los Angeles Police Department Radar Operators Course (40 hours)
2. Los Angeles Sheriff's Department Radar Operators Course (40 hours)
3. Any radar operators course approved by the California Commission on Police

Officer Standards and Training.
1/212 RADAR EQUIPMENT RECORDS AND PROCEDURES
A. The following records shall be maintained at TCS by the Department Radar Coordinator:
1. A copy of the current Federal Communications Commission (FCC) radio license.
2. Original copies of all radar instrument factory certifications and subsequent

certifications by the authorized repair facilities.
3. Original copies of all radar tuning fork factory certifications and subsequent
certifications by the authorized repair facilities.
4. Maintenance records of all radar equipment from the authorized repair facilities.
5. Records of assignment and subsequent audits on divisional radar instruments and

tuning forks.
NOTE: Audits of equipment shall be conducted on a quarterly basis at each traffic

division by the Department Radar Coordinator and a divisional
representative.
6. Training records of all officers certified to operate radar.
7. A certified copy of all engineering and traffic surveys conducted by the City
Department of Transportation, including the City engineering recommendations
and data sheet(s).
8. A copy of the manufacturer's operator manual for each type of radar instrument
used by the Department.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/212
B. The following records shall be maintained at each traffic division by the assigned divisional
radar coordinator:
1. A current copy of each radar instrument certification
2. A current copy of each radar tuning fork certification
NOTE: A radar instrument and tuning fork shall be maintained as a single unit.
3. A current list of certified radar operators within the division.
4. A copy of the manufacturer's operator manual for each type of radar used by the
division.
5. A copy of each vehicle speedometer certification (moving mode radar).
6. A current list of the surveyed streets within the geographic bureau.
C. The divisional radar coordinator shall:
1. Be responsible for maintaining the court’s copies of certified traffic & engineering
surveys and conducting audits to ensure they are present and up to date.
2. Be assigned to a trained radar instructor who will be responsible for providing in-
service and update radar instruction as needed.
3. Assure that certified engineering and traffic surveys are conducted at least nine
months prior to the expiration of the old surveys.
NOTE: Engineering and traffic surveys are only certified for a five-year
period.
F. Each certified radar operator should maintain the following records as a court evidence kit:
1. Copy of his radar operator's certificate
2. Copy of vehicle speedometer calibration (moving mode radar)
3. Copy of the manufacturer's operator manual for the radar instrument used
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/213 DAMAGED OR LOST RADAR EQUIPMENT
A. Damaged equipment
1. Any radar unit or tuning fork in an inoperative o r damaged condition shall be taken
out of service immediately.
2. Damaged equipment shall be brought to the attention of the divisional radar

coordinator and a Form 15.7, Employee's Report, shall be completed describing
the circumstances of how the unit or tuning fork was damaged. The original Form
15.7 shall be forwarded to the Department Radar Coordinator, TCS.
B. Lost or stolen equipment
1. Any radar equipment (radar unit) lost or stolen shall be reported immediately to the
divisional radar coordinator on an appropriate Preliminary Investigation Report
(PIR). One copy of the PIR shall be forwarded to the Department Radar
Coordinator, TCS.
2. Any tuning fork that is lost shall be reported immediately to the divisional radar
coordinator on an appropriate 15.7. One copy of the 15.7 shall be forwarded to the
Department Radar Coordinator, TCS.
3. Any tuning fork stolen shall be reported immediately to the divisional radar
coordinator on an appropriate Preliminary Investigation Report (PIR). One copy of
the PIR shall be forwarded to the Department Radar Coordinator, TCS.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/300 CITING INSTRUCTIONS
1/302 STOPPING THE VIOLATOR
The violator shall be stopped as soon after the violation as safety permits. Officers should be certain the
violator is aware of their presence and understands directions given concerning the traffic stop. An officer
should be especially alert for a quick stop or sudden change of direction by the violator.
Traffic violations are often committed by criminals or other potentially dangerous persons. Officers shall
minimize the hazard by placing themselves in a position of advantage where they will not be endangered by
these persons or distracted by passing vehicles. Officers are not permitted to be seated on a parked
motorcycle during any field contact.
1/303 DEMEANOR
An officer's demeanor shall be decisive and courteous.
A. Decisiveness - Officers shall not issue a citation unless they are certain of the identity of the
violator and have witnessed all elements of the offense. Officers shall decide upon the
action to be taken before addressing the violator and shall proceed in a positive, firm, and
businesslike manner.
B. Courtesy - Officers shall be courteous in behavior, language and tone of voice. They shall
avoid a flippant attitude and language designed to belittle, ridicule, or embarrass. They
shall ignore derogatory language by the violator.
1/304 CONVERSATION
A. Reason for Citation - After an appropriate greeting, the citing officer shall immediately
inform the violator of the reason he was stopped. The officer shall answer all proper
questions, but shall not give unsolicited explanations of the offense or reasons for the
enforcement activity.
B. Driver's License - The citing officer shall ask for the violator's driver's license and shall
accept only the license. The officer shall not accept a billfold or card case. The violator
shall be addressed by their last name, preceded by the correct title.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/304
C. Prohibited Conversation - The citing officer shall not:
1. Quote the bail amount
2. Refer the violator to the traffic court liaison officer for telephonic information
3. Suggest the case may be handled by mail
4. Attempt to outline the policy of the Court or the DMV
5. Suggest any automobile club or other organization
1/305 SUPERVISORY ASSISTANCE
A supervisor shall be requested whenever:
A. The violator expresses a desire to make a complaint or requests a supervisor
B. A physical altercation has occurred
C. The violator refuses to sign the citation
D. The officer determines there is a need for a supervisor
1/306 UNNECESSARY DELAY
A. The citing officer shall complete the citation without unnecessary delay and release the
violator.
B. Violators shall not be detained against their will pending the return of a warrant check unless
there is probable cause to believe the violator is wanted for a felony.
C. After releasing the violator, the officer shall not follow the violator.
1/307 COMPLETING THE CITATION
The citing officer shall place a hard backing-plate under the fourth copy of the citation and complete the
citation by using a medium black ballpoint pen. Officers shall adhere to the current Citation Guide, Form
16.65.0. Before removing the violator's copy, the officer shall check the citation to make sure it is complete,
correct, legible and that it has been signed by the violator.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/308 AUTHORIZED ABBREVIATIONS
Approx Approximately Obs Observed
Bl Stop Boulevard Stop Pkd Parked
Blks Blocks Ped Pedestrian
Bus Dist Business District (PLP) Personalized License Plate
Dble line Double line Plts Plates
Deft Defendant POV Passed Other Vehicle
Driv Lic Driver's License Res Dist Residential District
Est Estimate Reg Registration
Exp Expired Rt/T Right turn
FTC Following Too Close ROW Right-of-Way
Fwy Freeway Sig Signal
I/S Intersection SP-CNS Specially Constructed Vehicle
Ln Chg Lane Change Spd Speed
Lt/T Left Turn Temp Temporary
M/C Motorcycle Traf Traffic
M/L Moving Lane Veh Vehicle
Max Maximum VCC Violator's Copy Corrected
Mkd X-Walk Marked Crosswalk X-ing Crossing
MPH Miles Per Hour X-Walk Crosswalk
N/B S/B Direction 45/25 Speed in speed zone

W/B E/B
Revision 06/04/01
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/309 CITING ERRORS
When an error is noted by a citing officer, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. When the violator's copy is still available, the officer shall correct the error on the original
and all copies by drawing a single line through the error and legibly printing the correct
information as near as possible to the error. "VCC” (Violator's copy corrected), followed by
the concerned employee's initials, shall be written at the TOP of the original citation.
B. When the violator's copy is no longer available (other than in the notes or diagram), the
officer shall:
1. Complete a Citation Correction Request, Form 4.07. Information contained on the

Form 4.07 shall include the citation number and the correct information.
2. Attach the original Form 4.07 to the original of the citation.
3. Forward the forms to an approving supervisor.
C. Correct errors in the notes or diagram section of a citation only when the correction can also
be made on the violator's copy. When an officer becomes aware of an error in the notes or
diagram after issuance of the citation, the error shall not be corrected. The officer shall
write the correct information on the reverse side of the last copy of the concerned citation in
the citation book to use as reference for court proceedings.
1/310 INFORMATION REGARDING CITING OFFICER
A. Print name, serial number and detail assigned in space provided.
B. Enter unavailable date (complete vacation dates - July 4 through August 2).
C. Enter court session preference (AM or PM).
D. Citing officer’s detail - The “DETAIL” box on the Notice to Appear is used to identify the
type of assignment the citing officer is assigned. The following codes shall be used in
identifying an officer’s assignment:
1. TE - Motor officers assigned to a traffic division or Traffic Coordination Section;
2. CI - Collision investigation officers assigned to a traffic division;
3. PT - All other officers
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/311 TIME AND PLACE OF APPEARANCE
A. The place of appearance is determined by the location of the violation.
B. Citing Date - See Citation Guide (Form 16.65.0)
C. Juveniles (under 18)
All persons under 18 years of age cited between 0600 and 1800 hours shall be cited to the
PM court session and those cited between 1800 and 0600 hours shall be cited to the AM
session. If a juvenile is given an incorrect date of appearance, it is the citing officer's
responsibility to notify the subject.
NOTE: When citing juveniles under the age of 14 years, officers must comply with the
"Gladys R" decision which, in part, states, “An o fficer must establish that the minor
knew the wrongfulness of the act that he or she committed at the time the act was
committed.”
1/312 CITATION CANCELLATION REQUEST
A. Personal service Citation - Officers shall complete a Citation Cancellation Request, Form
4.45, when any one of the following conditions exist:
1. The citation is not justified because of an error in judgment or identity.
2. A mistake is made in completing a citation and the officer has issued a second
citation to the violator.
3. The violator gives false information to an officer, which is recorded on the citation.
4. A physical arrest is made in lieu of issuing a citation, enter citation number on

Arrest Report.
5. All copies of a completed citation have been lost (If only the original citation is lost,
complete Form 4.07).
6. The citing officer's division commanding officer determines that the citation was
issued in violation of Department rules.
7. There is a defect in printing or binding.
8. A citation was started but not completed due to an emergency.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/312
B. Absentee Citations (Parking) - An officer shall complete a Citation Cancellation Request,

Form 4.45, when any one of the following conditions exist:
1. The citation was issued to an inoperative vehicle.
2. The operator was physically unable to move the vehicle.
3. The citation was issued to an officer executing an official task.
4. The vehicle is reported stolen.
NOTE: An error cannot be corrected by a Form 4.07.
1/313 RECEIVING CITATION BOOKS
Upon receiving a citation book, the officer shall print his name, serial number, division, and date of receipt in
the spaces provided. No notation of any kind shall be made on any citation prior to issuance.
1/314 LOST CITATION BOOKS
When a citation book is lost, a Citation Cancellation Request, Form 4.45, shall be made canceling the
unused citations. The request shall include the numbers of the first and last citations in the book and shall
specify the numbers of the citations which have not been issued.
1/315 COMPLETION OF CITATION BOOKS
A completed citation book shall be forwarded to the watch commander. The watch commander shall cause
a supervisory check to be made. After checking for any irregularity in the use of the citation book, the
supervisor shall sign the face of the citation book and forward it to the place of issuance.
1/316 RETURN OF INCOMPLETE CITATION BOOKS
An officer shall forward a citation book via the watch commander to the place of issuance when:
A. The book is not completed within 90 days
B. The officer is transferred
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/317 CONSULAR IMMUNITY (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/284.10)
Consular officers are immune from arrest and prosecution for a public offense except by authority of a
federal warrant, and then only for a felony (Department Manual 4/284.25).
1/318 OPERATORS OF POST OFFICE VEHICLES
A. Operators of Post Office vehicles on scheduled routes shall be exempt from the provisions
of special signs regulating street turning movements. This exemption shall not apply when
one-way streets are involved.
B. An officer or employee of the United States Government, while operating a motor vehicle
owned or controlled by the United States on the business of the United States is not
required to obtain a driver's license (12501 (a) VC). Except when the motor vehicle is a
commercial vehicle as defined in 15210 VC.
NOTE: A driver of a government vehicle is not required to possess a valid California

driver's license while operating a government-owned vehicle. However, they must
be in possession of a government license.
1/319 PHYSICIANS (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/344.50)
When a physician is taken into custody while en route to treat an emergency case, the arresting officer shall
immediately cause the patient to be notified. If this is not possible, the person who summoned the physician
shall be notified.
A physician traveling in response to an emergency shall be exempt from the provisions of sections 22351
VC and 22352 VC, providing the vehicle being used by the physician displays an insignia approved by the
DMV indicating that the vehicle is owned by a licensed physician (21058 VC).
1/320 ENGINEERING DEFECTS
Officers shall not cite violators when the principal reason for the violation is an obvious, identifiable
engineering or environmental defect. When an officer encounters an engineering or environmental defect
that affects a driver's compliance with traffic laws and/or is a traffic hazard, he/she shall complete an
Employee's Report, Form 15.7, directed to his immediate supervisor. The report shall be forwarded to TCS.
1/321 CORRECTABLE VEHICLE CODE VIOLATIONS
An officer issuing a Traffic Notice-to-Appear for certain offenses and under certain conditions shall indicate
the charge will be dismissed by the court with proof of correction. Check the appropriate “yes” or “no” box
for each violation on the citation. The appropriate dismissal status for commonly cited California Vehicle
Code (CVC) violations is contained in the Citation Guide, Form 16.65.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/321
California Vehicle Code Section 40303.5 addresses sections which are correctable. Generally, the “yes”
box shall be checked if any of the following apply:
A. A registration infraction listed in Division 3, CVC, and also listed as correctable in the
Citation Guide, Form 16.65;
B. Any driver license infraction listed in Division 6, CVC which are correctable; or,
C. Any equipment infraction listed in Division 12, 13, 14.8, 16, 16.5, 16.7 CVC, or Section
21201 (bicycle equipment) and also listed as correctable in the Citation Guide, Form 16.65.
Pursuant to 40610(b) CVC, a citing officer may mark a correctable violation and not correctable when any of
the following exist:
A. Evidence of fraud or persistent neglect; or,
B. The violation presents an immediate hazard; or,
C. The violator does not agree to or cannot promptly correct the violation.
The reverse of the violator’s Traffic Notice-to-Appear and Absentee citation has a section to certify that a
violation has been corrected. Officers shall not certify violations as being corrected.
A. Driver license and registration violations may be certified as corrected by the Department
of Motor Vehicles or any clerk of a court.
B. Equipment violations may be certified as corrected as noted on the reverse side of the
violator’s copy.
EXCEPTION: Officers assigned to the Specialized Enforcement Unit, Traffic

Coordination Section may certify infractions as being corrected as outlined
in Section 40303.5 CVC.
1/322 LISTING THE PROBABLE CAUSE FOR A TRAFFIC STOP ON A TRAFFIC NOTICE-
TO-APPEAR
When an officer is issuing a Traffic Notice-to-Appear, the officer shall either cite or list the probable cause
for the traffic stop in the citation narrative. When the probable cause for the traffic stop is not being cited, the
reason shall be described without using the actual numerical section and code violation.
EXAMPLE:
Correctable Violation (Veh. Code, § 40610) o Booking Required Misdemeanor or

Yes No Code and Section Description Infraction (Circle)
o x 12500(a) CVC – Unlicensed Driver. M I
o o Warned for red light violation. M I
Revision 06/04/01
TRAFFIC MANUAL
1/323 AUTOMATED PHOTO RED LIGHT INTERSECTIONS
If an officer cites an individual at an automated PRL intersection, the words “PRL” shall be written in the
“Violations” section of the personal service citation. Prior to the issuing officer’s end of watch, a legible copy
of the personal service citation shall be made, and forwarded to the Photo Red Light Operator (PRLO) in the
bureau of occurrence.
Revision 06/04/01
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/100 ADMONISHING ARRESTEE
Officers shall be guided by Department Manual 4/202.10 when either an adult or juvenile suspect has been
taken into custody. Officers shall admonish suspects of their Miranda Rights prior to formally interrogating
them. Whether or not to admonish shall be based on two factors: custody and interrogation.
2/200 DRIVING UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE (DUI)
2/201 "UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE" DEFINED
A person is considered to be under-the-influence of an intoxicant when the intoxicant has affected their
nervous system, brain, or muscles, impairing their ability to safely operate a motor vehicle.
An intoxicant can be an intoxicating liquor, or the combination of an intoxicating liquor and any drug(s), or any
drug(s).
2/202 SOBRIETY EXAMINATION (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.20)
The physical phases of the sobriety examination shall be given when an under-the-influence driver is able
and willing to perform them and, when practicable, shall be conducted at the scene of the incident in the
presence of witnesses.
An SFST shall be completed and documented on a Form 5.02.05 (DUI Arrest Report) when an officer:
A. Is investigating a driver suspected of being intoxicated who was lawfully arrested or

detained by another peace officer or a private person (Department Manual 4/343.10);
B. Is investigating a suspect for driving under-the-influence;
C. Is investigating a driver believed to be under-the-influence who is unable to perform a

SFST. Include any observable objective symptoms on the DUI face sheet;
D. Is investigating a traffic collision where an involved driver displays any objective symptoms
of being under-the-influence, regardless of whether the driver is arrested.
NOTE: When a driver suspected of being under-the-influence refuses to submit to a field

sobriety test, the investigating officer shall read the Field Sobriety Test Admonition
to the driver.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/203 DUI ARREST (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.10)
A. An arrest for driving under-the-influence shall be made when any of the following apply:
1. An officer witnesses a person commit the elements of driving while under-the-

influence.
2. The under-the-influence driver was lawfully detained by an officer of this or another

law enforcement agency.
3. The under-the-influence driver was lawfully arrested or detained by a private person

who witnessed the driving elements of the offense.
B. An arrest may be made for 23152(a) VC, per authority of 40300.5 VC, when the arresting
officer did not witness the driving, provided the person is:
1. Involved in a traffic collision; OR
2. Observed by the peace officer in or about a vehicle which is obstructing a roadway,

when the officer has reasonable cause to believe that the person had been driving
while under-the-influence of an alcoholic beverage or any drug or the combination
of alcohol and drugs; AND
3. The arrest is effected as a continuous, uninterrupted portion of the investigation.
NOTE: The arrest shall be limited to the location of the event, traffic collision or location of
any timely follow-up investigation.
C. THE ELEMENT OF BEING UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE SHALL BE BASED ON THE

SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS IDENTIFIED BY THE ARRESTING OFFICER. RESULTS OF
OTHER EXAMINATIONS SHALL BE CORROBORATIVE EVIDENCE ONLY.
2/204 DUI DRUG ARREST (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.25)
A. Arresting Officer's Responsibility
When an arrest is made for driving under-the-influence of drugs or a combination of drugs

and alcohol, the arresting officer shall:
1. Admonish the arrestee regarding a chemical test, as per the chemical test
admonition on the DUI Arrest Report, Form 5.02.05.
2. Administer a chemical test to the arrestee.
NOTE: Whenever possible, a breath test should be administered to determine the blood
alcohol level.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/204
3. If the breath test is obtained and the results are .08% or higher, and the level and
type of impairment exhibited by the arrestee are consistent with the breath test,
book the arrestee for 23152(a) VC (DUI).
a. If the Breath Testing Device reading is .08% or higher, but the level or
type of impairment exhibited is not consistent with the Breath Testing
Device reading, the arrestee shall be examined by a Drug Recognition
Expert (DRE) or, if one is not available, by a Department recognized
narcotics expert to determine if a drug influence evaluation should be
conducted.
b. Some indicators of drug influence that may require an examination by a

DRE or a Department recognized narcotics expert are:
1) Field sobriety test performance inconsistent with the Breath

Testing Device level.
2) Admissions by the arrestee that he is under-the-influence of drugs.
3) Medical examination indicates the use of drugs (visible

hypodermic marks or evidence of recent ingestion).
4) Possession of drugs or drug paraphernalia.
4. When an intoxicated driver has a Breath Testing Device reading of less than
.08% , the arresting officer shall request a DRE or, if one is not available, a
Department recognized narcotics expert to examine the arrestee for drug influence.
a. If an on-duty DRE or Department recognized narcotics expert is not

available within the concerned bureau, the arresting officer shall obtain an
MT for the arrestee and request the examining physician to include his or
her observations of the arrestee's signs and/or symptoms and an opinion
as to the arrestee's drug influence.
EXCEPTION: If a traffic death or traffic felony arrest is involved and a DRE or a

Department recognized narcotics expert is not available, contact
Communications Division and request an on-duty DRE or a
Department recognized narcotics expert from anywhere in the
City. If an on-duty DRE or Department recognized narcotics
expert is not available, the officer shall contact the Administrative
Information Unit, Detective Headquarters Division, and request
that an off-duty DRE be dispatched.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/204
b. The arresting officer shall be responsible for:
1) Reading the drug admonition to the arrestee verbatim from the

DUI Arrest Report.
2) Obtaining the blood or urine sample from the arrestee.
c. If urine is the only chemical examination administered, officers shall obtain

the first void for the detection of drugs and the second void for the possible
detection of alcohol. Both samples shall be marked according to
established procedures and booked as evidence (Traffic Manual 2/305).
d. Include the Drug Influence Evaluation form completed by the Department

recognized expert as a page of the Arrest Report.
NOTE: If the DRE or a Department recognized narcotics expert determines that the
arrestee is under-the-influence of a drug that falls within 11550 H&S (cocaine,
heroin, PCP, amphetamines, methamphetamine, or methaqualone), the arresting
officer shall book the arrestee for DUI (drugs, or alcohol and/or drugs) and request
a filing for 11550 H&S in the Arrest Report narrative.
B. Drug Recognition Expert (DRE)/Narcotics Expert Responsibility
A DRE or Department recognized narcotics expert is responsible for evaluating and

rendering an opinion of the drug influence of DUI drug arrestee. As part of that examination
the expert shall:
1. Advise the arresting officer of any additional tests required.
2. Determine if medical treatment (MT) is needed.
3. Complete the Drug Influence Evaluation, Form 8.40.2.
4. Enter a brief description of the findings and the examining officer's name and serial
number in the "Remarks" section of the Booking Recommendation, Form 12.31.
NOTE: Drug influence evaluations of Department employees shall be conducted by DRE

supervisors. During business hours, the DRE Unit of TCS shall be contacted for an
available DRE supervisor. During non-business hours, DHD shall be contacted to
locate a DRE supervisor.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/205 ESTABLISHING DRIVING IN DUI COLLISION CASES
Most officers are familiar with the procedure where the elements of driving in a traffic collision, involving a
DUI driver, is established by witnesses. There are many cases where the actual driving was not witnessed,
but the element can be established by circumstantial evidence. In these cases, the officer should arrest
under authority of 40300.5 VC.
A. When the suspect's vehicle collides with a parked vehicle or fixed object and a witness
hears the crash and immediately responds to the scene, driving can be established when
the witness observes:
1. The suspect seated or trapped behind the wheel; OR
2. The suspect alighting from the driver's seat of the vehicle; OR
3. The suspect standing by the door next to the driver's seat and no other person is in
view; OR
4. The suspect is staggering around the scene and no other person(s) is in view.
NOTE: In the above situations, the approximate time that elapsed between the crash and
the arrival of the witness on the scene should be established as accurately as
possible. The fact that there was no one else near the scene, other than someone
attracted by the noise of the collision, should b e thoroughly covered on the Collision
Report and Arrest Reports.
B. A statement by the paramedic or Fire Department personnel who may have removed the
suspect from the vehicle should be obtained.
NOTE: Fire Department personnel shall be listed as witnesses in the Arrest Report.
C. Physical evidence may be present and officers should be alert to any combination of injury
and damage that would place the suspect behind the wheel. This information should be
documented in the traffic collision and arrest reports.
EXAMPLES:
1. The suspect has a head injury, particularly on the forehead or the face, and the
windshield is shattered on the driver's side of the vehicle. If hair or blood is found
on the shattered portion of the windshield, recover and book that evidence.
2. The suspect has face and chest injuries and the steering wheel is bent, broken, or
otherwise damaged. The steering wheel should be photographed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/205
3. At times, a witness may observe a driver but cannot positively identify him. In this
situation, officers should obtain a detailed description of the driver from the
witness, with particular reference to anything unusual in physical appearance or
attire (male, female, white, black, tall, short, glasses, mustache, bald, bushy hair,
hat, cap, bareheaded, red hair, blond hair, loud sport coat or sport shirt, woman
wearing red sweater or blouse, etc.) or anything else that will distinguish the driver
from the other occupants of the vehicle.
4. Officers should describe the appearance and attire of the suspected driver and the
other occupants of the vehicle, if any, on the CHP Form 556 and in the Arrest
Report.
NOTE: Officers should remember that any passenger in the suspect's vehicle can establish
the element of driving, including the suspect's spouse or other family member.
2/206 ELEMENTS FOR MISDEMEANOR DUI - 23152 VC
A. It is unlawful for any person to operate a motor vehicle who is:
1. Under-the-influence of intoxicating liquor; OR
2. Under the combined influence of intoxicating liquor and any drug; OR
3. Under-the-influence of any drug.
B. Booking Advice
A supervisor of the geographic area of occurrence or a traffic supervisor may give booking
advice. Prior to booking approval, the supervisor shall inspect the following:
1. A computer generated want-and-warrant check; AND
2. A computer generated driver's license status and record check.
2/207 ELEMENTS FOR FELONY DUI
A. Felony DUI Causing Injury 23153 (a) VC
To establish a violation of the section, the following three basic elements must be present:
an investigation must cover each element to be complete. It is unlawful for any person:
1. To operate a motor vehicle while:
a. Under-the influence of intoxicating liquor; OR
b. Under-the-influence of any drug; OR
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/207
c. Under the combined influence of intoxicating liquor and any drug.
2. When so driving, do any act forbidden by law or neglect any duty imposed by
law in the driving of such vehicle.
3. Which act or neglect proximately causes bodily injury to any person other than
himself/herself.
NOTE: The act or neglect to act must “immediately precede and produce” the injury. All
reports should show a strong relationship between the proximate cause
and the injury.
B. An officer who has an arrestee in custody for violation of 23152 VC (Misdemeanor DUI)
shall obtain and review the arrestee’s following records, if any, prior to booking:
1. Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) record,
2. State and County Arrest History Record (criminal history rap sheet), and
3. Consolidated Criminal History Reporting System (CCHRS).
Officers will seek booking approval for California Vehicle Code Section 23550 - Felony
DUI With Priors or California Vehicle Code Section 23550.5 - Felony DUI Within Ten
Years in accordance with what is contained in the arrestee’s records.
C. 23550 VC - Felony DUI With Priors (formerly 23175 VC)
Officers shall seek approval for a felony booking of 23550 VC when the arrestee has
three or more of the following misdemeanor convictions within
the past seven years:
1. 23103 VC - Reckless Driving with Alcohol Involved
2. 23152 VC - Misdemeanor DUI
3. 23153 VC - Misdemeanor DUI Causing Injuries
NOTE: For the purpose of identifying a conviction for violation

of 23103 VC, the DMV printout will indicate a court disposition
code “GRV.” The “R” indicates a violation of 23152 VC that
was reduced to 23103 VC.
If an arrestee has three or more convictions for any of the above

misdemeanors, the time period starts from the date of the
violation versus the conviction date.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/207
D. 23550.5 VC - Felony DUI Within Ten Years (formerly 23175.5 VC)
1. Officers shall seek approval for a felony booking of 23550.5 VC when the
arrestee has one of the following felony convictions within the past ten years:
a. 23550 VC
b. 23550.5 VC
c. 23175 VC - Felony DUI with Priors (superseded by 23550 VC)
d. 23175.5 VC - Felony DUI with (superseded by 23550.5 VC)
f. 23153 VC - Felony DUI
g. 191. 5 Penal Code (PC) - Gross Vehicular Manslaughter While

Intoxicated
h. 192 (c)(3) PC - Vehicle Manslaughter while DUI
E. Officers who have an arrestee in custody for 23550 VC or 23550.5 VC shall booked the
arrestee at the designated jail facility for felony traffic-related offenses.
1. Booking advice/approval shall be given in accordance with Los Angeles Police

Department Manual Section 4/216.01, Advice/Approval Felony Bookings, Adult
Felony Traffic Arrests heading.
NOTE: The correct booking charge is the original arrest charge followed by the
appropriate felony enhancement (i.e.: 23152(a)/23550 VC - DUI With
Priors or 23152(a)/23550.5 VC - DUI Within Ten Years).
2. The appropriate traffic division (24, 25, 34, 35) shall be listed as the probable
investigative unit on the LAPD Consolidated Booking form 5.1.2.
F. Completion and approval of arrest reports shall be given in accordance with Los
Angeles Police Department Manual Section 4/216.01, Advice/Approval Felony
Bookings, Adult Felony Traffic Arrests.
Officers completing an arrest report shall:
1. Include all information supporting the felony booking approval (such as date of
conviction, court, file number, etc.) shall be included under the “Booking”
heading of the Arrest Report narrative.
2. Attach the DMV printout, criminal history and/or CCHRS to the Arrest Report
which is to be reviewed by the approving supervisor.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/207
3. Upon approval, transport all arrest and related reports to the appropriate entity:
a. Central Bureau: Central Traffic Division Watch Commander’s

Office
b. South Bureau: South Traffic Division Watch Commander’s

Office
c. West Bureau: West Traffic Division Watch Commander’s Office
d. Valley Bureau: Van Nuys Area Records
2/208 DISTRIBUTION OF FORM 5.02.05 (DUI Face Sheet)
A. When a suspect is arrested for misdemeanor DUI, a copy of the Form 5.02.05 shall be
included as a page of the Arrest Report.
B. When a suspect is not arrested, but a filing for 23152 VC is requested on the Traffic
Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, a copy of the Form 5.02.05 shall be included as a
page of the Traffic Collision Report. Complete the filing information in the filing request
in the “Filing Request” section, after the “Statements” section, articulate the facts of the
filing request.
C. When a person is not arrested and no filing for 23152 or 23153 VC is indicated, the
Form 5.02.05 shall be attached to the Traffic Collision Report and numbered as a page
of the report. Officers shall articulate in the traffic collision report why an arrest was not
completed (not under the influence, etc.).
C. When a person is not arrested and no Traffic Collision Report is completed, the Form
5.02.05 shall be attached to the officer’s TDFAR or DFAR. Officers should indicate in the
Call/Disposition section of the TDFAR or DFAR why no arrest was made.
2/209 COMBINED TRAFFIC COLLISION AND ARREST REPORT
A. When an arrestee is taken into custody for a felony crime and the follow-up investigation is
the responsibility of a Traffic Detectives Section, officers should use the combined Traffic
Collision and Arrest Report.
NOTE: When unusual circumstances make the use of the combined traffic and collision
report impractical separate arrest and traffic collision reports may be completed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/209
B. Completion of the Reports
1. Traffic Collision Report -
a. A Traffic Collision Investigation, CHP 555 Form Set.
b. "Combined Traffic Collision/Arrest Report" shall be written in the top

right margin.
c. Arrest Narrative - The arrest narrative shall be written immediately

following the "Statements" portion of the Traffic Collision narrative. The
Arrest Report format will be completed in the usual manner.
2. Arrest Report - All reports shall be completed in the usual manner except that the
Arrest Report, Form 5.2, shall be modified as follows:
a. "Combined Traffic Collision/Arrest Report" shall be written in the top

right margin.
b. The Crime Report Box shall be checked.
c. In the Victim's Name Box, the name of the injured person other than Party
1 shall be entered. If there are no injuries, the name of Party 2 shall be
entered.
d. In the Involved Persons Section write "See Traffic Collision Report."
e. In the Combined Crime Report Section, the notation "Traffic" shall be

entered for the Type of Offense. The appropriate information shall be
placed in the Date and Time Crime Occurred Section.
f. The DUI Face Sheet, Form 5.05.2,, if used, shall bear the notation "See
Traffic Collision Report" in the narrative section.
3. Numbering - The Traffic Collision Report and the Arrest Report pages shall be
numbered separately.
a. A Traffic Collision Report shall be completed and the pages numbered in

the normal manner.
b. The Arrest Report pages shall be numbered as follows:
1) The Arrest Report, Form 5.2, shall be numbered page 1.
2) When applicable, 5.02.05, shall be numbered pages 2 and 3.
c. Any additional forms, such as a checklist for a chemical test, or forms

associated with Administrative Per Se Order of Suspension, shall be
attached to the Arrest Report.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/209
4. Corrections - Subsequent to the distribution of the report, corrections to the Traffic

Collision Report shall be made on a CHP Form 556 (Supplement) and corrections
to the Arrest Report shall be made on a Form 3.14.
NOTE: The term "Distribution" shall include any copies of the collision report sent
either inside or outside the Department, to ANY entity including the City
Attorney, District Attorney, LAFD personnel or private citizen.
2/300 REQUESTING CHEMICAL TESTS – 13353 VC
A person arrested for any offense committed in violation of 23152 VC or 23153 VC shall be requested to
submit to a chemical test of his breath or blood. The arrestee shall be read the chemical test admonition
verbatim from the current LAPD Form 5.02.05. When an arrestee refuses to submit to a chemical test, a
verbatim statement of the refusal shall be included in the arrest narrative. If an arrestee has chosen a
specific test and then is incapable or states that he is incapable of completing that chosen test, he shall have
the choice of submitting to and completing the remaining test. When an arrestee chooses a specific test
and fails to complete that test, or the remaining test, this constitutes a refusal.
NOTE: A urine test may be given in the following circumstances:
1. When suspect has been arrested for driving under the influence of alcohol and
drugs combined or drugs only;
2. When requested by the arrestee as an additional test to be stored and tested by a

laboratory of the arrestee’s choice and at the arrestee’s expense;
3. When circumstances exist where the other tests are unavailable, i.e., medical
condition of arrestee prohibits use of other tests.
The arrestee's consent is not required when he is unconscious or incapable of refusal. However, probable
cause that the suspect is under-the-influence of alcohol must exist.
THE SUSPECT MUST BE UNDER ARREST!
2/301 PRESENCE OF ATTORNEY DURING CHEMICAL TESTS - 23157 VC
Prior to administering any chemical test, the arrestee shall be informed that the right to counsel does not
extend to having an attorney present before stating whether he will submit to a test, before deciding which
test to take, or during the administration of the test chosen. The chemical test admonishment shall be read
verbatim as per Form 5.02.05.
2/302 ADMINISTERING CHEMICAL TESTS
A person arrested for any offense committed in violation of 23152 VC or 23153 VC shall be transported to
an appropriate facility for administration of the chemical test.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/302
If the parent of a juvenile causes the juvenile not to submit to a chemical test pursuant to the provisions of
13353 VC, after the juvenile has specifically chosen that test, the juvenile's failure to complete the test
constitutes a refusal and subjects him to a six-month suspension of his privilege to operate a motor vehicle,
unless he then selects and submits to one of the other specified chemical tests (54 Cal, Atty. Gen 248).
2/303 BREATH TEST (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.38)
A. Use of Equipment
1. Operation of the breath testing equipment shall be restricted to personnel who have
been trained in its use.
2. When the arresting officer has not been trained in the use of the breath testing
equipment, he shall ensure that the examination is administered by an officer
trained in its use.
3. A Breath Testing Device Check List shall be completed each time the Breath
Testing Device is set up for a test.
NOTE: Breath testing equipment is only used as an investigative aid in driving under-the-
influence arrests involving alcohol, drugs or for other purposes at the discretion of
the concerned watch commander.
B. Administering Test
1. Prior to administering the breath test, the testing officer shall observe the subject
for a 20-minute period. During this period the subject shall not eat, drink, smoke,
regurgitate, or vomit. If the subject eats, drinks, smokes, regurgitates, or vomits
during that time period or between sampling, the pretesting observation time shall
be repeated.
2. At least two breath samples shall be collected. No waiting period is required

between samples.
3. If the readings of the two samples vary more than .02 percentage points, additional
samples shall be collected until the results of any two samples are within .02
percentage points.
4. If five samples have been collected and the test is not complete (no two samples
within .02 percentage points), the officer shall direct the subject to submit to either a
blood or urine test.
5. Failure to complete a test shall be deemed a refusal.
6. Upon completion of the breath test, the "Additional Chemical Test Admonition"
shall be read if the arrestee is suspected of drug impairment.
NOTE: An arrestee who obtains a breath test reading of .30% or higher SHALL be
examined by medical personnel.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/303
C. Recording Results
1. The breath test printout shall be separated from the machine only when:
a. The test is completed (two samples within .02 percentage points); OR
b. Five samples have been collected and the test is not completed
2. When no more than three samples are required to obtain a complete breath test,
the breath test printout shall be taped to the Breath Testing Device Check List on
the space provided.
3. The printout shall be positioned in a manner that will not interfere with the reading of
the test results.
4. When more than three samples are obtained, the breath test printout shall be
secured to the first check list, then all check lists should be stapled together.
5. When the test printout is longer than the check list, the printout shall be folded in a
manner that will not interfere with the reading of the test results.
D. Equipment Malfunction
When the operator of the breath testing equipment determines that there may be equipment
malfunction, the operator shall complete a Service Request, Form 5.20.4, and telephonically
notify SID of the malfunction.
E. Operator's Check List
The Breath Testing Device Check List shall be completed by the administering officer. The
check list shall be:
1. Attached to the Arrest Report; OR
2. Attached to the DUI Face Sheet, Form 5.02.05, and submitted with the Daily Field
Activity Report or Traffic Daily Field Activity Report when no Arrest Report is made;
OR
3. Attached to a Traffic Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, when completed as a
result of a traffic collision investigation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/304 BLOOD TEST (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.40)
A. Criteria for Requesting
A blood sample may be requested by an officer in the following situations:
1. The arrestee indicates his willingness to submit to a blood test incidental to his
arrest.
NOTE: When the arrestee initially consents to a blood test and then changes his
mind prior to the blood being withdrawn, a blood sample shall not be taken.
2. The arrestee is in custody for a felony, and the level of his intoxication would be an
essential element in the alleged violation
3. The arrestee is unconscious or is so impaired that he is unable to consent to a

chemical test.
NOTE: When such a condition exists, the following steps shall be taken to
determine if the arrestee is a hemophiliac, a heart patient, or possibly
using anticoagulant medication:
a. Check for medical information o n the arrestee's person, such as a

"Medic-Alert" bracelet or necklace or any other item indicative of
the arrestee's medical background.
b. If a relative or friend of the arrestee is present who can provide

information about the arrestee's medical condition, record the
name, the relationship to the arrestee, and the statements of that
person in the Arrest Report.
c. Inform the attending physician of all information in the officer's

possession which may have a bearing on the arrestee's physical
condition.
4. The person collecting the blood sample shall be listed as a witness on the CHP
555 Form Set and the Arrest Report.
B. Criteria - Forced Blood Sample Withdrawal
1. Forced blood samples may be obtained from an arrestee only when all of the
following conditions have been met:
a. The arrestee is in custody for a felony traffic offense; AND
b. It involves a severe or fatal injury (Traffic Manual 3/112) to a person other

than the arrestee; AND
c. The level of intoxication would be an essential element in the alleged

violation; AND
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/304
d. The arrestee refuses to voluntarily submit to any of the available chemical

tests; AND
e. Prior approval from a traffic supervisor has been obtained. Include the
traffic division supervisor's name and serial number in the narrative of the
Arrest Report; AND
f. A traffic or patrol supervisor is present at the medical facility to witness the

withdrawal of the blood sample.
NOTE: Reasonable force may be used to remove blood from a felony arrestee
who is in custody for an offense involving death or serious injury and who
demonstrates an unwillingness to cooperate.
EXCEPTION: An arrestee whose medical condition prohibits a blood sample from being
taken shall be given a choice of a breath or urine test, if possible.
2. Supervisor's Responsibilities:
a. Upon being advised of a request for a forced blood withdrawal by an

arresting officer, the concerned traffic division supervisor shall evaluate
the merits to determine if the criteria for forced blood withdrawal are met.
b. The circumstances and whether approval was given shall be documented

in each case on a Sergeant's Daily Log or Watch Commander's Daily Log.
NOTE: The "totality of the circumstances" is the legal standard for judging the
propriety of forcibly withdrawing blood from an arrestee.
C. Requesting Withdrawal
Whenever a blood sample is to be obtained from an arrestee who refuses to sign a consent
to withdraw blood, the arresting officer shall direct a Request for Withdrawal of Blood, Form
4.35, to any of the following hospital personnel:
1. Physician
2. Registered nurse
3. Licensed clinical laboratory technologist
4. Licensed clinical bio-analyst
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/304
D. Physician or Hospital Employee Refusal
1. When a physician or hospital employee authorized by 23158(a) VC, refuses to

withdraw a blood sample, the officers having custody of the arrestee shall request a
supervisor to respond to the location. Upon arrival, the responding supervisor shall:
a. Evaluate the situation and determine whether the arrest and the officers'
actions conformed with Department policy; AND
b. Verify the refusal by the hospital employee to withdraw blood; AND
c. Request an administrator of the hospital to advise the refusing employee

as to the contract responsibilities between the hospital staff and the City.
2. When the supervisor is unable to contact an administrator and/or the hospital

employee still refuses to withdraw a blood sample, the supervisor shall then request
the arrestee to submit to one of the other two remaining chemical tests. If the
arrestee refuses the other tests, the arrestee may, if practical, be transported to the
Jail Division Dispensary for the test. This should be done with a supervisor's
approval.
3. After the arrestee is booked and all appropriate reports are completed, the
concerned supervisor and officers shall each complete an Employee's Report,
Form 15.7, recording all pertinent information regarding the refusal to withdraw
blood. The completed Employee's Reports shall be forwarded through channels to
Detective Headquarters Division, Attention Medical Evaluation Detail.
4. If a hospital insists upon having the written consent of a juvenile's parent prior to
performing the blood test, and the parent's consent is not forthcoming because of
either the parent's unavailability or refusal to sign, the hospital's refusal shall not be
construed as the juvenile's refusal under the provisions of 13353 VC.
E. Obtaining and Packaging
1. The withdrawal of all blood samples shall be witnessed by the requesting officer.
The officer shall obtain the name and employee number of the person withdrawing
the blood sample. This information, along with the business address and phone
number, shall be noted in the Arrest Report.
2. Officers obtaining blood samples for alcohol or drug analysis shall follow the
procedures outlined on the Blood Sample Envelope, Form 12.51.1.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/304
3. Officers obtaining whole blood samples from hospital employees for other than
alcohol or drug analysis shall:
a. Tilt the vial slowly and gently for approximately 20 seconds to ensure that
the preservative in the vial mixes with the blood.
b. Complete the label on the vial with the suspect's name, the DR number,
and the booking officer's initials.
c. Place the vial in the Analyzed Evidence Envelope and seal the envelope
with a Sealed Evidence Label bearing the date, the DR number, and the
officer's payroll signature and serial number signed in ink.
F. Whole blood samples shall be booked at Central Property Section or Valley Property
Section only.
NOTE: When booking urine or blood samples, officers shall affix a Biohazard Label to the
upper left corner of the front of the Analyzed Evidence To Be Refrigerated
Envelope. Officers shall also write the words “Admin Per Se” in the side margin of
the Analyzed Evidence To Be Refrigerated Envelope. (Department Manual
4/343.40).
2/305 URINE TEST (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.42)
As of January 1, 1999, 23157 CVC was amended, eliminating the choice of a urine test from the options for
chemical tests relating to operating a motor vehicle under the influence unless both the blood or breath test
are unavailable or there is a specified condition that warrants using the urine test.
NOTE: Urine may continue to be a test option if a person is under the influence of drugs and
alcohol or drugs only. An arrestee may also elect to give a urine sample for testing
pursuant to the additional chemical test admonition required under Section
23157.5 CVC.
Additionally, any person who is afflicted with hemophilia or with a heart condition and is using an
anticoagulant under the direction of a licensed physician and surgeon is exempt from the blood test
requirement. Other chemical test options should be considered.
A. Administering the Test
1. An officer or station officer of the same sex as the arrestee shall:
a. Instruct the arrestee that he must void his bladder, witnessed by the officer.
b. Escort the arrestee to an appropriate rest room facility.
c. Wait 20 minutes before attempting to collect a urine sample.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/305
d. Provide the arrestee with a treated urine sample container (plastic SID jar).
e. Ensure that the sample container is not rinsed prior to sample collection.
f. Remain present and observe the arrestee while he provides a urine

sample.
g. Ensure that the label identifying the chemist responsible for preparation of
the container is not removed.
NOTE: Protective gloves shall be worn when handling a urine sample.
2. The Driving-Under-the-Influence Arrest Report (Continuation), Form 5.02.05, shall

indicate:
a. The time the arrestee’s bladder was first voided; AND
b. The time that the urine sample was collected; AND
c. The name of the employee who administered the urine test.
NOTE: When an arresting officer becomes aware that an arrestee has voided his bladder
while in custody, the 20-minute waiting period shall begin at the time the bladder
was first voided. The time and circumstances when the bladder was voided shall
be recorded in the Driving-Under-Influence Arrest Report, Form 5.02.05.
B. Booking Sample
1. The officer booking a urine sample shall:
a. Ensure that the lid is placed tightly on the container.
b. Place a completed Sealed Evidence Label on the side of the container for
later identification in court. This label shall not seal the container.
c. Complete the Analyzed Evidence Envelope, Form 12.51, and print the
words "ALCOHOL URINE" or "OPIATE URINE" in red at the top of the
envelope.
d. Place the container in the Analyzed Evidence Envelope.
e. Seal the flap of the envelope with a completed Sealed Evidence Label.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/305
2. All urine samples shall be booked at Central Property Section or Valley Property
Section.
NOTE: When booking urine or blood samples officers shall affix a Biohazard Label to the upper
left corner of the front of the Analyzed Evidence To Be Refrigerated Envelope. Officers
shall also write the words “Admin Per Se” in the side margin of the Analyzed Evidence
To Be Refrigerated Envelope. (Department Manual 4/343.40).
2/307 REFUSAL TO SUBMIT TO OR COMPLETE CHEMICAL TEST

(DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/343.57)
When a suspect refuses to take a chemical test, or chooses a specific test and fails to complete the test, the
arresting officer shall read the chemical test admonition to the suspect.
If the suspect continues to refuse to take a chemical test or to complete his choice of the remaining tests, the
arresting officer shall request a supervisor.
A supervisor shall determine that the suspect was properly admonished as to his chemical rights and re-
admonish the suspect as per the chemical test admonition (Form 5.02.05).
When a suspect refuses to complete a chemical test after being properly admonished as outlined above, the
arresting officer shall complete the "Notification of Refusal to Submit to or Complete Chemical Test" portion
of the Form 5.02.05.
All information concerning the refusal shall be included in the Arrest Report. This information should include:
A. Statements indicating the suspect's understanding of the chemical test admonition, if any
are made.
B. A verbatim statement of the suspect's refusal on the face of the Form 5.02.05 and, if there is
not enough room, within the narrative portion under "Additional."
C. The time that the admonition was first given and the time that the explanation of the
admonition was given by the arresting officer.
D. The time that the suspect was again admonished by the supervisor advising booking. Any
comments made by the suspect regarding his refusal should be included in the narrative
portion of the report.
2/308 BREATH TESTING DEVICE READING LESS THAN .08
When an intoxicated driver has a breath test reading of less than .08% and that reading is not consistent with
the driver’s objective symptoms, the arrestee shall be:
A. Examined by a DRE (or, if one is not available, by a Department-recognized narcotics

expert) to determine if a drug influence evaluation should be conducted.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/308
B. Examined at a contract hospital or jail division dispensary medical personal to rule out
injuries or illnesses which could cause signs and symptoms similar to alcohol and/or drug
influence.
NOTE: The element of being under-the-influence shall be based on the signs and
symptoms identified by the officer. Results of chemical tests (blood, breath
or urine) shall be used only as corroborative evidence.
2/309 ADDITIONAL CHEMICAL TEST REQUIREMENTS – 13353.5 VC
If a person is lawfully arrested for driving under-the-influence of any drug, or combination of alcohol and
any drug, the person may choose to take a breath test.
If the arrestee chooses a breath test, he may be required to submit to a blood or urine test pending
subsequent evaluation by a DRE or Department-recognized narcotics expert.
An arrestee has a choice of which additional test he will take. If the arrestee cannot complete the additional
test, he will be deemed to have refused all tests required by 13353 VC.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/310 ADMINISTRATIVE ORDER OF SUSPENSION

(CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS OVER 21)
When an officer makes an arrest for a violation of 23152 or 23153 VC where the blood alcohol count (BAC)
is .08% or above, OR if the arrestee requests a blood or urine test OR refuses all tests AND the arresting
officer believes that the BAC would be .08% or higher, then, in addition to the regular arrest procedures, the
arresting officer shall:
A. Cause the California Driver License of the arrestee to be confiscated, if it is in the

arrestee's possession.
B. Complete a DMV Form DS 367 (Age 21 and Older Officer’s Statement, Administrative Per
Se Suspension/Revocation Order and Temporary Driver License).
1. Issue the fourth page of the DMV form, which is a 30-day temporary driver license,
to the arrestee.
2. Attach the third page of the DMV form to the Arrest Report.
C. Forward the completed forms and the arrestee's California Driver License, along with a
photocopy of the Breath Testing Device Check List, to the appropriate DMV office.
NOTE: The law states that all required reports and forms must be received by DMV
within five working days of the date of arrest.
D. When booking blood or urine samples the following procedure shall be followed:
1. Place the blood or urine sample in a gray Analyzed Evidence Envelope, Form
12.51.1, and book the evidence in accordance with existing Department
procedures.
2. Boldly print in red "ADMIN PER SE" on the left side of the Analyzed Evidence
Envelope.
3. Legibly print the arrestee's CDL number and date of birth on the back of the
Analyzed Evidence Envelope.
NOTE: This will cause SID to forward a certified copy of the blood or urine results to DMV.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/311 ADMINISTRATIVE ORDER OF SUSPENSION

(NON-CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS OVER 21)
When an officer makes an arrest for a violation of 23152 or 23153 VC where the blood alcohol count (BAC)
is .08% OR above, or if the arrestee requests a blood or urine test OR refuses all tests AND the arresting
officer believes that the BAC would be .08% or higher, then, in addition to the regular arrest procedures, the
A. NOT cause the Driver License of the arrestee to be confiscated.
B. Complete a DMV Form DS 367 (Age 21 and Older Officer’s Statement, Administrative Per
1. Issue the fourth page of the DMV form to the arrestee.
NOTE: When the arrestee completes a blood or urine test, DMV form DS 367A, Officer's
Supplemental Statement, shall be completed.
C. Forward the completed forms along with a photocopy of the Breath Testing Device Check
List, to the appropriate DMV office.
NOTE: The law states that all required reports and forms must be received by DMV within
five working days of the date of arrest.
procedures.
Envelope.
3. Legibly print the arrestee's driver license number, state and date of birth on the
back of the Analyzed Evidence Envelope.
NOTE: This will cause SID to forward a certified copy of the blood or urine results to DMV.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/312 ADMINISTRATIVE PER SE ORDER OF SUSPENSION

(CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS UNDER 21)
When an officer makes an arrest for a violation of 23140 VC where the blood alcohol count (BAC) is .05%
OR above, or if the arrestee requests a blood or urine test OR refuses all tests AND the arresting officer
believes that the BAC would be .05% or higher, then, in addition to the regular arrest procedures, the
A. Cause the Driver License of the arrestee to be confiscated.
B. Complete a DMV Form DS 367M (Under Age 21 Officer’s Statement, Administrative Per
procedures.
Envelope.
NOTE: This will cause SID to forward a certified copy of the blood or urine results to
DMV.
Pursuant to Section 23136 VC, it is unlawful for any person under age 21 to drive a vehicle with a BAC
of .01%. When an officer lawfully detains a person under 21 who is driving a motor vehicle, and the
officer has reasonable cause to believe that the person in violation of 23136 VC, the officer shall request
that the person take a preliminary alcohol screening (PAS) test.
NOTE: If a PAS device is not immediately available, the officer may request the person to
submit to chemical testing of his or blood or breath.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/312
If the person refuses to take, or fails to complete, the PAS test or refuses to take or fails to complete a
chemical test if a PAS device is not immediately available, or if the person takes the PAS test and that
test reveals a blood alcohol concentration of 0.01% or greater (and less than 0.05%), or if the results of a
chemical test reveal a blood alcohol concentration of 0.01% or greater (and 0.05% or less), the officer
shall:
A. Cause the driver license of the arrestee to be confiscated.
procedures.
Envelope.
DMV.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/313 ADMINISTRATIVE PER SE ORDER OF SUSPENSION

(NON-CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS UNDER 21)
When an officer makes an arrest for a violation of 23140 VC where the blood alcohol count (BAC) is .05%
OR above, or if the arrestee requests a blood or urine test OR refuses all tests AND the arresting officer
believes that the BAC would be .05% or higher, then, in addition to the regular arrest procedures, the
A. NOT cause the driver license of the arrestee to be confiscated.
NOTE: The law states that all required reports and forms must be received by DMV
within five working days of the date of arrest.
procedures.
Envelope.
DMV.
Pursuant to Section 23136 VC, it is unlawful for any person under age 21 to drive a vehicle with a BAC
of .01%. When an officer lawfully detains a person under 21 who is driving a motor vehicle, and the
officer has reasonable cause to believe that the person in violation of 23136 VC, the officer shall request
that the person take a preliminary alcohol screening (PAS) test.
NOTE: If a PAS device is not immediately available, the officer may request the person to
submit to chemical testing of his or blood or breath.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/313
If the person refuses to take, or fails to complete, the PAS test or refuses to take or fails to complete a
chemical test if a PAS device is not immediately available, or if the person takes the PAS test and that
test reveals a blood alcohol concentration of 0.01% or greater (and less than 0.05%), or if the results of a
chemical test reveal a blood alcohol concentration of 0.01% or greater (and 0.05% or less), the officer
shall:
A. NOT cause the driver license of the arrestee to be confiscated.
procedures.
Envelope.
DMV.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/314 DMV ADMIN PER SE MAILING ADDRESSES
All officers working out of LAPD Divisions with the exception of Hollenbeck and Northeast shall
immediately mail the required DMV Admin Per Se documentation to the following address:
Department of Motor Vehicles

El Segundo Driver Safety
390 N. Sepulveda Boulevard, Suite 2075
El Segundo, CA 90245
Officers assigned to Hollenbeck and Northeast Divisions shall immediately mail the required DMV
Admin Per Se documentation to the following address:
Department of Motor Vehicles

Driver Safety
5500 S. Eastern Avenue
Commerce, CA 90040
NOTE: As defined in Section 23137 b(3) VC, “immediately” means on or before the end of the
fifth ordinary business day after the notice of order of suspension was served.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/400 DRIVING-UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE (DUI) ARREST REPORT, FORM 5.02.05
The DUI Arrest Report, Form 5.02.05, is designed to ensure the uniform reporting of DUI arrests
(Traffic Manual 2/202).
2/401 SOURCE OF ACTIVITY
A. Officers' actions (parked, on patrol, responding to, etc.)
B. Officers' direction of travel and street (N/B-2 Sunset, E/B-1 Vermont)
2/402 OFFICERS' OBSERVATIONS
A. Details of violation
1. Violator's direction of travel (E/B-1 Vermont)
2. Speed
3. Unsafe lane changes
4. Straddling or weaving
B. Unusual parking when stopping
1. Hit curb
2. Stopped in traffic lane
3. Over 18 inches from curb
C. Violator's actions and physical appearance
1. Staggering (when exiting vehicle)
2. Appearance (attitude, breath, coordination, eyes, face, speech)
3. Motor skills (fumbling while removing driver's license from wallet)
D. Results of Field Sobriety Test (balance, turning, walking)
E. Note and record any voluntary statements
F. Opinion of intoxication
NOTE: The above two headings, "Source of Activity" and "Officers' Observations," must
establish probable cause for arrest and must include elements of the arrest and
opinion of intoxication. Describe any PC or VC violations involving the arrestee.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/403 ARREST OF SUSPECT
A. Placed under arrest for... (specific charges)
B. Chemical test
1. Admonition
2. Test results
a. The Breath Testing Device number and results recorded, or statement of

blood or urine test.
b. When a urine sample is provided, enter the name and serial number of the
officer present when the sample was provided in the "Chemical Test
Administered By" portion of the DUI Arrest Report (Continuation), Form
5.02.05.
c. When a blood sample is collected, enter the name and serial number of the
officer who witnessed the collection of the sample in the "Chemical Test
Administered By" portion of the DUI Arrest Report (Continuation), Form
5.02.05.
3. Refusal
If the arrestee refused to submit to any chemical test (DMV requirement), quote the
refusal verbatim on the Form 5.02.05 (Traffic Manual 2/307).
a. Record statements
b. Understanding of admonition
c. How rights were waived
d. Statement regarding refusal
C. Admonition of Constitutional Rights
NOTE: To avoid confusing the suspect, the Admonition of Rights shall be read as they
appear on the Form 5.02.05 or on the officer's notebook.
D. Record statements on face sheet
2/404 BOOKING
A. Location
B. Approval
C. Section
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/405 EVIDENCE
Officers shall report the following:
A. What, where, by whom discovered; and
B. Give disposition of evidence
2/406 INJURIES
A. Describe in detail
B. Document MT and by whom performed (doctor's name).
2/407 NOTIFICATION
A. Who was notified
B. Who made the notification
2/408 AGGRAVATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Give a brief description of complicated arrest.
2/409 ADDITIONAL
Additional information is one of the most important yet least utilized portions of the Arrest Report. Most
judges state that after a defendant is convicted or pleads guilty, one of the considerations in the judge's
determination of the degree of sentence is the additional information that the officer has put in this section. If
applicable, include the following under "Additional."
A. No driver's license - explain for possible filing
B. Quote MT and opinions of doctor performing medical treatment
C. Explain all "yes" answers from the face sheet
D. Booking number of any co-defendant
E. Disposition of arrestee's vehicle
F. Any additional pertinent information
EXAMPLES: Bottle in car, defendant attempted to strike officer, defendant's use of profanity, etc.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/410 TRAFFIC COLLISION SUMMARY
If applicable, include the collision summary.
2/411 UNUSUAL ACTIONS BY SUSPECT
In the narrative portion of the Arrest Report, the officer shall describe in detail any unusual actions by the
suspect.
EXAMPLES: Hiccuping, belching, vomiting, fighting, crying, laughing, lighting wrong end of
cigarette, food or beverage stains on clothing, etc.
2/412 SUGGESTED WORDS AND PHRASES
The following words and phrases are suggested to be used on DUI arrest reports. These words more
accurately describe the condition of a person under-the-influence of an intoxicant. Officers shall familiarize
themselves with these definitions before using them in a report or testifying in court.
FACE
ATTITUDE
Pale Flushed
Excited Profane Pallid
Polite Combative
Hilarious Cooperative
Sullen Discourteous SPEECH
Talkative Morose
Carefree Inattentive Rambling Accent
Drowsy Incoherent Stuttered
Mumbled Profane
Slurred Lethargic
BREATH
Odor of alcoholic beverage BALANCE

Non-alcoholic
Falling Wobbling
Swaying Needed support
COORDINATION
Good Impaired TURNING

Fair Not observed
Poor Falling Hesitant
Staggering Swaying
EYES
WALKING
Clear Bloodshot
Watery Swollen Falling Stumbling
Tearful Injured Staggering Swaying
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/500 SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES
2/501 ARREST OF PHYSICIAN EN ROUTE TO TREAT EMERGENCY CASE

When a physician is taken into custody while en route to treat an emergency case, the arresting officer shall
immediately cause the patient to be notified. If this is not possible, the person who summoned the physician
shall be notified.
2/502 ARREST OF PERSON OPERATING PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION VEHICLE
When a person operating a public transportation vehicle is taken into custody and no other crew member is
present, the arresting officer shall notify the dispatcher of the concerned company and remain at the scene
until an authorized person takes charge of the vehicle.
2/503 ARREST OF POSTAL EMPLOYEE (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/216.60)
When a postal employee driving a vehicle carrying mail is arrested for a felony or a misdemeanor of which
intoxication is an element, in addition to the regular arrest procedure the officers shall:
A. Cause a telephonic report to be made, without delay, to the supervisor of the Post Office
Garage, United States Postal Service.
B. Complete an Employee's Report, Form 15.7, containing the details of the arrest. A copy of
this report shall be forwarded to the Superintendent of Motor Vehicles, United States Postal
Service.
Arresting officers shall be responsible for the safety of the vehicle and its contents until a Post Office
representative has arrived at the scene and taken charge of the vehicle and its contents.
When a postal employee driving a vehicle carrying mail is apprehended on a misdemeanor charge not
including the element of intoxication, he/she shall not be taken into custody. In lieu of making a physical
arrest, the officers shall:
A. Obtain the name of the driver.
B. Obtain the serial number of the vehicle.
C. Complete a misdemeanor traffic citation.
NOTE: A driver of a government vehicle is not required to possess a valid California driver's
license while operating a government-owned vehicle. However, they must be in possession
of a U.S. Government drivers license.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/504 ARREST OF POLICE RESERVE CORPS OFFICER

When a Police Reserve Officer is booked, any Department-issued equipment in his possession shall be
taken and immediately forwarded with one copy of the Arrest Report, Form 5.2, to the Officer-in-Charge,
Reserve Coordinator, Training Division.
2/505 ARREST OF SPECIAL IDENTIFICATION OFFICER

When a person is booked who has a Special Officer Identification (issued by the Board of Police
Commissioners) in his possession, such identification shall be taken from the booked person and forwarded
immediately, together with one copy of the Arrest Report, Form 5.2, to the Commanding Officer,
Commission Investigation Division.
2/506 LOCATION OF ARRESTEE'S VEHICLE
When an arrestee's vehicle is not impounded or otherwise disposed of, officers shall indicate on the
Booking and Identification Record, Form 5.1, and on the appropriate Arrest Report the exact location where
the vehicle was parked.
2/507 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CUSTODY OF ARRESTEE'S PROPERTY
The searching officer shall be responsible for the care and custody of an arrestee's personal property until
the searching officer's name is entered on the Booking and Identification Record. The booking employee
shall be responsible for the care and custody of the property until it is transferred or released.
NOTE: At the time of booking, the completed Prisoner's Property Identification, Form 5.1,
shall be placed in the transparent polyethylene envelope with the prisoner's
personal property in such a manner that the identification information is visible.
2/508 PROPERTY TAKEN FROM AN ARRESTEE
Property which has been taken from the possession of an arrestee shall be accounted for as follows:
A. Evidence - Property taken from an arrestee which has or may have evidential value shall be
booked as evidence. Officers shall issue a Property Receipt, Form 10.10, for all property
removed from an arrestee and booked as evidence.
B. Personal Property - An arrestee's personal property which can be contained in a property

package or purse shall be delivered to the custodial jailer at the time of booking. When
booking an arrestee into the City jail system, items which can be contained in a property
package or purse shall be listed on the Booking and Identification Record, Form 5.1. If
there is insufficient space, a Continuation Sheet, Form 15.9, shall be used. One copy of the
Continuation Sheet shall be attached to each copy of the Booking and Identification Record.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/508
C. Excess Personal Property - An arrestee's personal property which cannot be contained in a

property package or purse shall be packaged separately as excess property. Each bundle
or large item shall be tagged with a separate Personal Property Envelope. An Excess
Personal Property Receipt, Form 10.8, shall be completed, itemizing the property. Excess
personal property shall be deposited with the Property Officer at the Area of booking.
EXCEPTION: Excess personal property of an arrestee booked into a County jail facility shall be
booked at Central Property Section, Property Division.
D. Inscribed or Numbered Property - An arrestee's personal property which bears an

inscription or number shall be reported on the Booking and Identification Record, Form 5.1.
E. Animal - When an arrestee's animal has been placed in the care of an animal shelter, a
notation indicating the type of animal and the address of the shelter shall be made on the
Booking and Identification Record, Form 5.1. A receipt should be issued by animal control
officers and that receipt number shall be included on the booking form.
2/509 REQUESTS FOR RE-EXAMINATION OF DRIVERS
Officers who have established reasonable cause that a driver is unable to safely operate a motor vehicle
shall request the licensee submit to a re-examination of his/her driving qualifications. The officer shall:
A. Complete the Notice of Priority Re-examination of Driver/ Request for Re-examination

of Driver, DMV Form DS 427;
B. Deliver the original form to the Traffic Division report auditor for distribution to the
Department of Motor Vehicles;
C. Issue the driver to be re-examined the pink copy of the form (priority re-exams only).
Upon receipt of a complete Notice of Priority Re-examination of Driver/ Request for Re-examination of
Driver, DMV Form DS 427, Traffic Division report auditors shall forward the forms to the appropriate
DMV office for the area the request was issued.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/600 TRAFFIC BOOKINGS
2/601 BOOKING A MALE ARRESTEE - LOCATION (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/604.18)
A. Felony male arrestee shall be booked as follows:
1. Traffic felony arrestee in Central, Rampart, Hollenbeck, Northeast, and Newton

Areas shall be booked at Jail Division.
2. Traffic felony arrestee in the Valley Bureau shall be booked at Jail Division, Valley
Jail Section (Valley Headquarters Building).
3. Traffic felony arrestee in Pacific, Hollywood, Wilshire, and West Los Angeles Areas
shall be booked at Pacific Area Jail.
4. Traffic felony arrestee in Southwest, Southeast, and 77th Street Areas shall be
booked at Southeast Area Jail.
5. Traffic felony arrestee in Harbor Area shall be booked at Harbor Area Jail.
B. Misdemeanor male arrestee shall be booked in the Area of arrest, or at Jail Division with
the Jail Division watch commander's approval.
NOTE: When a male misdemeanant is arrested with a female arrestee who is to be

booked at Sybil Brand Institute, the male misdemeanant shall be booked at Jail
Division.
2/602 BOOKING A F EMALE ARRESTEE - LOCATION (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/604.17)
Female arrestee (felony or misdemeanor) shall be booked at the following locations:
A. Rampart Jail, when arrested in Metropolitan Area.
B. Jail Division, Valley Jail Section (Valley Headquarters Building), when arrested in Valley
Bureau, Pacific Area, West Los Angeles Area, and Hollywood Area.
C. A female arrestee may be booked in the Area of arrest or nearest City jail facility when:
1. The arrestee is to be immediately arraigned; OR
2. The arrestee indicates a desire to bail out immediately and has sufficient funds;
OR
3. The arrest is for four (4) or more traffic warrants and the arrestee lacks sufficient
funds for bail, but indicates that arrangements can be made to have bail posted
within a reasonable time. The arresting officer, with the approval of his/her
supervisor, shall allow the arrestee to make the necessary notifications and cause
the arrestee to be detained in the Area of booking pending receipt of the bail.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/602
D. Arresting or transporting officers processing a female arrestee at Jail Division shall

maintain custody of the arrestee at all times while inside Jail Division.
2/603 BOOKING JOHN OR JANE DOE (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/604.10)
When an arrestee's name cannot be determined at the time of booking, the booking officer shall:
A. Obtain a John or Jane Doe number, in addition to the regular booking number, from the
Booking Record Information Services Unit, Records and Identification Division.
B. The John or Jane Doe number shall be placed in the space provided for the arrestee's
name on the Booking and Identification Record form.
2/604 BOOKING OF ARMED FORCES PERSONNEL (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/606.09)
Armed Forces personnel includes the United States Air Force, Army, Coast Guard, Navy, Marine Corps,
their Reserves when on active duty, and the National Guard when on active duty.
A. Notification to the Liaison Officer, Detective Headquarters Division, prior to booking or

release.
1. Name, rank, and serial number of arrestee
2. Branch of service
3. Organization, unit, and its location (ship or station)
4. Dress (uniform or civilian clothes)
5. Duty status (on pass, on orders, on leave, AWOL, deserter)
B. In addition to those items listed in #1 above, the name, rank, and serial number of the
Liaison Officer, Detective Headquarters Division, who was notified and of the notifying
officer shall be inserted in the box entitled "Property" on the Booking and Identification
Record form.
C. Felony and high grade misdemeanors shall be booked on the offense and not released to
military authorities (Department Manual 4/615.40). High grade misdemeanors are:
1. Petty theft
2. Dangerous weapons control laws
3. Indecent exposure
4. Child molesting
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/604
5. Contributing to the delinquency of a minor
6. Lewd conduct
7. Lewd loiterer
8. All other misdemeanor sex crimes
9. 23152 VC
10. Vehicular manslaughter (192(C)(2) PC)
2/609 UNBOOKED DUI DRIVER – NO T/C INVOLVED
A. When an officer arrests a suspect for misdemeanor DUI and no traffic collision is
involved but the suspect requires hospitalization prior to booking, the arresting officer
must ensure the following criteria has been met:
1. The suspect cannot be transported to Los Angeles County University of

Southern California Medical Center Jail Ward or other County Jail facility;
2. The suspect has valid identification;
3. The suspect has no outstanding warrants;
4. The suspect has been arrested and has submitted to a chemical test, or a drug
evaluation has been performed by a DRE or Department-recognized narcotics
expert forming the opinion of drug and/or alcohol intoxication;
5. The officer has obtained approval of a traffic detective or traffic supervisor; and,
6. The officer has, when possible, obtained fingerprints and photographs of the
suspect and obtain a photocopy of the suspect’s driver license. The items shall
be submitted with the Complaint Application.
B. When the above criteria have been met and the suspect has been released to the hospital,
an officer shall:
1. Complete a Complaint Application form as page one of the report;
2. Complete the DUI Arrest Report, LAPD Form 05.02.5, as pages two and three
of the report;
3. Complete an arrest narrative on a Continuation Sheet, LAPD Form 15.09, and

include the following statement in the Booking section, “Not booked due to need
for immediate medical attention (describe medical condition) and released to
hospital staff on advice of (traffic detective, supervisor or watch commander);”
and,
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/609
4. Obtain a miscellaneous DR number for the report. If an impound has been

completed or evidence has been booked, the impound or evidence DR number
shall be used on the report.
2/610 UNBOOKED DUI DRIVER – T/C INVOLVED
A. When a suspect has been injured as a result of a traffic collision or has an unrelated illness
to the extent that he may not be moved or booked into a Department jail facility, and the
suspect requires an absentee booking, the suspect may be released at the medical facility.
A request for filing for 23152(a) VC or 23153(a) VC can be made on the traffic collision
report, CHP 555 Form Set and CHP Form 556, provided all of the following requirements
are met:
1. The suspect has valid identification.
2. The suspect has no outstanding warrants.
3. The suspect has been arrested and has submitted to a chemical test, or a drug
evaluation has been performed by a DRE or Department-recognized narcotics
expert and an opinion of drug and/or alcohol intoxication has been determined.
4. The officer has obtained approval from a traffic detective or traffic supervisor.
5. The officer has, when possible, obtained fingerprints and photographs of the
suspect and a copy of his drivers license. These items shall be submitted with the
Traffic Collision Report.
B. The complete DUI arrest narrative shall be included following the "Statements" portion of the
Traffic Collision Report and include a Form 5.02.05.
EXCEPTION: Under the "Booking" section of the report state: "Not booked due to extent of
injuries (describe injuries) and released at hospital for further MT, on advice of
Sergeant , Watch Commander. Request filing for 23152(a) VC (Misdemeanor
23153(a) VC (Felony DUI)."
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/611 MEDICAL TREATMENT OF UNBOOKED ARRESTEE - ADULT
A. An officer having custody of an unbooked arrestee who is or complains of being ill, injured,
or in need of medication shall:
1. Cause the arrestee to be examined at the closest available contract hospital, Jail
Division (adult males only), or Valley Jail Section Dispensary.
2. Obtain a copy of the facility's MT record completed by the examining physician,

including a statement of the circumstances which will be used as a medical
authorization to book.
3. When the examining physician recommends continued medical attention or

scheduled dispensing of prescribed medication, but not hospitalization, the
arrestee shall be booked at a facility where such attention may be obtained, (Jail
Division or Valley Jail Section).
4. Include in the Arrest Report a detailed statement of the medical attention received
and/or prescribed.
5. Give the medical treatment record to the booking employee.
B. When an arrestee is transported to a private hospital by a City ambulance, necessary

treatment may be performed at that hospital.
1. A 23152 VC (DUI) arrestee who has been involved in a traffic collision and requires
immediate hospitalization may be released from custody upon approval of any
supervisor.
2. A traffic supervisor ONLY shall give approval in felony traffic offenses. Officers
shall inform the arrestee of his release from custody and that the District Attorney
will issue a complaint for the offense(s) committed.
C. Arrestee to be Hospitalized.
When the examining physician recommends hospitalization, an officer having custody of the
arrestee shall:
1. Obtain a copy of the facility's medical treatment record.
2. Cause the arrestee to be transported to the Los Angeles County USC Medical
Center (LAC-USCMC) Jail Ward and give the MT record to the booking deputy.
NOTE: When transportation by ambulance is required and the City ambulance is

unable to transport, request transportation through the County Ambulance
Department, LAC-USCMC.
3. Complete a Booking and Identification Record, Form 5.1.
4. Telephonically notify Records and Identification Division, Booking Records

Information Section, and report the arrestee information on the first nine lines of the
Booking and Identification Record.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/611
5. Obtain the arrestee's fingerprints.
6. Telephonically notify Detective Headquarters Division that photographs are

needed.
7. Package the arrestee's personal property.
8. Deposit excess personal property at Property Division (Department Manual

4/645.20).
9. Submit the necessary reports at the Area where the reports will be processed
(Department Manual 5/5.2-10).
D. Arrestee is Refused Hospitalization at LAC-USCMC Jail Ward
When the physician refuses to admit the arrestee to the Jail Ward, an officer shall:
1. Obtain a Medical Record, County Form 260, containing the reason for non-
admittance and referral.
2. Book the arrestee at the appropriate County jail facility.
3. Give the County Form 260 and the medical treatment record to the booking deputy.
4. Submit the necessary reports at the Area where the reports will be processed
(Department Manual 5/5.2-10).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/615 DUI - JUVENILES AND ADULTS UNDER 21
A. Adult and Juvenile Arrest:
23152(a) VC - It is unlawful for any person who is under-the-influence of any alcoholic

beverage or drug, or under the combined influence of any alcoholic beverage and d rug, to
drive a motor vehicle.
23152(d) VC - It is unlawful for any person who has 0.04 percent or more, by weight, of
alcohol in his or her blood to drive a commercial motor vehicle as defined in 15210 VC.
23153(a) VC - It is unlawful for any person, while under-the-influence of any alcoholic

beverage or drug, or under the combined influence of any alcoholic beverage and drug , to
drive a motor vehicle and concurrently do any act forbidden by law or neglect any duty
imposed by law in driving the vehicle, which act or neglect proximately causes bodily injury
to any person other than the driver.
23140(a) VC- It is unlawful for any person under the age of 21 years who has 0.05 percent
or more, by weight, of alcohol in his blood to drive a vehicle.
B. Adult and Juvenile Administrative Section:
23136 (a) VC - PAS (Preliminary Screening Device) - Notwithstanding 23152 VC and

23153 VC, it is unlawful for a person under the age of 21 years who has a blood-alcohol
concentration of 0.01 percent or greater, as measured by a preliminary alcohol screening
test, to drive a vehicle. This is a DMV administrative section only and not a criminal
offense. However, this section shall not bar prosecution under 23152 VC or 23153 VC or
any other provision of law.
C. Juveniles
1. FELONY DUI ARRESTS
a. Booking approval shall be obtained from a bureau traffic supervisors or

detectives.
b. All reports shall be turned into the concerned bureau traffic division prior to
end of watch.
2. MISDEMEANOR DUI ARRESTS
a. No traffic collision
1) Booking approval shall be obtained from the detective juvenile

coordinator or the area watch commander in the division of
occurrence. Juvenile Narcotics Section handles all juvenile DUI
arrests.
2) All reports shall be submitted to the concerned division detectives

prior to end of watch.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/615
b. Traffic collision
1) A juvenile DUI traffic collision is handled by the Traffic Division

Detective Section for the bureau of occurrence.
2) All reports shall be turned into the concerned bureau traffic division
prior to end of watch.
3. When a juvenile DUI arrestee’s breath test registers .08% or higher, or he

completes a blood or urine test, the subject shall be booked for 602WIC/23152(a)
VC or 602WIC/23153(a) VC and processed as any other misdemeanor juvenile
arrest. (No personal service citation issued.) The juvenile should be fingerprinted
and photographed and the arrest report shall be processed by the juvenile unit in
the area of arrest.
4. When a juvenile DUI arrestee’s breath test registers .05, .06 or .07 the arresting
officer may cite the juvenile for 23140(a) VC. The procedure for citing for 23140(a)
VC are as follows:
a. Document probable cause for administering the breath test in the narrative
of the citation or on a citation continuation, if necessary.
b. Write the citation number in the “DR. NO.” box in the upper right hand
corner of the completed breath test checklist.
c. Attach the breath teat checklist to the court copy of the personal service
citation (court copy) and forward it to juvenile traffic court.
d. Release the juvenile to a parent or guardian.
e. 23140(a) VC does not require a field sobriety test (FST); however should
an officer administer a FST, the FST results shall be documented on a DUI
face sheet (Form 5.02.05). The completed Form 5.02.05 shall include the
corresponding citation number in the “DR. NO.” box in the upper right hand
corner and shall also be attached to the green copy of the personal service
citation (court copy).
NOTE: A juvenile may be booked for 602WIC/23152(a) VC or 602WIC/23153(a)

VC with a breath test reading of .07 or less providing you show the
juvenile’s driving pattern was a hazard to other motorists and pedestrians.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
2/615
5. Zero Tolerance
a. .01 to .04 - DMV - administrative only:
1) Complete a DL360; AND
2) May arrest 602WIC/23152(a) VC or 602WIC/23153(a) VC

(Providing you show the juvenile’s driving pattern was a hazard to
other motorists and pedestrians).
NOTE: 23140 VC does not apply
b. .05 to .07:
1) May arrest 602WIC/23152(a) VC or 602WIC/23153(a) VC

(Providing you show the juvenile’s driving pattern was a hazard to
other motorists and pedestrians); OR
2) May issue a personal service citation for 23140 VC.
c. .08 and Above - Arrest for 602WIC/23152(a) VC or 602WIC/23153(a) VC
D. Adults - 18 to 21 years old: (18, 19 or 20 years of age)
a. .01 to .04 - zero tolerance (DMV - administrative only):
1) Complete a DL360; AND
2) May arrest 23152(a) VC or 23153(a) VC (Proving you show the person’s

driving pattern was a hazard to other motorists and pedestrians).
b. .05 to .07:
1) May arrest 23152(a) VC or 23153(a) VC (Proving you show the person’s

driving pattern was a hazard to other motorists and pedestrians); OR
2) May issue a personal service citation for 23140 VC.
c. .08 & above - arrest for 23152(a) VC or 23153(a) VC.
2/616 BOOKING JUVENILE ARRESTEE
An officer shall refer to the Department Manual and/or Los Angeles Police Department Juvenile Manual for
additional information regarding a juvenile(s) arrest for a traffic offense.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/100 DEFINITIONS
To properly apply the reporting policy as stated in this manual, it is necessary to first understand certain
fundamental terms. The following is a list of general traffic-related terms and their definitions.
3/101 ALLEY - 110 VC
"Alley" is any highway having a roadway not exceeding 25 feet in width which is primarily used for access to
the rear or side entrances of abutting property.
3/102 ANIMAL - RIDDEN OR DRIVEN - 21050 VC
Every person riding or driving an animal upon a highway has all of the rights and is subject to all of the duties
applicable to the driver of a vehicle by Divisions 10 and 11 (commencing with 20000 VC), except those
provisions which by their very nature can have no application.
3/103 BICYCLE - 231 VC
A bicycle is a device upon which any person may ride, propelled exclusively by human power through a belt,
chain, or gears, and having one or more wheels. Persons riding bicycles are subject to the provisions
specified in 21200 VC.
EXCEPTION: This does not include a child's tricycle where the pedals are attached to the wheel,
this would be classified as a pedestrian.
3/104 BUSINESS DISTRICT - 235 VC
A "business district" is that portion of a highway and the property contiguous thereto:
A. Upon one side of which highway, for a distance of 600 feet, 50 percent or more of the
contiguous property fronting thereon is occupied by buildings in use for business; OR
B. Upon both sides of which highway, collectively for a distance of 300 feet, 50 percent or
more of the contiguous property fronting thereon is so occupied. A business district may be
longer than the distances specified in this section if the above ratio of buildings in use for
business to the length of the highway exists.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/105 CITY PROPERTY INVOLVED (CPI)
City property is considered to be involved when there is damage to any property owned, maintained, or
contracted by the City; or when there is damage to another’s property as a result of contact with property
owned, maintained, or contracted by the City; or when any employee of the City is involved while acting
within the scope of his employment. City property need not sustain damage, nor have physical contact if
the actions of any involved party were influenced by City property involved.
EXAMPLES:
A. Traffic control device not functioning properly.
B. Police officer or traffic control officer directing traffic.
C. Pursuit by a police officer (directly or not directly involved).
D. Water in roadway from other than precipitation.
E. Any contact with a City-owned vehicle or conveyance which might result in City liability, even
though the incident may not qualify as a traffic collision.
F. Any incident in which an officer recognizes the possibility of City liability, such as the
physical condition of any City-controlled property which caused or contributed to any
collision.
G. Holes in the roadway, barricades, rubber cones marking offset lanes, etc.
H. A vehicle operated by a City employee on a mileage basis.
I. Situations where a police employee was present but not directly involved, which may have
been an influencing factor.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/105
All Traffic Collision Reports involving any of the following items shall be classified CPI:
BUREAU OF STREET LIGHTING Mail Stop 545

th
600 South Spring Street, 14 Floor
Light standards Los Angeles, CA 90012
BUREAU OF STREET SERVICES Mail Stop 550

600 South Spring Street, Suite 1200
Trees, shrubs, and lawns in parkways Los Angeles, CA 90012
Curbs, sidewalks, holes in the street, etc.
City-owned fences, barricades or guard rails
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Mail Stop 725

221 North Figueroa Street, Suite 500
Traffic signals and signs Los Angeles, CA 90012
Stop signs
Directional signs
Parking signs
Parking meters
Push-button signals
Flasher-type signals
Street name signs
Public transit buses under contractual agreements with privately-owned organizations
WATER AND POWER DEPARTMENT Mail Stop 800

111 North Hope Street
All poles - telephone, power, guy wires, etc. Los Angeles, CA 90012
Fire hydrants
Water and Power vehicles
Water and Power mileage vehicles
NOT CPI
Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority

Board of Education/Los Angeles Unified School District
Freeway call boxes - (State-owned)
Freeway telephones - (County-owned)
Los Angeles County Housing Authority
Airport Department
Harbor Department
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/106 CONVEYANCE
A conveyance is any device by which persons or property may be propelled, moved or drawn from place to
place. Included are motor vehicles, trains, animals under human control, and bicycles.
3/107 CROSSWALK - 275 VC
A. Unmarked - That portion of a roadway included within the prolongation or connection of the
boundary lines of sidewalks at intersection where the intersecting roadways meet at
approximately right angles, except the prolongation of such lines from an alley across a
street.
B. Marked - Any portion of a roadway distinctly indicated for pedestrian crossing by lines or
other markings on the surface. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section,
there shall not be a crosswalk where local authorities have placed signs indicating no
crossing.
3/108 DARKNESS - 280 VC
Darkness is any time from o ne-half hour after sunset to one-half hour before sunrise and any other time when
visibility is not sufficient to render clearly discernible any person or vehicle on the highway at a distance of
1,000 feet.
3/109 DRIVER - 305 VC
A "driver" is a person who drives or is in actual physical control of a vehicle.
EXCLUDES:
A. The tiller man or other person who, in an auxiliary capacity, assists the driver in the steering
or operation of any articulated fire fighting apparatus, this person would be listed as a
”PASSENGER.”
B. A person in the driver's seat of a legally parked vehicle with the engine off, this person
would be listed as a “PASSENGER.”
C. The conductor of a train, this person would be listed as an “OTHER.”
3/110 GROSS NEGLIGENCE
Intentional failure to perform a required duty in reckless disregard of consequences affecting the life or
property of another. Presumes willfulness and wantonness.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/111 HIGHWAY - 360 VC
"Highway" is a way or place, of whatever nature, publicly maintained a nd open to the use of the public. The
term “Highway” includes street, sidewalk and parkways between private property boundaries.
3/112 INDUSTRIAL COLLISIONS
Some devices are considered to be motor vehicles only when they are used for transportation or when in
transit. The same vehicle when used as a machine is considered a non-motor vehicle, even though its
use as a machine may involve motion of the vehicle. When used as a machine, this occurrence would not be
a traffic collision.
NOTE: If a worker is involved as an injured victim, the collision would be classified as

industrial and no Traffic Collision Report would be taken. If any other person is
injured, take a Traffic Collision Report.
EXAMPLES:
A. A transit-mix concrete truck is a motor vehicle while mixing concrete en route, but is a
machine when stopped or moving slightly while discharging its load.
B. A motor vehicle involved in a collision while competing in a scheduled race at a recognized

race track would not constitute a reportable traffic collision. If a fatal collision occurred, a
death report would be required.
C. A skip-loader being used in the capacity of an industrial machine, not as a vehicle, which
causes damage or injury to a worker would not be a traffic collision. If being driven in
transit on a highway and the movement causes damage or injury, it would be a traffic
collision.
D. A dump truck moving forward while discharging its load, where the falling load injures a
worker, would not be a reportable traffic collision.
E. A forklift operator backs into a pedestrian, not a worker, while unloading a truck at a
construction site, and the pedestrian is injured. This would be a reportable traffic collision.
(A person other than a worker was injured.)
F. A forklift operator drives the forklift to a catering truck on the construction site for coffee. En
route back to the job assignment, the forklift collides with a skip-loader being operated by
another worker. The worker sustains a broken arm. This would be a reportable traffic
collision. (The forklift, an industrial machine, was being used as a vehicle and not as a
machine.)
G. A police vehicle equipped with push bars being used to push a disabled vehicle causing
property damage to either vehicle would not be a traffic collision. This would be an
industrial accident and shall be reported on a LAPD form 15.7 with a miscellaneous DR
number. Photographs shall be taken and a supervisor shall respond to the scene.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/113 INJURY
Injury is any bodily harm that is in need of first aid or the attention of a physician. It is not necessary that
treatment or first aid be received. An injury need not be apparent, but may be complained-of pain without
signs of injury.
Officers investigating a traffic collision shall base their injury classification on the information available at the
scene of the collision or at the time of the follow-up contact at a medical facility.
NOTE: Admission to a hospital for observation only is not a criterion for classification of
injuries.
Injuries shall be classified as follows:
A. SEVERE INJURY - Major injury. Any serious, incapacitating injury which normally requires
hospitalization, other than for observation, and prevents the victim from walking or driving.
EXAMPLE: Severe laceration or wound, broken or distorted limb, skull fracture, crushed chest,
severe internal injury, unconscious when taken from the collision scene, etc.
B. OTHER VISIBLE INJURY - Non-incapacitating injury. Any visible injury other than fatal or
major.
C. COMPLAINT OF PAIN INJURY - Momentary unconsciousness or complained of pain

without visible signs of injury.
D. FATAL INJURY - An injury that results in death.
NOTE: Injuries listed on the traffic collision report shall be restricted to those resulting from
the collision. Injuries sustained prior to , or subsequent to, the collision shall be
explained in the remarks section of the narrative.
3/114 INTERSECTION - 365 VC
An "intersection" is the area within the prolongations of the lateral curb lines or, if none, then the lateral
boundary lines of the roadways of two highways which join one another at approximately right angles, or the
area within which vehicles traveling upon different highways joining at any other angle may come in conflict.
3/115 LIMIT LINE - 377 VC
A "limit line" is a solid white line, not less than 12 nor more than 24 inches wide, extending across a roadway
or any portion thereof to indicate the point at which traffic is required to stop in compliance with legal
requirements.
3/116 MOTOR VEHICLE - 415 VC
A "motor vehicle" is a vehicle which is self-propelled.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/117 NON-CONTACT TRAFFIC COLLISION
An incident shall be considered a non-contact traffic collision when it is alleged that an illegal or negligent act
of any person not directly i nvolved is the proximate cause of a traffic collision, and an independent witness or
other evidence substantiates the involvement (Traffic Manual 3/214).
3/118 ORDINARY NEGLIGENCE
Failure to exercise care of an ordinary prudent person in the same situation.
3/119 PARTY
A "party" in a traffic collision is defined as a driver of a vehicle or conveyance, a bicyclist, a driver or rider of
an animal, a pedestrian who is directly involved in a traffic collision (where there is physical contact between
vehicles and/or parties).
NOTE: Owners of damaged property other than vehicles shall only be listed in the space
designated "Property Damage" on page 2 of the CHP Form 555.
An owner of other property shall be designated only once regardless of the number
of items damaged. Each item included as other damaged property shall be
designated by the type of object and a one word description, (fence) or (fence #2);
(tree), (power pole) etc.
3/120 PASSENGER
A "passenger" is any person inside or upon a vehicle, excluding the driver.
EXAMPLES:
A. The tiller man or other person who, in an auxiliary capacity, assists the driver in the steering
or operation of any articulated fire fighting apparatus, would be listed as a PASSENGER.
B. A person in the driver's seat of a legally parked vehicle with the engine off, would be listed
as a PASSENGER.
3/121 PEDESTRIAN - 467 VC
A "pedestrian" is any person who is afoot or who is using a means of conveyance propelled by human
power, other than a bicycle (skateboard, roller skates, wheelchair).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/122 PROXIMATE CAUSE
A. A continuous sequence of events, unbroken by any intervening occurrence, which produces

a collision and/or results in an injury which would not have otherwise occurred.
B. The last negligent act contributory to an injury; without such act an injury would not have
resulted.
C. The moving or producing cause
D. The dominant cause
3/123 RESIDENCE DISTRICT - 515 VC
A "residence district" is that portion of a highway and the property contiguous thereto, other than a business
district,
A. Upon one side of which highway, within a distance of a quarter of a mile, the contiguous
property fronting thereon is occupied by 13 or more separate dwelling houses or business
structures; OR
B. Upon both sides of which highway, collectively, within a distance of a quarter of a mile, the
contiguous property fronting thereon is occupied by 16 or more separate dwelling houses or
business structures. A residence district may be longer than one-quarter of a mile if the
above ratio of separate dwelling houses or business structures to the length of the highway
exists.
3/124 ROADWAY - 530 VC
A roadway is the portion of a highway improved, designed, or ordinarily used for vehicular travel.
NOTE: Where the portion of the highway designed for vehicular travel is bounded by
curbing and an area is designated for parking along the curb line, the entire width,
from curb to curb, shall be considered roadway ("Area designated for parking"
means that parking is not prohibited).
3/125 SIDEWALK - 555 VC
"Sidewalk" is that portion of a highway, other than the roadway, set apart by curbs, barriers, markings, or
other delineation for pedestrian travel.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/126 SPECIFIC INTENT OCCURRENCE
Conclusive evidence (witness/suicide note) is necessary to establish a specific intent occurrence!
A. Persons - If intent to injure or kill by means of a vehicle can be established, the injury or
death is not classified as a traffic collision. This rule also includes suicide and attempted
suicide. If the action continues beyond the originally intended event, and injury or property
damage occurs, these events are considered a traffic collision and documented as such.
EXAMPLES:
1. Suicide - A person is observed to run from a curb into the roadway and dive
headfirst directly in front of the wheels of a moving vehicle and is killed (Death
Report). This would not be a traffic collision and no Traffic Collision Report
would be taken.
2. Attempt ADW with Vehicle - A suspect attempts to strike the intended victim with
his vehicle, the victim moves and the suspect strikes a parked vehicle. This would
not be a traffic collision and no Traffic Collision Report would be taken. The
attempt ADW with a vehicle would be documented on a PIR and the damage to the
parked vehicle would be documented on a traffic collision report.
3. ADW with a vehicle - A suspect intentionally hits a victim with his vehicle pushing
him into a wall, causing injury. The ADW with a vehicle would be documented on a
PIR and the damage to the wall would be documented in a traffic collision report.
B. Property Damage
1. When contact is made with the intended object, complete a Vandalism Report.
2. When contact is made with other than the intended object, complete a Traffic
Collision Report.
EXAMPLE: Vandalism - Several boys push a vehicle down a hill and the vehicle collides with a
parked vehicle. This would not be a traffic collision. If, however, a driven vehicle
collides with the runaway vehicle, this would be a traffic collision.
NOTE: An ADW with a vehicle which results in a homicide shall be investigated by the
divisional homicide detectives.
3/127 STREET - 590 VC
"Street" is a way or place, of whatever nature, publicly maintained and open to the use of the public for
purposes of vehicular travel. Street includes highway (Property line to property line).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/128 TRAFFIC COLLISION - (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/405.10)
A traffic collision is an unintentional occurrence in which the movement of a conveyance causes death, injury,
or property damage.
The force causing the damage or injury must originate from a moving conveyance.
NOTE: Collisions involving vehicles being used as industrial machinery or engaged in

authorized sporting events are not traffic collisions (Traffic Manual 3/112).
EXAMPLES:
A. A tree falling, not activated by a conveyance, landing directly on a moving vehicle would not
be a traffic collision. If, however, the tree fell in front of the vehicle and the motion of the
vehicle caused the damage, this would be a traffic collision.
B. A ball, batted or thrown by hand, that breaks a window of a moving vehicle is not a traffic
collision because the force did not originate from the vehicle. If, however, a stone is
pinched under a tire and propelled, breaking a window in a moving or non-moving vehicle,
this force originated from a moving vehicle and therefore the event is a traffic collision.
C. Natural forces such as floods, earthquakes, wind, and lightning do not alone qualify an event
as a traffic collision, due to the source of energy.
D. An event wherein a pedestrian is not struck but falls while dodging a vehicle is not a traffic
collision because the injury was not due to the force from the vehicle.
E. The movement of a vehicle that causes an occupant to be injured would be a traffic collision
due to the source of energy (a bus stops suddenly and a passenger, while falling down, is
injured).
F. Mechanical failure - breakage of any part of a motor vehicle while it is in motion which
results in any injury to any person or damage to cargo or property is a traffic collision. If
there is no injury and if the only damage consists of breakage to the vehicle itself or to its
immediate adjacent parts, the event does not qualify as a traffic collision.
G. When a fire caused by mechanical defects originates on a moving motor vehicle, the event
is classified as a traffic collision and a Traffic Collision Report is taken. However, if a
subsequent traffic collision occurs, the second event takes precedence over the fire event
for classification purposes.
H. When the original force does not emanate from a moving vehicle but from some other
source, and the vehicle continues into an event that constitutes a traffic collision, the latter
event is considered a traffic collision and is classified accordingly.
I. A hand-thrown ball breaks the window of a moving vehicle and strikes the driver. The driver
loses control of the vehicle and it overturns in the roadway. This would be a traffic collision
and is classified as "Overturned in Roadway."
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/129 VEHICLE - 670 VC
A "vehicle" is a device by which any person or property may be propelled, moved, or drawn upon a highway,
except a device moved exclusively by human power or used exclusively upon stationary rails or tracks.
3/130 WITNESS
A witness is any person, other than a party or passenger, who has any pertinent information regarding a
traffic collision. Many times, lack of knowledge is as important as knowledge.
EXAMPLES:
A. A person indirectly involved by allowing his vehicle to be driven by an UN-LICENSED

person would be listed as a witness and would not have to be present at the time of the
traffic collision.
B. If located, the last person to drive a vehicle and legally park it.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/200 TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORTING POLICY
3/201 TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORTING CRITERIA
A. A Traffic Collision Report shall be completed when one or more of the following is involved
in a traffic collision:
1. Fatal injury
2. Injury
NOTE: If the collision occurred over 24 hours prior to the time of reporting, the injured
person must present evidence of treatment by a doctor and the evidence presented
must state that the injury was probably the result of a traffic collision. If the collision
is less than 24 hours old, a report shall be taken.
3. Traffic felony (except 23550 VC)
4. City property involved or a possibility of City liability
EXCEPTION: Contact with City-owned property where the damage to the City-owned
property is minor (not likely to be repaired) does not require a report unless
other reporting criteria apply. Officers shall still make notifications to the
proper City entity (Department Traffic Manual 3/706).
5. Driving under-the-influence
6. Hit and run
7. Rail conveyances (trains), handled by Traffic Bureaus
1. Property damage only, private property - traffic collision report with a

miscellaneous DR# (4400).
2. Injury (including attempt suicide) on private property - injury report, using an

injury DR#, with a CHP 555 F orm Set, scale diagram and traffic narrative.
3. Death (including suicide) on private property - death report, using a death

DR#, with a CHP 555 Form Set, scale diagram and traffic narrative
(provable homicides are the responsibility of the divisional homicides
detectives).
B. Multiple collisions are considered as one traffic collision and reported on one report if the
driver of the vehicle did not regain control of his vehicle between collisions.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/202 CLASS I TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORT
A. A traffic collision investigation requires the completion of the CHP 555 Form Set, a scale
diagram and CHP Form 556 with full narrative and verbatim statements, when a traffic
collision involves one or more of the following:
1. Fatality
2. Severe injury
3. Unbooked DUI driver
4. All CPI vehicles with injuries or CPI vehicles with no injuries where the private
conveyance is occupied
B. Traffic Collision Reports should be completed and submitted for approval prior to the
investigating officer's EOW. All collision reports SHALL be turned in at EOW, whether
completed or not, to the watch supervisor (Department Traffic Manual 3/347).
3/203 CLASS II TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORT
A. A traffic collision investigation requires the completion of the CHP 555 Form Set, a sketch
and CHP Form 556 with a condensed narrative and paraphrased statements, when a traffic
collision involves one or more of the following:
1. Any complained of pain or other visible injuries
2. Hit and run misdemeanor with the possibility of follow-up
3. Hit and run felony with complained of pain or other visible injuries
4. Misdemeanor DUI arrest when there is no possibility of a traffic felony filing
5. Felony DUI with a verified complained of pain or other visible injury, or where the
felony booking is based on priors only (23550 VC)
6. City vehicles with no injury. Private conveyances involved must be unoccupied.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/203
B. Traffic Collision Report PDO, CHP Form 555-03, may be completed at scene, at a station
desk, or telephonically for any number of parties involved when:
1. No unusual circumstances exist, AND
2. There is property damage only.
NOTE: Contact with City-owned or property where the damage to the City-owned
property is minor (not likely to be repaired) does not require a report unless other
reporting criteria apply. Officers shall continue to make notification to the proper
City entity (Department Traffic Manual 3/706).
EXAMPLE: Two vehicles collide in an intersection. One of the vehicles continues and collides
with the curb, causing minor damage to the curb and rim damage to the vehicle.
Because the damage to the City-owned curb is minor, and there is no possibility of
City liability, no report is required providing no other reporting criteria apply.
3. If the collision is a misdemeanor hit and run:
a. The person reporting is the party involved, registered owner, lessee,

property owner, or person responsible for the property; AND
b. There is no anticipated prosecution or possibility of follow-up.
NOTE: Follow up is defined as a complete license number, named suspect or

distinctly marked vehicle.
C. A Municipal Supplement shall be included when any of the appropriate criteria apply.
D. Traffic Collision Reports should be completed and submitted for approval prior to the
investigating officer's EOW. All collision reports SHALL be turned in at EOW, whether
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/204 TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORTING GUIDE
GENERAL PROVISIONS CLASS I CLASS II
1. Death Yes No
2. Injury Severe injury Any other injury
3. Hit and run felony Fatal or Severe injury Any other injury
4. Hit and run misdemeanor No Yes
5. DUI Felony with severe or Felony with verified

fatal injury, Unbooked, complained of pain or
or misdemeanor with other visible injuries,
complex circumstances Felony based on priors
only, Booked
misdemeanor
6. CPI All CPI vehicles with injury City vehicles with no

or CPI vehicles with no injury. Private
injury where the private conveyance must be
conveyance is occupied unoccupied
7. Property damage No, unless other Class I No, unless other

criteria apply Class II criteria apply
criteria apply Class II criteria apply
NOTE: PDO use CHP 555-03 as permitted in 3/203 B.
8. School bus CHP handles if students on board, otherwise standard criteria

apply
9. Train grade crossing Yes No
Suicide or Attempt Suicide Injury or Death Report with a 555 Form Set with a T/C
narrative
10. Private property T/C
Severe injury or death Yes No
Other visible or
Complained of pain No Yes
Property damage only No No
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/205 PROPERTY DAMAGE ONLY (PDO) - CITY PROPERTY INVOLVED (CPI)
When an officer investigates a traffic collision where all parties and property are owned by the City of Los
Angeles, the officer may complete a Traffic Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, with a sketch and
statements. This shall be processed as an internal report only. The Traffic Collision Report title shall be
crossed out and replaced with the title “PDO/CPI 15.7" with a miscellaneous DR number when ALL of the
following apply:
1. The collision involves minor property damage (small dents, scratches or paint transfer)
only.
2. All vehicles and property involved are owned by the City of Los Angeles.
3. Approval has been obtained from a supervisor.
4. Photographs of the collision have been taken
NOTE: The PDO/CPI 15.7 classification DOES NOT eliminate the requirement for an LAPD officer
to complete an Employee Statement on a CHP Form 556, or the requirement for a fleet
safety review.
When a parked LAPD vehicle is involved document the location of the vehicle prior to the
collision on the diagram (legally parked at curb, in marked parking stall, in red zone, etc.).
3/206 ADVICE TO PARTIES INVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
An officer conducting an investigation at the scene of a traffic collision shall:
A. Verify that a correct exchange of i nformation is made between parties at the collision scene
(4.37 exchange).
B. Refrain from indicating or estimating that any injury or property damage incurred in the
collision is either sufficient or insufficient to require a report to the DMV under the terms of
the Financial Responsibility Law (16000 VC).
C. Refer parties to their insurance agent or to the local office of the Department of Motor
Vehicles regarding the application of the Financial Responsibility Law.
D. Refer parties wishing to obtain an SR-1 Form to the Department of Motor Vehicles, their
insurance agent.
E. Explain how to obtain a complete copy of the Traffic Collision Report.
NOTE: Officers shall refrain from referring parties to TDS for information contained within
the Traffic Collision Report.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/207 TRAFFIC POLICY QUESTIONS
A. The Traffic Report Auditor Detail of the concerned Bureau Traffic Division may be
contacted during day watch hours on weekdays to resolve questions on Traffic Collision
Reporting policy and procedures.
B. When the Auditor Detail is unavailable, contact the concerned Bureau Traffic Division watch
commander to resolve questions on Traffic Collision Reporting policy and procedures.
C. Traffic Coordination Section may also be contacted for traffic reporting policy and
procedure questions on weekdays during day watch hours.
D. Ensure that the name and serial number of any supervisor advising any deviations from
reporting policy is entered in the "Remarks" section of the report.
3/208 LEGAL INTERVENTION
Injury or damage caused by enforcement intervention using a motor vehicle (usually apprehension or attempt
to apprehend) is not a traffic collision insofar as the enforcing agency and violator relationship is concerned.
If, when intentional acts are committed, injury or damage occurs that goes beyond the original intent, the
excessive acts are considered unintentional and meet the specifications of a traffic collision.
EXAMPLES:
A. Legal interventions
1. An officer uses his police vehicle as a weapon.
2. A police vehicle cuts in front of a vehicle to force the vehicle to the curb or shoulder
and, as a result, the two cars collide.
3. A suspect vehicle goes out of control and subsequently crashes as a result of

bullets fired into the vehicle from a police officer's gun.
NOTE: A use of force report shall be completed, the narrative section may consist of a
traffic collision narrative and diagram format.
B. Traffic collisions
1. A driver other than a law violator crashes unintentionally into a roadblock.
2. A violator, being pursued, is involved in a collision.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/210 ANIMALS, BICYCLES AND TRAINS INVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
A. ANIMALS
1. A Traffic Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, is required when a ridden animal is
involved in a collision on a highway that results in injury or death to the person.
2. An Injury or Death Report is required when a ridden animal is involved in a collision

on other than a highway that results in injury or death to the person.
3. Animals (dogs or cats) injured or killed when involved in a reportable traffic collision
shall be listed as property.
EXCEPTION: When a dog or cat is injured or killed by a motor vehicle on a highway and no other
reporting criteria exist, no traffic collision report is required. When a d og or cat is
injured or killed by an LAPD vehicle or LAPD bicycle, a Class II traffic collision
report is required.
B. BICYCLES
1. A Traffic Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, is required when a bicycle is
involved in a collision on a highway that results in injury or death.
2. An Injury or Death report is required when a bicycle is involved in a collision on

other than a highway that results in injury or death.
EXCEPTION: A Traffic Collision Report is not required in a case involving a rider falling from a
bicycle. Once a bicycle rider leaves the bicycle seat and places a foot on the
ground, he becomes a pedestrian and the bicycle is listed as property.
NOTE: Traffic collisions involving an LAPD bicycle (Traffic Manual 3/711).
C. TRAINS (Metrolink, Light Rail or Freight)
1. A Traffic Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, is required when a train is involved
in a collision on a highway (grade crossing).
2. An Injury or Death Report is required when a train or any other conveyance is

involved in any incident other than a provable homicide on any rail right of way.
NOTE: Where there is injury or death resulting from an incident other than a
provable homicide occurring on any rail right of way, take the appropriate
Injury or Death report as page one, followed by the CHP 555 Form Set.
The report shall have an injury or death DR number.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/210
3. A Class II Traffic Collision Report is required when a train is involved in a

property damage only collision on private property. Use a miscellaneous” DR#.
4. All incidents involving trains shall be handled by the traffic bureau of occurrence.
EXCEPTION: All provable homicides shall be handled by the concerned divisional

homicide detectives.
5. When a train collision is reportable, complete the CHP 555 Form Set as follows:
a. If present on the train, the conductor's name, address, telephone, and the
number of the train is listed for party information. In the event that the train
is operating without a conductor, the engineer’s name, address, and the
number of the train is listed for the party information.
b. Type of party - "Other."
c. Driver's license number - use any identification presented; a driver's

license is not required to operate a train.
d. Vehicle license number - obtain the number from the locomotive. The
number has three or four digits and may be preceded by one of the
following letter sets indicating the railroad: ML - Metrolink, SP - Southern
Pacific, UP - Union Pacific, AT and SF - Santa Fe.
e. Any additional railroad personnel shall be listed as passengers.
NOTE: An officer arriving at the scene after the train has left should contact the chief
dispatcher of the railroad involved to get the required information. Vehicle Code
sections 20001 and 20002 (hit and run) do not apply to train operators.
6. All incidents, except homicide, shall be handled by the traffic bureau of occurrence,
including follow up.
NOTE: An officer arriving at the scene after the train has left should contact the chief
dispatcher of the involved railroad to get the required information.
7. Any incident involving a rail right of way within the city limits shall be handled as if
they were CPI, however, the CPI box shall not be marked.
D. The rail company shall be notified when the rails have been involved i n any incident, whether
or not there is any visible damage.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/211 SCHOOL BUS TRAFFIC COLLISION (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/415.05)
The California Highway Patrol (CHP) has primary responsibility for the investigation of all school bus traffic
collisions. A bus is only classified as a school bus when students (up through 12th grade) are on board or
actively loading or unloading.
Absent the above, this Department will be responsible for the investigation.
A. When at the scene of a school bus collision, which i s the investigative responsibility of the
CHP, officers shall notify the CHP and stand by until CHP personnel arrive.
B. When officers of this department complete a Traffic Collision Report involving a bus
(normally used as a school bus), the officer shall include the following information in the
narrative portion of the Traffic Collision Report:
1. Class of bus:
Class I (allowed to transport 16 or more)
Class 2 (allowed to transport 15 or less)
2. Bus number (shop number of the bus)
3. Number of passengers
4. Certificate number issued by the CHP for the bus driver
5. Date of last inspection by the CHP and the inspecting officer's name and serial
number
NOTE: The class of bus and bus number are on the "School Bus Inspection Certificate of
Approval" issued by the CHP. This certificate will also have the name and serial
number of the last inspecting CHP officer.
3/213 TOWED OR PUSHED VEHICLES AND/OR TRAILERS
A. Towed Vehicles
1. While "in tow" with a rigid tow bar or tow truck both vehicles shall be considered as
one unit.
a. The driver and motor vehicle doing the towing shall be listed as the party.
b. The vehicle or trailer being towed shall be listed in the second line of the
vehicle information section.
NOTE: This also applies to tractor - trailer combinations.
2. A towed motor vehicle, after breaking away, shall be listed as a separate party type
"other."
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/213
3. When a motor vehicle is being towed by other than a rigid tow bar or tow truck, the
person operating the towed vehicle is shown as party type "other". The two motor
vehicles are listed as separate parties on page one.
4. If the investigating officer determines the person operating the towed vehicle
contributed directly to the collision, the person is shown as party type "driver."
5. A parked unattached trailer or semi-trailer shall be listed as "Property."
B. Pushed Vehicles
1. Pushed Vehicle - A person operating a pushed motor vehicle shall be listed as a

party type "driver.”
2. Pushing Vehicle
a. If the investigating officer determines that the person operating the pushing
vehicle contributed directly to the collision, the person is shall be listed as
party type "driver.”
b. When the pushed motor vehicle is released and its driver has had the
opportunity to stop prior to the impact, the driver of the pushing vehicle
shall be listed as a witness. When listed as a witness, the vehicle
information on the pushing vehicle shall be listed in the "Remarks" section
of the report, along with the driver's operator license number.
NOTE: While pushing a vehicle, any resulting damage between the vehicles does not
constitute a traffic collision.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/214 NON-CONTACT TRAFFIC COLLISION
The classification of a "non-contact" collision, when actual physical contact has not occurred, may
involve the driver of a motor vehicle, moving or parked, a bicycle rider, or a pedestrian who commits a traffic
or other violation which directly causes another party to become involved in a traffic collision.
NOTE: The classification of "non-contact" shall not be a determination for reporting criteria.
A. When an investigation substantiates a "non-contact" collision, the "non-contact" person shall

be listed as a party to the collision when any of the following criteria exist:
1. The violation is corroborated by an independent witness
2. By physical evidence
3. By the statement of the "non-contact" party, including a full license number
B. When officers are unable to substantiate the alleged involvement of a "non-contact" person
or vehicle, a statement to that effect shall be entered in the "Remarks" section of the Traffic
Collision Report ("Officers were unable to substantiate the alleged involvement of a non-
contact person or vehicle"). No other mention of "non-contact" shall be made on the Traffic
Collision Report except in the statements of the persons making the allegations.
C. When it is alleged that a "non-contact" driver caused a traffic collision and failed to comply
with the pertinent sections (hit and run) contained in Division 10 of the Vehicle Code, and
the criteria in sub-section "A" have been met, the driver and/or vehicle, when verified, shall
be listed as a party on the CHP Form 555 page one, with all available information.
D. The hit and run box shall be checked if applicable.
3/215 RUNAWAY VEHICLES (UNATTENDED)
When, in the course of an investigation, the officer determines that the vehicle responsible for the collision
was a runaway vehicle, the officer shall:
A. Locate the owner of the runaway vehicle.
1. When the collision results in an injury or CPI, follow the standard reporting criteria.
2. When the collision results in property damage only, ensure that information is
exchanged between parties.
B. Complete a Traffic Collision Report and impound the runaway vehicle when the owner of the
runaway vehicle cannot be located.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/216 TRAINING INCIDENTS
Collisions occurring during Department approved training shall be classified as “Training Incidents”.
Although not considered “Traffic Collisions” as defined in Traffic Manual Section 3/128, the incident shall
be reported on the appropriate form, i.e., Injury, Death or CPI PDO 15.07. The primary responsibility for
investigating “Training Incidents” shall be with the Division conducting the training, except in the case of
severe or fatal injury. In the case of severe or fatal injury, primary investigative responsibility shall be with
the appropriate bureau traffic division. The bureau traffic division may conduct the investigation of a
Training Incident, which normally would not be handled by a traffic division, with the approval of the
bureau traffic division Watch Commander.
An officer assigned to investigate a training incident shall:
A. Summon a Supervisor to the scene.
B. Ensure the training has been approved by the Department; AND
C. Ensure all damage is to City property only (including property leased by the City for
training purposes); AND
D. Ensure all injured persons are associated with the training exercise.
E. Complete the applicable report as page one, followed by the CHP Form Set
documenting the incident. (e.g., Injury Report as the face sheet.)
F. Obtain the appropriate injury, death or miscellaneous (4400) DR number.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/300 TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORT, CHP 555 FORM SET
3/301 GENERAL RULES FOR COMPLETION OF THE CHP 555 FORM SET
The Traffic Collision Report, CHP 555 Form Set, (CHP Form 555 page 1, CHP Form 555 page 2,
Injured/Witness/Passenger page, Factual Diagram page) is used to record the basic identification
regarding parties, passengers, witnesses, and owners of property when involved in a traffic collision.
A. When completing these forms, every reasonable effort should be made to obtain factual
information on all required items.
B. All information should be printed legibly using pen (black ink) or Number 2 (or softer) pencil.
Reports may also be typed or computer generated.
C. Fill in all applicable spaces unless otherwise instructed.
D. Use an "X" to mark all appropriate boxes.
E. Use the recommended abbreviations.
F. The top margin of the CHP Form 555, Page 1, shall not contain any entries. This section
is used by the State Wide Integrated Traffic Reporting System (SWITRS) to assign case
numbers to the document.
G. Date, Time, NCIC Number, and Officer I.D. (employee serial number) shall be completed in
the same way on the top of each page of the Traffic Collision Report, as they comprise the
four fields which identify each collision report in the SWITRS computer files.
H. Complete all applicable items on of the CHP 555 Form Set, C HP Form 556 and Municipal
Supplement page (when applicable), on all reportable collisions.
I. Corrections on the Traffic Collision Report should be made before duplication and
distribution of the report. However, once the report has been distributed, corrections shall
be made on a CHP Form 556 Supplemental.
NOTE: The term "Distribution" shall include any copies of the collision report sent either
inside or outside the Department to ANY entity including the City Attorney, District
Attorney, LAFD personnel or private citizen.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/302 CHP 555 FORM SET, PAGE 1
3/303 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Enter one or more of the following Special Conditions which require special processing. Enter the special
conditions information as written below use only the below underlined titles. Do not list the
corresponding letter.
A. Counter Report - When a traffic report is completed at an area desk.
B. Farm Labor Vehicle - When the motor vehicle is a farm labor vehicle as defined in 322 VC.
and the driver is transporting one or more farm workers as specified in 12519(a) VC.
C. Fatal
D. Hazardous Materials - When a vehicle is carrying any hazardous material, regardless of

spillage.
E. On-Duty Emergency Vehicle - (or On-Duty Emerg. Ve.). It is not necessary that the vehicle
be operated with red light and siren for the "On-Duty" classification to apply.
1. For this section, an emergency vehicle is any publicly owned vehicle operated by
any Federal, State or local agency, department or district employing peace
officers, fire fighters or paramedics (165 VC).
2. The writing in the box may be in RED.
3. The words “On-Duty Emergency Vehicle” shall also be written above the
emergency vehicle driver’s name in the party box.
EXCLUSIONS:
a. A parking enforcement vehicle not meeting the definition of an authorized

emergency vehicle (165 VC) being operated by a person without peace
officer status.
b. A peace officer or fireman while operating his private vehicle.
c. An ambulance that does not have an emergency vehicle permit issued by

the Commissioner of the California Highway Patrol.
F. Private Property - When a traffic collision occurs on private property, not on a public
highway or roadway.
G. School Bus - CHP use only
H. Any unusual collision other than those listed above.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/303
I. CPI - Any traffic collision which involves Los Angeles City property directly or by influence.
J. Arrest - When a separate arrest report is completed.
K. Combined Traffic and Arrest - When arrest report is incorporated in the collision report.
L. Filing - When requesting filing on a party or passenger.
M. Photo Red Light Intersection - When investigating a reportable traffic collision at a PRL
intersection, officers shall write in red ink “PRL I/S” in the “Special Conditions” box in the
upper left hand corner of the CHP 555 Form Set.
3/304 NUMBER INJURED/KILLED
The total number (numeric) of people injured or killed as a result of the collision. If none, enter "0" in each
box. These totals must be consistent with the number of injured persons entered on the
Injured/Witnesses/Passengers page of the CHP Form 555.
3/305 HIT & RUN FELONY/MISDEMEANOR
Mark an "X" in the applicable box when evidence indicates either a felony or misdemeanor hit and run
violation has occurred.
3/306 CITY
Enter the full name of the city, "Los Angeles," in which the collision occurred. Abbreviations are not
accepted in this field.
3/307 COUNTY
Enter the full name of the county, "Los Angeles," in which the collision occurred. Abbreviations are not
3/308 JUDICIAL DISTRICT
Enter the full name of the applicable municipal or justice court, "Los Angeles." Abbreviations are not
3/309 REPORTING DISTRICT
Enter the correct four digit number of the RD (0729, 1259, etc.).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/310 BEAT
Enter the radio designation of the unit completing the Traffic Collision Report (6T11, 4A15). Enter 1L90 for
an officer assigned to the desk.
3/311 LOCAL REPORT NUMBER
Enter the appropriate DR number.
A. Each Traffic Collision Report requires a separate DR number.
B. In a traffic collision where an LAPD stolen vehicle is involved and is recovered at the scene,
the Traffic Collision Report will have its own report number.
1. The recovered Vehicle Investigation Report shall carry the same DR number as the
stolen Vehicle Investigation Report.
2. Other vehicles involved which require impounding shall carry the traffic collision DR
number.
NOTE: Whenever more than one DR number is used, officers shall cross-reference the DR
numbers in the "Remarks" section of the Traffic Collision Report, CHP Form 556,
and Vehicle Investigation Report, Form 3.07.
3/312 PAGE NUMBERING
Each side of the CHP 555 Form Set, CHP Form 556, CHP Form 185, CHP Form 555D, Form 5.02.05 and
the Municipal Supplement is numbered as a separate page. Page 1 shall be numbered 1/__, all additional
pages shall be numbered with a single number. Entry of total number of pages is necessary only on page 1.
A. Collisions involving more than three parties, where more than one CHP Form 555 is
prepared, should be numbered as follows:
1. The first CHP Form 555 would be numbered as page 1/__ for the front, and page 2
for the back.
2. The second CHP Form 555 would be numbered as page 3 for the front, and page
4 for the back.
B. The "Injured/Witness/Passenger" page(s), shall follow the last statistical page.
C. The diagram, if applicable, shall follow the last Injured/Witness/Passenger page.
D. The CHP Form 556 narrative page(s) shall immediately follow the last diagram page.
E. Attachments to the collision report, such as the CHP Form 185, and the CHP Form 555-D
Truck/Bus Collision Supplemental, should be numbered as part of the original report.
These forms shall follow the last CHP Form 556 narrative page and be numbered
accordingly.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/312
F. When applicable, the last page of each report will be the Municipal Supplement.
NOTE: When the CHP Form 556 is used as a supplemental, it will be numbered as page 1
/ 1.
3/313 COLLISION OCCURRED ON (Primary Location)
A. Enter the highway name on which the collision occurred. If the collision occurs within an
intersection, including off-set intersections, enter the highway upon which the involved party
most at fault was traveling.
NOTE: This does not apply to the intersection of a freeway ramp and a city or county road
when the vehicles are off the freeway ramp when the collision occurs. In this
situation, the primary location of the collision would be the city street or county road.
If the collision is within 100 feet of the freeway ramp, enter an "X" in the yes box of
the State Highway Related box.
B. For all other collisions, enter the location where the first injury or damage producing event
occurred.
C. When identifying a highway by its route number, use only commonly accepted abbreviations
preceding the number.
EXAMPLE: I-80, US-101, SR 126 W/B, I-5 S/B (Golden State Fwy).
D. Identify unnamed access or frontage roads adjacent to highways by their direction from the
highway.
EXAMPLE: I-80, South Frontage Road.
E. When appropriate, enter the street block number after the street name.
EXAMPLE: San Antonio St., 400 Block.
F. Identify a collision occurring on an unnamed alley by the alley's direction from a parallel
named street.
EXAMPLE: Alley north of 'B' Street", or "alley east of 14th Avenue.
G. For private property collisions, write out the location, such as private driveway, parking lot,
etc. A street address should be entered when available.
H. Be consistent and concise in spelling a street name. Various spellings of the same street
name will list that street in several places on the SWITRS output reports.
EXAMPLE: Air Port Street, Airport Dr., S. Airport Street, and N. Airport St. will be grouped in
different areas of the output reports.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/314 MILEPOST INFORMATION
Enter the distance and direction from the nearest milepost marker if applicable. For collisions occurring in
the City this information does not apply and this space is left blank. If an officer is completing an
investigation on a freeway, and the milepost information is known it may be entered here.
3/315 AT INTERSECTION WITH (Secondary Location)
If the collision occurs within an intersection, place an "X" in this box and enter the name of the intersecting
highway, alley, etc.
3/316 OR:___FEET/MILES___OF (Secondary Location)
If the collision does not occur at an intersection, place an "X" in this box and enter the distance and direction
(40 ft. E/W) from the nearest permanent reference point, such as an intersecting street curb line, over
crossing, county line, etc.
A. Line out Feet or Miles, whichever is not applicable. It is most important that distances to
permanent reference points be measured and not estimated or paced.
B. For non-intersection collisions where tape measurement or pacing are not practical due to
the distance from a reference point, the officer should drive to the nearest intersecting
street, road structure, or commonly known identifiable landmark and calculate the distance
carefully using the patrol vehicle odometer. When measurement is made using an
odometer, line out Feet and enter the distance in miles and/or tenths of miles.
EXAMPLE: Proper entries are "1.7 miles" or ".3 miles" Improper entries are "3/4 miles" or "1/3
miles."
C. If the collision occurs at a railroad crossing, mark an "X" in the "or" space and enter the
distance and direction from the nearest permanent cross street. Enter the PUC grade
crossing number following the street name when known. Enter the name of the railroad
right-of-way property owner in the narrative.
NOTE: Officers should not use freeway on or off ramps as cross streets.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/317 DATE
Enter the month, day, and year using a six digit numeric format (12/17/82). For collisions such as hit-and-run
where the exact date cannot be determined, the officer should make a single date entry based upon his best
judgement. Do not leave the space blank.
3/318 TIME (2400)
Enter the time that the collision occurred using the 24-hour clock. Do not leave this space blank.
A. For compatibility with Data Processing, Caltrans, etc., use 2359 instead of 2400 for a
collision occurring exactly at midnight.
B. If the same officer investigates two collisions which occur at the same exact time on the
same date, the “Time” entry for the second report should be at least one minute later than
the first.
C. If the exact time cannot be determined, the officer should make a single time entry based
upon his best judgment. Use 2500, not "Unknown," if no time can be determined.
NOTE: PACMIS will not accept 2500 hrs, use the best estimate of the time of occurrence.
Enter the time span (2000-0600) in the remarks section.
3/319 NCIC NUMBER
A. In the city of Los Angeles - Enter the four (4) digit code number assigned by the Department
of Justice. The NCIC number for the city of Los Angeles is 1942.
B. Outside the city of Los Angeles
1. When a traffic collision occurs outside the city of Los Angeles and the report of
record is completed by LAPD, the investigating officer SHALL use the NCIC
number of the area of occurrence.
2. The phrase ”This report was completed by the Los Angeles Police
Department” SHALL be included at the beginning of the “Narrative Section.”
3/320 OFFICER I.D. (Employee Serial Number)
Enter the serial number of the employee responsible for the investigation.
NOTE: Date, Time, NCIC Number, and Officer I.D. (employee serial number) shall be
completed in the same way on the top of each page of the Traffic Collision Report,
as they comprise the four fields which identify each collision report in the SWITRS
computer files.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/321 TOW AWAY
When the collision results in any vehicle being towed from the scene mark an "X" in the yes box. If no
vehicles were towed, mark an "X" in the no box.
3/322 PHOTOGRAPHS BY
When photographs are taken, enter the last name and serial number of the person taking the photographs.
When taken by other than Departmental personnel, enter the photographer's name and telephone number.
Enter the number of photographs or rolls taken. If no photographs were taken, place an "X" in the none box.
3/323 STATE HIGHWAY RELATED
Mark "X" in the appropriate box to indicate whether or not the collision occurred on, or was associated with
a State highway. This includes State route, U.S. highway, interstate highway, vista point, rest stop, or truck
inspection facility.
A. To be associated with a State highway, the collision could occur on other than, but near, a
State highway.
EXAMPLES:
1. A collisions which occurs on City streets or county roads within 250 feet of the
center of the intersection of a State highway or the center of State highway over
crossings and under crossings.
2. A collisions which occurs on City streets or county roads within 100 feet of the gore
point of a freeway ramp.
3. A collisions which occurs on City streets or county roads (such as frontage roads)
where there is damage to State highway property.
B. The diagrams in this manual (appendix A), are provided as guidelines to assist in
determining if the collision is related to a state highway. If the relationship to a state
highway is doubtful, the officer should mark an "X" in the "yes" space.
NOTE: Caltrans uses this information in its collision location files to identify high collision
frequency locations on or near state highways. When these locations are
identified, a study is made to determine whether or not state highway design
features are related to such collisions.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/324 PARTY TYPE
The "Party Sequence" shall be listed in the following order: hit and run motor vehicle or conveyance, motor
vehicles, other conveyances, pedestrians.
Mark the "Party" box which best describes the involved party. A single CHP Form 555 face page provides
space for three involved parties. If more than three parties are involved use an additional CHP Form 555
and strike out the 1,2 and 3 under Party and enter 4,5 and 6, etc. as appropriate.
A. Driver - A person who drives or is in actual physical control of a vehicle (305 VC).
INCLUDES:
1. Hit and Run - If the involved party is a hit and run driver, enter the information in
Party-1 box. Enter only information that has been verified.
EXAMPLE: Do not enter the name of the registered owner of a suspect vehicle
as the driver when the only evidence is a vehicle license number.
A single entry of 20001 VC or 20002(A) VC is permissible when
no party information is available.
2. Non-contact Vehicle
a. When the non-contact vehicle is established, complete the investigation as

a multiple vehicle collision. Record all available information in the
appropriate spaces of CHP Form 555.
b. When the non-contact vehicle is not established, officers may record the
alleged non-contact driver as a witness on the Injured/Witness/Passenger
page of CHP Form 555 and include his statement in the narrative. Do not
enter any information on the alleged non-contact driver in the coding boxes
on page 2 of CHP Form 555, except as provided in (uninvolved vehicle).
c. When a non-contact driver has left the scene, proceed in accordance with
the above as the facts and evidence warrant.
NOTE: The above information applies to non-contact pedestrians as well.
3. A person operating a motor vehicle being propelled by other than its own motive
power.
EXAMPLE:
a. A person operating a coasting motor vehicle.
b. A person operating a motor vehicle being pushed by human power.
4. A driver who leaps to safety from a moving motor vehicle because of vehicle
malfunction.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/324
5. Push/Towed Vehicles - The following should be considered in determining

classifications when a motor vehicle is towing or pushing another motor vehicle.
a. Motor Vehicles Being Towed. When a motor vehicle is being towed by

other than a rigid tow bar or tow truck, the person operating the towed
motor vehicle is shown as party type "Other". The two motor vehicles are
separate parties on the collision report.
NOTE: If the investigating officer determines the person operating the

towed vehicle contributed directly to the collision, the person is
listed as a Driver.
b. Pushed Motor Vehicle/Pushing Motor Vehicle.
1) A person operating a motor vehicle which is being pushed is listed

as a Driver.
2) If the investigating officer determines the person operating the

pushing vehicle contributed directly to the collision, the person is
listed as a Driver.
3) When the pushed motor vehicle is released and its driver has had
the opportunity to stop prior to the impact, the driver of the pushing
vehicle shall be listed as a witness. When listed as a witness, the
vehicle information on the pushing vehicle shall be listed in the
"Remarks" section of the report, along with the driver's operator
license number.
NOTE: While pushing a vehicle, any resulting damage between the vehicles does
not constitute a traffic collision.
EXCLUDES:
1. The tillerman or other person who, in an auxiliary capacity, assists the driver in the
steering or operation of any articulated firefighting apparatus.
2. A person pushing and steering a motor vehicle while walking or running alongside
and not astride or completely within the vehicle. If only the person is struck, list the
person as a pedestrian. If the pedestrian and vehicle are struck, list each as
separate parties.
3. An infant or child who accidentally or intentionally sets a motor vehicle in motion

who, by his obvious limited capabilities, could not be in control of the motor vehicle.
Classify as "Other" on CHP Form 555.
4. A person behind the wheel of a legally parked vehicle.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/324
B. Pedestrian - Any person afoot, not in or upon a vehicle, bicycle, or animal (467 VC).
INCLUDES:
A person in a fenced yard, in or operating a pedestrian conveyance, such as a baby

carriage, coaster wagon, skateboard, roller skates, skis, sled, non-motorized wheelchair; a
person being carried by another person; and a person in or upon a device moved by
pedaling, except a bicycle.
EXCLUDES:
1. A person boarding or alighting from a conveyance (other than a pedestrian

conveyance) or a person jumping to, or falling from a motor vehicle, this person is
considered a passenger of that conveyance.
2. A person inside a building; they should be listed as an "Other."
C. Parked Vehicle - A non-moving motor vehicle, whether occupied or not, which is outside the
traffic lanes, in a parking area or building. Enter the applicable vehicle information for a
parked motor vehicle only. Leave driver information blank.
INCLUDES: Illegally parked motor vehicles outside the traffic lane.
EXCLUDES: A motor vehicle stalled in the traffic lane.
D. Bicycle
1. Mark the "Bicycle" box if the party was riding a bicycle as defined in 231 VC.
Riders of tricycles, unicycles or wheeled toys shall be considered pedestrians
unless their tricycles or unicycles meet the definition of a bicycle in 231 VC.
Excludes the driver of a motorized bicycle (moped) whether or not the engine is
running.
2. Treat a collision involving a bicycle vs. any object including a parked vehicle, a
pedestrian, or another bicycle as a vehicle collision only if it occurred on a highway
(Highway includes shoulders, sidewalks and bike lanes within the highway
right-of-way).
E. Other - If this selection is marked, explain in the narrative. Includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
1. Driverless vehicles
2. A vehicle being towed by other than a rigid tow bar or tow truck
3. Animal drawn conveyances
4. Operators of a train, airplane or cable car. The conveyance (train, airplane, cable
car, etc.) should be identified as a party type "Other" and the injured persons in the
vehicle should be identified as passengers.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/324
5. Operators of highway construction removal equipment not in transport
6. Equestrians (horseback riders)
7. Injured parties in or upon a structure, including buildings, phone booths, bus

benches, etc.
NOTE: Do not include (6) and (7) as parties if there are no injuries.
3/325 DRIVER'S LICENSE NUMBER/STATE
Enter the alpha/numeric number as it appears on the driver's license.
A. If the driver's license is a valid military or government driver's license, place "Govt." after the
license number. Record this type of driver's license number only if the driver is an employee
of the United States Government operating a federally-owned or controlled vehicle on
official business.
B. Enter "Exp" after the license number if the license has expired.
C. Enter "NIP" if driver does not have his license in his possession.
D. Enter "None" if driver is un-licensed.
E. Enter information considered essential in the narrative (restrictions, endorsements,

expiration date if the license is expired, type of license).
F. Leave this entry blank if not applicable to the involved party, (parked motor vehicles,
bicycles, trains) 12953 VC.
3/326 CLASS OF DRIVER'S LICENSE
Enter the class of driver's license in the Class space. For California drivers this will be Class A, B, C, or M
(or 1, 2, 3, or 4 for older drivers' licenses). If a driver has more than one class on the driver's license enter
the class, if appropriate, for the vehicle they were driving at the time of the collision. If it is not the proper
class for the vehicle they were driving enter a "0."
A. If a class “A” or “B” driver does not have a valid medical certificate, his class “A” or “B”
license is not valid, enter "0."
B. If unable to determine the class of license, leave blank.
C. If the license is out-of-state/International enter an "F."
D. For valid driving permits enter a "C.”
E. For un-licensed drivers, drivers with suspended or revoked licenses, or drivers with invalid
driving permits enter a "U."
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/326
F. For drivers who are NIP (Not in Possession) at the time of collision, leave the class box
blank until the license status and class are determined through DMV.
3/327 AIRBAG / SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Enter the appropriate alpha code in the Airbag and Safety Equipment boxes. See the collision coding page
of the CHP Form 555 for the Safety Equipment legend.
3/328 NAME
Record the first, middle, last, and generation of the involved party. If the involved party has a driver's license,
the name recorded should be exactly as shown on the license. Any difference between a person's true
name and the name recorded should be explained in the narrative; for example: marriage, divorce, or legal
name change.
A. If the involved party was driving an emergency vehicle and meets the criteria described in
3/303-E, enter "On-Duty Emerg Veh." above the person's name.
B. If the involved party is a hit & run suspect, (including non-contact) that cannot be identified,
enter "20002 or 20001 VC" in the last name field and leave all the other name fields blank.
3/329 STREET ADDRESS-CITY/STATE/ZIP
Record the current street address, city, state, zip code of the party's residence. If desired, the business
address can then be added in the space provided. It is recommended that at least a business phone
number be added. If the party is unemployed, self employed, a student, etc., an indication may be made in
the business address space.
A. If the address provided is a P.O. Box, i nclude in the narrative additional information that will
assist in locating the involved party at a later date, (business/residence address).
B. If an involved party is in the armed forces, enter the branch of service and current military
address. Enter additional addresses in the narrative.
C. When entering the address, use the standard Post Office two-letter State code (Appendix
B).
3/330 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
Enter the appropriate information in the sex, hair, eyes, height, and weight boxes. In most cases, this
information will be available on, and should match, the party's drivers license or identification card. When
neither of these are available, complete the physical description with information that can be determined. If
physical description cannot be determined, leave blank.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/331 BIRTH DATE
Record the six digit numerical month, day, and year that the involved party was born (06/23/43). If unable to
determine the exact birth date, leave blank.
3/332 RACE
Enter the appropriate PACMIS code abbreviation of each party's descent:
A - Other Asian L - Laotian
B - Black O - Other
C - Chinese P - Pacific Islander
D - Cambodian S - Samoan
F - Filipino U - Hawaiian
G - Guamanian V - Vietnamese
H - Hispanic/Latin/Mexican W - White
I - American Indian X - Unknown
J - Japanese Z - Asian Indian
K - Korean
3/333 TELEPHONE NUMBERS
Enter the party's home and business phone numbers including area codes. When either of the phone
numbers are unknown, enter UNK. If the party has no phone enter "None."
3/334 INSURANCE CARRIER
This space is available to include the insurance carrier name and policy number of the involved driver's
vehicle. If a person is unable to provide or does not know the name of their insurance carrier and policy
number, enter "None" in the box.
3/335 DIRECTION OF TRAVEL - ON STREET OR HIGHWAY
Enter the direction of travel and the name of the highway, street, alley, etc., upon which the involved party was
traveling.
A. When a collision occurs while a vehicle is making a turn at an intersection and the point of
impact is within the intersection, the direction of travel is the direction of the vehicle prior to
the turning movement. Entries such as "N" for north or "N to W" for north to west are
acceptable.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/335
B. The direction of travel for a vehicle driving into or backing out of a driveway is the direction
the vehicle was facing prior to the movement.
C. The direction of travel for a parked or stopped vehicle is the direction the vehicle was facing
prior to any movement.
NOTE: When an investigating officer is unsure of the actual compass direction he should
use, document which roadway was used as the north/south and east/west
measurements in the narrative.
3/336 SPEED LIMIT
Enter the prima facie speed limit or, when applicable, the maximum speed limit for the vehicle or
combination of vehicles upon the highway where the collision occurred.
3/338 VEHICLE YEAR
Enter the last two digits of the vehicle model year for up to two vehicles.
3/339 MAKE / MODEL / COLOR
Enter the manufacturer trade name or standard abbreviation, model series name and color
(Dodge/Aries/Blue, Chev/Celebrity/Wht-Grn). If more than a combination of two vehicles is involved and the
space is not adequate for all names, enter "See narrative" or "See miscellaneous box" and record the
additional information there.
3/340 LICENSE NUMBER / STATE / VIN
Enter the alpha/numeric number as it appears on the license plate. Compare this number with that shown on
the registration certificate. When no license plate is available, enter the VIN number in the appropriate VIN
number box.
A. Enter "Exp" after the license number if the license has expired. Officers may enter the month
and year of expiration in the box below the license number box.
B. Enter the standard abbreviation for the name of the state which issued the license plate
(See Appendix B). If the vehicle is not registered and registration is not required, enter
"N/A" for not applicable. Additional information considered essential may be entered in the
narrative.
C. If a combination of vehicles are involved in the collision and the space is not adequate for all
plate numbers, enter "See narrative" or "See miscellaneous box" and record the additional
plate numbers there.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/341 REGISTERED OWNER'S NAME/ADDRESS
Enter the registered owner's name, first name first, and address if the driver is not the registered owner. If
the driver is the registered owner, enter an "X" in the "Same as Driver" box. If the owner's address is the
same as the driver's, enter an "X" in the "Same as Driver" box in the owner's address space. Space is only
provided for one registered owner. If more registered owners need to be indicated, do so in the
"Miscellaneous" box or in the narrative. Enter "See Miscellaneous Box" in registered owner information box.
3/342 DISPOSITION OF VEHICLE / ON ORDERS OF
If applicable, enter the name and telephone number (with area code) o f the garage or storage point to which
the vehicle was towed. Select the appropriate box for the "On Order Of" space. If "Other," record the name
and drivers license number of the person to whom the vehicle was released in the narrative. If vehicle is
driven from scene, check "Driver" box and write "driven."
If the vehicle was impounded, write the letter "R" to the right of the "Other" box if the vehicle is OK to release.
If there is a hold on the vehicle write "H" to the right of the "Other" box.
3/343 PRIOR MECHANICAL DEFECTS
When there are no prior mechanical defects which, in the investigating officer's opinion, contributed to the
collision or which the officer did not issue a citation for, enter "X" in the "None Apparent" box. When, in the
investigating officer's opinion, a mechanical defect may have contributed to the collision or a citation was
issued for a mechanical violation, enter "X" in the "Refer to Narrative" box and explain the defect in the
narrative.
NOTE: When a police vehicle is involved in a traffic collision and defective equipment is
alleged by the driver or revealed during the investigation, the investigating officer
shall immediately notify the watch commander, Motor Transport Division, who will
initiate a vehicle safety inspection.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/344 VEHICLE TYPE
Enter the two-digit code for a single vehicle, the towing vehicle of a combination of vehicles, or a
miscellaneous entry in the left side of the divided box. The right side of the divided box is for a towed
vehicle, a towed combination of vehicles, or for a miscellaneous entry. Vehicle Type Codes are as follows:
PASSENGER VEHICLES SPECIALIZED VEHICLES

01 Passenger Car, Station 41 Ambulance
Wagon, Jeep 42 Dune Buggy
02 Motorcycle 43 Fire Truck
03 Motor Driven Cycle / Scooter 44 Fork Lift
04 Bicycle 45 Hwy Construction Equipment
05 Motorized Bicycle 46 Implement of Husbandry
06 All Terrain Vehicle 47 Motor Home
07 Sport Utility Vehicle 48 Police Car
08 Mini-van 49 Police Motorcycle
50 Mobile Equipment
BUSES 51 Farm Labor Vehicle
09 Paratransit (Certified)
10 Tour Bus 55 Two-Axle Tow Truck
11 Other Commercial 56 Three-Axle Tow Truck
12 Non-Commercial Bus 57 Farm Labor Vehicle
13 School Bus Public Type I (Non-Certified)
14 School Bus Public Type II 58 Farm Labor Transporter
15 School Bus Private Type I 59 Motor Home >40 feet
16 School Bus Private Type II
17 School Bus Contractual Type I TRAILERS
18 School Bus Contractual Type II 28 Semi Tank Trailer
19 General Public Paratransit 29 Pull Tank Trailer
Vehicle 30 Two Tank Trailer
20 Public Transit Authority 31 Semi
63 Youth Bus 32 Pull
64 School Pupil Activity Bus Type I 33 Two Trailers (Semi & Pull)
65 School Pupil Activity Bus Type II 34 Boat
35 Utility
TRUCKS/TRUCK TRACTORS 36 Trailer Coach
21 Two Axle Tank Truck 37 Extralegal Permit Load
22 Pickups and Panels 38 Pole, Pipe, or Logging Dolly
23 Pickup with Camper 39 Three Trailers
24 Three Axle Tank Truck 40 Federally Legal Semi
25 Truck Tractor 52 Federally Legal Double
26. Two Axle Truck Combo Over 75 Feet
27. Three or More Axle Truck 53 Fifth Wheel Travel Trailer
54 Container Chassis
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/344
MISCELLANEOUS HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

60 Pedestrian 71 Passenger Car, Station
61 Second or Additional Enforcement Wagon, Jeep
Actions 72 Pickups and Panels
62 Passengers 73 Pickup and Camper
94 Go-ped, ZIP electric scooter, 75 Truck Tractor
Motoboard 76 Two-Axle Truck
95 Misc. Non-Motor Vehicle 77 Three or More Axle Truck
96 Misc. Motor Vehicle 78 Two-Axle Tank Truck
(Snowmobile, Golf Cart) 79 Three-Axle Tank Truck
97 Low Speed Vehicle
98 Emergency Vehicle
(On Emergency Run)
99 Unknown Hit and Run Vehicle Involvement
HAZARDOUS WASTE OR HAZARDOUS WASTE / MATERIAL COMBINATION

81 Passenger Car, Station Wagon, Jeep
82 Pickups and Panels
83 Pickup and Camper
85 Truck Tractor
86 Two-Axle Truck
87 Three or More Axle Truck
88 Two-Axle Tank Truck
89 Three-Axle Tank Truck
3/345 VEHICLE DAMAGE - EXTENT/LOCATION
Determine the extent and location of damage and check the appropriate box. Damage selections are
described as follows:
A. Unknown - When the extent or location of damage is unknown (hit and run vehicle).
B. None - No visible damage occurred to an involved vehicle (auto vs. ped).
C. Minor - Slight damage such as dents, broken glass, etc.
D. Moderate - More than slight, but damage to one-fourth or less of the vehicle.
E. Major - Damage to more than one-fourth of the vehicle.
F. Rollover – Damage to vehicle attributed to rollover actions. Includes damage to

undercarriage occurring in this manner.
G. Location of Damage - On the picture of the vehicle provided on the face page, shade in the
damaged area to represent the approximate degree of damage to the vehicle involved in
the collision. When a combination of vehicles is involved, describe damage to the towed
vehicle(s)in the miscellaneous box or narrative.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/346 CHP, DOT, ICC, PUC
When a truck or tractor trailer regulated by the United States Department of Transportation (DOT), Interstate
Commerce Commission (ICC), Public Utilities Commission (PUC), or California Highway Patrol (CHP) is
involved in a collision, this space must be filled in. Enter the appropriate regulating agency code. Enter the
assigned CHP, DOT, ICC, or PUC number in the Motor Carrier Number space. If a vehicle displays more
than one of the four possible numbers, the following is the priority order:
A. CHP (CA) numbers contain one to seven digits.
B. DOT numbers can contain one to six numbers.
C. ICC (MC) numbers contain one to six digits.
D. PUC Truck numbers contain one to six digits and are prefaced with a "T" or "Cal-T" (enter
T######, not Cal-T######) PUC bus numbers contain one to four digits, are prefaced with
"PSC" or "TCP", and may be followed by one or two letters (enter the prefix, the digits, and
the letters).
3/347 PREPARER'S NAME/REVIEWING SUPERVISOR'S NAME
A. Clearly print the name and serial number of the person responsible for the investigation in
the "Preparer's Name" space.
B. Supervisors SHALL ensure:
1. All reports are turned in at end of watch, whether completed or not, to the Watch
Supervisor.
NOTE: The watch supervisor shall be responsible for maintaining a holding area
for uncompleted reports.
2. When the report is incomplete, the investigating officer is returning to work the
following day and the report is completed the next day. If the officer is not working
the following day, the report must be completed prior to his EOW.
3. The Automated Divisional Record of Issuance System (ADRIS) printout is attached

to the appropriate report.
4. On hit and run collisions, the DMV and Auto Status printouts are paper clipped
attached to the report.
5. Completed reports are read for propriety, essential information, clarity and legibility
prior to signing in the reviewer's name box.
6. Ensure the proper type of report (Class I/Class II) has been completed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/347
7. All reports involving a fatality, traffic felony booking or unbooked DUI SHALL be
approved by a traffic supervisor.
NOTE: A traffic supervisor shall provide booking approval for all unbooked DUI’s
and traffic felonies.
8. Supervisors shall also include their serial number in the reviewer's name box.
NOTE: The supervisor’s name and serial number shall be legible.
3/348 DISPATCH NOTIFIED
Mark the "N/A" box for all reports.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/350 CHP FORM 555 FORM SET, PAGE 2
3/351 DATE OF COLLISION/TIME/NCIC NUMBER/OFFICER I.D.
Complete these boxes on each side of the CHP 555 Form Set and CHP Form 556. Enter the numeric
month, day, year, time, NCIC number, and the employee's serial number as completed on the first page of
the original CHP Form 555. These four categories are used to identify each Traffic Collision Reported to
SWITRS and shall be the same on every page of the report.
3/352 NUMBER
Enter the original DR number assigned to the collision.
3/353 PAGE
Enter the page number to identify the completed page's location in the report.
3/354 PROPERTY DAMAGE (To other than vehicles)
3/355 OWNER'S NAME/ADDRESS
Enter the name and complete address of the owner or person in charge of the damaged property.
Additional property information should be listed in the narrative prior to the "Summary" section. If one owner
has several items involved in the collision, it is acceptable to list them on the same line.
3/356 PROPERTY OWNER NOTIFIED
Mark "X" in the appropriate box indicating whether or not the owner or person in charge of the damaged
property was notified.
3/357 DESCRIPTION OF DAMAGE
Enter a description of any property damaged in the collision other than vehicles. Leave this space blank if
not applicable.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/358 LEGEND
This is a legend to supply numeric and alpha codes to be used in the safety equipment box on the CHP
Form 555 face page and the seating position, safety equipment and ejected boxes on the
Injured/Witness/Passenger page.
NOTE: When the investigating officer is unable to determine any information for these
categories, place the appropriate unknown code in the box. Do not leave any
seating position, safety equipment or ejected box blank when there is an injured
party or passenger, unless the injured party is a pedestrian.
3/359 SEATING POSITION (Enter on Injured/Passenger/Witness page)
Select the appropriate seating position number code from the legend and enter that number in the seating
position box for that particular party or passenger on the Injured/Witness/Passenger page.
A. Injury collisions involving a bus or school bus with up to 26 passengers should have "alpha"
seating positions assigned to the passengers.
B. Injury collisions with more than 26 passengers should have a description of the seating
position in the narrative. The seating position box on the CHP Form 555, page 3, would be
left blank.
C. The codes are self-explanatory; However, if the driver of a vehicle with a right side driving
position is injured use a "1" for the drivers position.
D. The "0" code is used for other occupant(s). This may be used for a fourth (or additional)
passenger in the front seat of a pick-up or front or rear seat of a passenger vehicle.
E. Seating positions for motorcycle/mopeds and bicycles are as follows:
1. Passenger position "2" is directly behind the rider.
2. Passenger position "3" is the occupant of a side car.
3. Passenger position "0" is to be used for passengers in any other location on the
motorcycle/moped or bicycle.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/360 SAFETY EQUIPMENT (Enter on CHP 555 Form Set page 1 and the
Injured/Witness/Passengers page)
A. Party - Select the safety equipment alpha code from the legend and enter that code in the
“Airbag” and “Safety Equipment” boxes on the face page. If a party is injured, complete the
“Airbag” and “Safety Equipment” boxes on both the face page and the
Injured/Witness/Passengers page.
B. Passenger - Select the safety equipment alpha code from the legend and enter that code in
the “Airbag” and “Safety Equipment” boxes on the Injured/Witness/Passengers page.
C. If the vehicle was manufactured without airbags for a certain seating position, enter “P -
Not Required”.
D. If the vehicle was originally equipped with an airbag, yet at the time of the collision an
airbag was not installed, enter “N - Other” and explain in the narrative.
E. In situations where an airbag did not deploy and circumstances indicate it should have,
enter “M - Air Bag Not Deployed.” In the narrative portion of the traffic collision report,
the investigating officer should describe the circumstances observed that led to the
conclusion the airbag should have deployed.
F. If a child that is required to be in a safety seat as outlined i n 27360 VC is a passenger in an

involved vehicle, enter the appropriate alpha code on the Injured/Passenger/Witness page.
G. Enter the appropriate alpha code for helmet use of motorcycle and bicycle occupants.
1. A motorcyclist involved in a collision while wearing an unapproved helmet shall be

coded “V” (No Helmet).
2. A motorcycle passenger wearing an unapproved helmet shall be coded “X” (No

Helmet).
H. Ejected from vehicle - Select the appropriate "Ejected from Vehicle" numeric code from the
legend and enter that code in the “Ejected” box on the Injured/Witness/Passenger page.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/361 INATTENTION CODES
On Page two (Traffic Collision Coding), The Inattention Codes shall be used in conjunction with the
“Inattention” box “F” of the “Other Associated Factors” field. The corresponding code letter may be placed in
the box to the right of the colon. The inattention and how it was established shall be explained in the
narrative.
TYPE OF INATTENTION CODE DESCRIPTION
Cell Phone Handheld A Self Explanatory

Cell Phone Handsfree B Self Explanatory
Electronic Equipment C Computers, Fax, Heads-up Display, On-
board Navigation, Two-way Radios
Radio / CD D Adjusting Station / Volume (includes
headphones)
Smoking E Cigars, Pipes, Cigarettes (Lighting,
Searching)
Eating F Self Explanatory
Children G Disciplining, Distracting
Animal H Interfering with control
Personal Hygiene I Applying Make-up, Shaving, Brushing
Teeth, etc.
Reading J Books, Newspapers, Maps, etc.
Other K Explain in narrative
3/362 COLLISION ANALYSIS
A. This section contains categories for traffic collision coding. Each category requires one
entry, except as indicated. Single column categories pertain to the collision, and
multi-column categories pertain to the involved parties.
B. Enter the letter character(s) that matches your choice for each coding section.
C. If a section has two or more choice spaces, you may enter more than one character, if
needed. Refer to the particular heading.
D. When the collision involves more than three parties, line out the involved party numbers in
the multi-column categories on additional CHP Form 555's and enter 4, 5, and 6 as
necessary. Only the multi-column categories should be completed on the additional forms.
E. Items selected which are followed by an asterisk or colon shall be described or explained in
the narrative.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/363 PRIMARY COLLISION FACTOR
The investigating officer shall select the one element or driving action, which best d escribes the primary or
main cause of the collision. Whenever possible this should be a VC violation.
NOTE: All Traffic Collision Reports that do not have at-scene investigations shall be
coded as party “X” at fault (20015 (a) VC).
"A" Section Violated
A. Enter the VC or other Code Violation considered to be the primary cause of the collision.
Include the proper subsection when applicable. Omission or error in selection of subsection
may cause the report to be rejected as an error from the SWITRS computer or the statistics
may present incorrect cause of the collision. Do not use VC Sections that do not describe
the cause of collision; such as 20001, 20002, 23103 or 23153. These violations may be
charged, but are not what actually caused the collision.
B. Enter the number of the involved party most at fault in the "Party at Fault" field when "A" is
applicable. If unable to determine, mark an "X" in the appropriate box. This should be
done ONLY when there are two or more involved parties and the investigating officer cannot
determine which party is most at fault or if there is no at-scene investigation.
C. When the involved party determined to be most at fault is either physically arrested or
issued a citation for the PCF, enter an "X" in the Cited - Yes box. If no citation was issued
or arrest made, enter "X" in the No - box.
D. Should there be more than one violation, choose the violation which contributed most to the
collision.
E. When the involved party most at fault is under-the-influence of alcohol and/or drugs, the
primary collision factor shall be the 23152(a) VC (misdemeanor DUI) regardless of whether
the arrest/booking charge is for felony DUI. Enter other violations under “Other Associated
Factor.”
NOTE: If a drug or alcohol section applies to a party determined not to be "at fault" in the
traffic collision, the PCF would be recorded as the violation of the party at fault and
the DUI would be entered in the "Associated Factors" box. The item selected
under Sobriety-Drug-Physical should be compatible with PCF in regards to alcohol
or drugs.
EXAMPLES:
1. Party #1, under-the-influence of alcohol, failed to stop for a posted stop sign
(22450 VC) and collided with Party #2 within the intersection. The PCF should
reflect Party #1 for violation of 23152(a) VC. Other Associated Factor should
reflect Party #1 for 22450 VC.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/363
2. Party #1, driving at an unsafe speed for conditions (22350 VC), rear-ending Party
#2 who was stopped at a red traffic signal. The investigation revealed that P arty #2
was under-the-influence of alcohol but was not the primary cause of the collision.
The PCF for Party #1 should be 22350 VC. Other Associated Factor should be
23152(a) VC for Party #2 and "N" None Apparent for Party #1.
"B" Other Improper Driving
A. This element would be selected only when no specific code violation is applicable as the
main or primary cause of the collision.
EXAMPLE: While on private property, a driver operates a vehicle at an unsafe speed

and crashes.
B. This element should not be used as a "catch-all" to relieve the officer of his responsibility for
determining a code violation as the primary collision factor.
C. Place the number of the involved party most at fault in this box when "B" is applicable. If
unable to determine, mark an "X" in this box.
D. Explain this entry in the narrative.
"C" Other Than Driver
A. Select "C" when the primary cause of the collision was beyond the control of a driver.
EXAMPLES:
1. A large animal (deer, horse, cow, etc.) runs in front of a vehicle.
2. Heart attack, epileptic seizure, diabetic coma, etc., which involves injury or property
damage.
3. A driver operating a vehicle properly and safely for visible conditions strikes "black
ice" and runs off the road sustaining damage or injury.
4. Mechanical failure not known or foreseeable through normal and reasonable

maintenance; such as the vehicle transmission locks up, an axle breaks from metal
fatigue, the steering column locks up, etc.
5. A vehicle tire throws up a rock that strikes another vehicle’s windshield and this is
corroborated by statements or physical evidence.
6. Vehicle collides with parked vehicle door opened into traffic by passenger.
determining a code violation as the primary collision factor.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/363
"D" Unknown
A. Select “D” when the cause of the traffic collision cannot be determined. Fully explain this
entry in the narrative.
EXAMPLE: Conflicting statements and/or lack of physical evidence make it impossible

for the investigating officer to determine the cause of a traffic collision.
"E" Fell Asleep
A. Select "E" only when the investigating officer can clearly establish that the driver who
caused the collision fell asleep.
1. This may be established by the driver's statement when corroborated by physical

evidence or by a witness or passenger statement. A driver's statement alone may
not be enough to substantiate fell asleep as a PCF.
2. When a driver's statement is in conflict with the physical evidence, further

investigation is necessary to establish a PCF of "Fell Asleep."
3. When "Fell Asleep" is established, enter the number of the involved party most at
fault in the "Party at Fault" field. Explain in the narrative how Fell Asleep was
established as the PCF.
determining a code violation as the primary collision factor. When a code violation is
established in conjunction with Fell Asleep, (22350, 21460 VC, etc.) the violation should be
entered in Other Associated Factor.
3/364 WEATHER
Mark one to two items, A to E. Select the letters which best described the weather at the time of the collision.
Also select either F or G if these conditions may have contributed to the occurrence of the collision.
A. Clear - This element includes partial cloudiness if sunlight is not diminished.
B. Cloudy - Usually overcast, but may be only partial cloudiness when light is diminished.
C. Raining - If selected, should agree with Roadway Surface.
D. Snowing - If selected, should agree with Roadway Surface.
E. Fog - If this selection is made, the officer will be given an opportunity to enter an estimate of
visibility.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/364
F. Other - Enter description of the condition on the line provided. Remember to include details
of the condition in the narrative. Includes conditions such as hail, dust, smoke, etc.,
because they may impair visibility, and thus may have contributed to the occurrence of the
collision. If selected, also select E - Vision Obscurement under Other Associated Factor.
G. Wind - Select this only when winds are sufficiently strong to make vehicle control difficult and
thus may have contributed to the accident.
3/365 LIGHTING
Select the appropriate item which describes the lighting conditions at the collision location and at the time
the collision occurred.
A. This entry must agree with Time.
B. If "E", "Dark-Street Lights Not Functioning," is selected, explain in the narrative the number
of inoperative street lights, their location and reason for malfunction if known.
3/366 ROADWAY SURFACE
Select the one element which best describes the roadway surface condition at the time of the collision in the
traffic lane(s)involved. If D - Slippery (Muddy, Oily, etc.) is selected, describe within the “Narrative” the
material present, the size of the affected areas, location, etc.
3/367 ROADWAY CONDITIONS
Mark one to two items which best d escribes the roadway conditions existing at the time of the collision in the
traffic lane(s) involved.
A. Holes, Deep Ruts - Describe their location, size, and depth in the narrative.
B. Loose Material on Roadway - Includes sand, gravel, dirt, or similar material that a vehicle
could drive over. Describe the location and type of material in the narrative.
C. Obstruction on Roadway - Includes rocks, boxes, structural material, automobile parts, etc.,
that should, due to size or shape, be driven around. Describe the obstruction in the
diagram, sketch, or narrative.
D. Construction - Repair Zone - A section of highway where construction, repair, or

maintenance is being performed. Roadway need not be assigned a speed lower than
normal or be restricted as to width.
E. Reduced Roadway Width - A temporary reduction in the width of the roadway; for example,
snow drifts, dirt slides, construction zones, etc. Excludes when a sign is posted reducing
the number of lanes or roadway width of a permanent nature.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/367
F. Flooded - The roadway markings and limits are obscured and would normally affect
steering and/or braking. Explain in the narrative the size of the flooded area, depth of water,
etc.
G. Other - Includes conditions not covered in “A” through “F” above.
EXAMPLE: Oil slick on the road, mud slide
H. No Unusual Conditions - Self-explanatory
NOTE: Except for “H,” all of the Roadway Conditions above should be considered CPI and
explained in the narrative.
3/368 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
Select the element that best describes the presence and condition of collision related traffic control devices
at the time of the collision. "Control devices" include traffic signals (multi phased traffic lights, flashing
warning lights); regulatory signs (speed limit), warning, and construction signs (one way signs, sharp curve
signs, suggested speed signs, open trench signs, railroad gates, chain control signs, etc.); channelization;
and crosswalk markings. Excludes officers or other persons directing traffic.
A. Controls Functioning - A traffic control device is present and in operating condition.
B. Controls Not Functioning - A traffic control device is present, but not in operating condition.
Explain in narrative.
C. Controls Obscured - A traffic control device is present and in operating condition, but is
obscured from the involved party's line of sight. Explain in narrative how controls were
obscured, how determined and what action was taken.
D. No Controls Present/Factor - A traffic control device is not present or it is not a factor in the
causation of the collision. If controls are present but are not a factor, a brief statement as to
the type of controls present should be made.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/369 TYPE OF COLLISION
Select the one element which best describes the general type of collision as determined by the initial injury
or damage causing event. Use Elements A through D only if two or more motor vehicles are involved in the
first event. Includes a moving motor vehicle striking a parked vehicle. Primary consideration should be
given to the direction of travel of the vehicle(s) in motion prior to impact. Bicycles may only be selected "H" -
Other. Type of Collision and Motor Vehicle Involved With must be compatible.
A. Head-On - Two motor vehicles, approaching from opposite directions, make direct contact.
EXAMPLE: The front of one vehicle collides with the front of another; or prior to impact, one
vehicle skids sideways causing the side of the skidding vehicle to collide with the
front of the other.
B. Sideswipe - One motor vehicle strikes the side of another with a glancing blow.
EXAMPLE: Two vehicles proceeding in the same direction or from opposite directions, and the
side of one vehicle strikes the side of the other.
C. Rear End - Two motor vehicles, traveling in the same direction, make direct contact.
EXAMPLE: The front of one vehicle strikes the rear of another vehicle; or vehicle A approaches
vehicle B from the rear and skids sideways during a braking action, causing the
side of Vehicle A to strike the rear of Vehicle B.
D. Broadside - The front of one motor vehicle strikes another vehicle at an angle greater than
that which constitutes a sideswipe.
E. Hit Object - A motor vehicle strikes a fixed object or other object.
F. Overturned - A motor vehicle overturns and no prior collision caused the overturning. Do not
use when the vehicle hits an object and then overturns.
G. Vehicle/Pedestrian - A vehicle strikes a pedestrian.
H. Other - An accident not covered in the preceding elements, such as a vehicle backing into
another, a vehicle involved with a bicycle, train or animal, an automobile fire, passengers
falling or jumping from a vehicle, a bicycle involved with a pedestrian or another bicycle, etc.
Explain in the narrative.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/370 MOTOR VEHICLE INVOLVED WITH
Select the one element which describes what, in conjunction with a motor vehicle, produced the initial injury
or damage causing event on or off the road. Motor Vehicle Involved With and Type of Collision must be
compatible.
A. Non-collision - A collision involves a motor vehicle which may occur in any manner other
than by collision. There are two types of non-collisions: "Overturning" and "Other Non-
collision."
1. "Overturning" is a collision in which a motor vehicle in transport overturns for any

reason without a prior collision.
EXAMPLE: Overturning after swerving to avoid a collision, striking a surface irregularity

(uneven road surface, holes, bumps, ruts), or due to a shifting load.
2. "Other Non-collision" is any collision involving a motor vehicle in transport, other

than overturning, and collision. Includes an occupant falling or jumping from a motor
vehicle; damage involving only the motor vehicle -such as striking road surface
irregularities (uneven road surface, holes, bumps, ruts); carbon monoxide
poisoning; and fire starting in a motor vehicle. Includes a passenger injured from
striking the interior of the vehicle due to some motion of the vehicle such as a quick
stop.
B. Pedestrian - A collision involves a bicycle or a motor vehicle in transport and a pedestrian.

Includes a person in or operating a coaster wagon, scooter, sled, skateboard, or
wheelchair.
C. Other Motor Vehicle - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport which comes in
contact with another motor vehicle upon the same roadway or upon roadways within an
intersection. Falling loads, detached trailers, etc., are considered motor vehicles.
NOTE: Construction machinery, farm and industrial machinery, road rollers, tractors, army
tanks, highway graders, and similar devices equipped with wheels or treads while
in transport under their own power or towed are motor vehicles. When not in
transport, these devices are either "fixed objects" or "other object" depending upon
movement.
D. Motor Vehicle on Other Roadway - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport which
leaves the roadway and collides with another motor vehicle in transport on another roadway.
EXAMPLE: Crossing a median strip and colliding with a vehicle on an opposing roadway.
E. Parked Motor Vehicle - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport and a motor vehicle
not in transport. Includes a collision with a motor vehicle which is stopped or parked
illegally, but otherwise outside the traffic lanes, such as blocking a driveway, beside a fire
hydrant, or in a loading zone. Excludes a motor vehicle stopped or parked in a traffic lane
where parking is prohibited.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/370
F. Train - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport and a railway train or railway vehicle.
Includes collisions involving a railway device, such as railroad cars, set in motion by a train.
Excludes collisions where a railway train was involved in a railway accident, such as
derailment, prior to involvement with the motor vehicle.
G. Bicycle - A collision involves a bicyclist. Include only bicyclists as stated in 21200(a) VC

(person in or upon any other device, except motorized bicycles, moved by pedaling will be
considered a pedestrian).
H. Animal - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport and an animal which is herded or
unattended. Indicate the type of animal in the space provided. Includes collisions involving
wild animals if a person is injured or if there is damage to the motor vehicle.
I. Fixed Object - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport and a fixed object. Includes
any object attached to or part of the terrain, such as a dirt embankment, boulder, tree, utility
pole, traffic signal, guard rail, etc. Also includes removable objects placed for an official
purpose such as traffic barricades, construction materials, and construction machinery.
Excludes any objects in motion. Identify the object involved on the line provided.
J. Other Object - A collision involves a motor vehicle in transport and any object which is
movable or moving, but not fixed or intentionally placed for an official purpose. Includes an
animal-drawn vehicle, ridden animal, street car, object dropped from a motor vehicle (when
such object is not in motion), fallen trees or stones, a transit-mix truck while discharging its
load of concrete, a snowplow while engaged in snow removal operations, etc. Identify the
object(s) involved on the line provided.
NOTE: Any object which is dropped from a motor vehicle in transport and still moving at the
time of the collision, is considered part of the load and would be choice “C” - Other
Motor Vehicle. Type of Collision would be “H” - Other.
3/371 PEDESTRIAN'S ACTION
Select the element which best describes the action of the involved pedestrian just prior to the collision. If
there is more than one pedestrian involved, select only one element for the first pedestrian injured or
otherwise involved. Officers shall not make entries for the pedestrian in the "Movement Preceding Collision"
category.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/372 SPECIAL INFORMATION
Mark an “X” in the appropriate part number column to indicate any applicable element(s). Party number shall
correspond with the involved party number on the CHP 555, Page 1.
A. Hazardous Materials – Mark the box when the collision involves a vehicle known to be, or
believed to be transporting "Hazardous Materials" as defined in 353 VC when any of the
following apply:
1. There is a release of hazardous materials from any package or container, including

a cargo tank (except a vehicle fuel system spilling less than 42 gallons)
2. Hazardous materials packages or containers have fallen or dropped to the highway

without release of their contents
3. There is continuing danger to life or health at the scene due to presence of the
hazardous materials
B. When this line is coded, the narrative portion of the report should include as a minimum:
1. Information identifying the material(s) by name
2. Hazardous class
3. Quantity involved
4. Nature of hazardous materials involvement
5. Cleanup involved
6. If there was continuing danger of life or health at the scene.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/372
C. Cell Phone in Use - Mark the box if the party was preparing to make or answer a cellular
phone call, talking in a cell phone, or in the act of retrieving a cell phone call while driving.
D. Cell Phone Not in Use - Mark the box if a cell phone was located in the vehicle but was not
in use at the time of the collision.
E. Cell Phone None / Unknown - Mark the box if there was no cell phone or the officer is unable
to determine if a cell phone was in the vehicle.
F. School Bus Related - CHP use only.
G. 75 Foot Motortruck Combo - CHP use only.
H. 32 Foot Trailer Combo - CHP use only.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/373 OTHER ASSOCIATED FACTOR(S)

Select one or two element(s) for each involved party which best describe(s) the involved party’s action
and/or vehicle condition(s) that have contributed to the occurrence of the collision. Elements selected
should be consistent with the narrative explanation.
A. VC Section Violation – For the involved party, enter the VC section that could have been a
factor in the occurrence of the collision. The section entered here for the involved party
most at fault would be different from the section entered in Primary Collision Factor. The
Primary Collision Factor may, however, be entered here if it applies to other parties.
If a mechanical violation was a factor in the collision, enter the appropriate VC section here instead
of selecting “K” (Defective Vehicle Equipment). If a citation was issued for the violation enter “X” in
the “Cited Yes” box. If no citation was issued, enter “X” in the “Cited No” box.
EXAMPLES:
1. Both drivers are under-the-influence of alcohol and/or drugs.
2. A driver fails to stop for a red traffic signal and collides with another vehicle in an
intersection. The VC violation entered in the “Other Associated Factor” category
could be 22350 VC (exceeding the safe speed limit) while the Primary Collision
Factor could be 21453 (A) VC (failure to stop for a red traffic signal).
3. An intoxicated driver weaves across the centerline on a two-lane highway and
collides with another vehicle going in the opposite direction. The Primary Collision
Factor would be driving under-the-influence of alcohol (23152 (A) VC), while the
Other Associated Factor may be wrong side of road (21650 VC).
During the course of an investigation, the investigating officer determines that at least one of the
parties was involved in illegal street racing and that it was a contributing factor to the traffic collision,
the coding for “Other Associated Factors” should be marked as follows:
OTHER ASSOCIATED FACTOR(S)

1 2 3
(MARK 1 TO 2 ITEMS)
A VC SECTION VIOLATION: CITED
23109 CVC q YES
X
x NO
B VC SECTION VIOLATION: CITED
q YES
q NO
C VC SECTION VIOLATION: CITED
q YES
q NO
D
E VISION OBSCUREMENT:
F INATTENTION*:
G STOP & GO TRAFFIC
H ENTERING / LEAVING RAMP
I PREVIOUS COLLISION
J UNFAMILIAR WITH ROAD
K DEFECTIVE VEH. EQUIP.: CITED
q YES
q NO
L UNINVOLVED VEHICLE
M OTHER*:
N NONE APPARENT
O RUNAWAY VEHICLE
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/373
B. VC Section Violation – Same as “A” above, for next involved party.
C. VC Section Violation – Same as “A” above, for third involved party.
D. This Section is not used, but is retained to maintain the alphabetical criteria in the computer
program.
E. Vision Obscurement – Indicate the type of obscurement in the space provided. Select this
if “F” – Other under Weather is indicated.
F. Inattention – Select this element if, in the opinion of the officer, inattention was an
associated factor in the collision. Do not use this element as a “catch-all.” A witness or
involved party statement, and/or physical evidence should verify the activity(s) before
documenting as an associated factor. In the narrative portion of the report, the inattention
activity and how it was established shall be explained.
NOTE: The mere act, involvement or usage of an item(s) listed below does not meet the criteria for
documentation in the traffic collision report. Before d ocumenting, the investigating officer
must establish the inattention was a contributing factor to the traffic collision. The following
codes should be placed to the right of the asterisk:
TYPE OF INATTENTION CODE DESCRIPTION
Cell Phone Handheld A Self Explanatory
Cell Phone Handsfree B Self Explanatory
Electronic Equipment C Computers, Fax, Heads-up Display, On-

board Navigation, Two-way Radios
Radio / CD D Adjusting Station / Volume (includes

headphones)
Smoking E Cigars, Pipes, Cigarettes (Lighting,

Searching)
Eating F Self Explanatory
Children G Disciplining, Distracting
Animal H Interfering with control
Personal Hygiene I Applying Make-up, Shaving, Brushing

Teeth, etc.
Reading J Books, Newspapers, Maps, etc.
Other K Explain in narrative
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/373
If during the course of a traffic collision investigation, the investigating officer determines Party No.
1’s usage of a cell phone was a contributing factor to the traffic collision, the coding for “Other
Associated Factors” should be marked as follows:
OTHER ASSOCIATED FACTOR(S)

1 2 3
(MARK 1 TO 2 ITEMS)
A VC SECTION VIOLATION: CITED
q YES
q NO
B VC SECTION VIOLATION: CITED
q YES
q NO
C VC SECTION VIOLATION: CITED
q YES
q NO
D
E VISION OBSCUREMENT:
X F INATTENTION*: P
G STOP & GO TRAFFIC
H ENTERING / LEAVING RAMP
I PREVIOUS COLLISION
J UNFAMILIAR WITH ROAD
K DEFECTIVE VEH. EQUIP.: CITED
q YES
q NO
L UNINVOLVED VEHICLE
M OTHER*:
N NONE APPARENT
O RUNAWAY VEHICLE
G. Stop & Go Traffic – Self-explanatory
H. Entering/Leaving Ramp - Select this element when the driver states, or there is evidence
that, an on ramp or off ramp was involved.
I. Previous Collision – Select this element if any obstruction, including traffic

Congestion, was present due to a prior collision and was a factor associated with this
collision.
J. Unfamiliar With Road – Self-explanatory.
K. Defective Vehicle Equipment – Select this element if the defect contributed to the
occurrence of the collision. Identify the type of defect on the line provided, such as
brakes, headlights, etc. If a VC violation for the defect has already been identified in
Elements “A” through “F”, leave this element blank. If not, enter the VC Section, and
indicate whether or not the party was cited. Enter “X” in the appropriate “Cited” box.
L. Uninvolved Vehicle – Select this element in the column for the involved party which
claims that another vehicle contributed to the occurrence of the collision. This element is
selected when the other vehicle sustained no damage, and there is no evidence to
indicate that the driver of the other vehicle committed a violation to cause the collision.
“Uninvolved Vehicle” and driver information may be entered in the narrative at the
discretion of the officer.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/373
NOTE: Uninvolved vehicle as used in this element excludes a “non-contact vehicle,”

since a “non-contact vehicle” as defined requires evidence of a traffic violation
and is corroborated by a disinterested witness and will be listed as a “Party.”
M. Other – Select this element when a factor other that A through L was present.
EXAMPLE: A driver swerved to avoid an object in the roadway. If desired, enter a short
description of the element and explain this entry in the narrative.
N. None Apparent – Self-explanatory
O. Runaway Vehicle – A vehicle unintentionally set in motion or out of control and which
accelerates uncontrollably due to mechanical failure, physical impairment or being
driverless. Includes brake failure, improper shifting or failure to downshift, stuck throttle or
no steering; persons who are unconscious or deceased at time of impact; or brakes which
slip on parked vehicles.
3/374 MOVEMENT PRECEDING COLLISION
Select the proper letter which best describes the action of each vehicle prior to the collision and before
evasive action begins. THIS MOVEMENT DOES NOT HAVE TO CORRESPOND WITH THE PRIMARY
COLLISION FACTOR. At least one vehicle must have movement. Do not include pedestrian actions.
A. Stopped - Select for a vehicle not moving but on the roadway (excludes shoulder). A stalled,
disabled, or abandoned vehicle on a roadway is considered stopped. Do not use for
vehicles in designated parking areas and vehicles within intersections preparing to turn
(See "O" - Parked, "D" - Making Right Turn, "E" - Making Left Turn).
B. Proceeding Straight - Select this element for a vehicle proceeding straight ahead. A
vehicle following the curve of a roadway is proceeding straight. A vehicle involved in a
collision on the roadway while in a curve should be coded proceeding straight. However, a
vehicle which runs off the road at a curve should be indicated "C" - Ran Off Road.
C. Ran Off Road - Select this element if the motor vehicle left the road (includes paved or
unpaved shoulder) prior to the collision and before evasive action began. Includes vehicles
which would have left the road had their movement not been halted by colliding with
protective barriers such as the guardrail, concrete walls or median barriers which are
generally placed adjacent to but outside the road.
D. Making Right Turn - Select this element for a vehicle making a right turn at an intersection or
into a private drive, or a vehicle stopped within an intersection preparing to turn right.
Includes illegal right turning movement, such as a right turn when prohibited or when out of
position. This excludes any lane change movement or turning movement to pass other
vehicles. Does not apply on freeways.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/374
E. Making Left Turn - Select this element for a vehicle making a left turn at an intersection or
into a private drive, or a vehicle stopped within an intersection preparing to turn left.
Includes illegal turning movements, such as a left turn when prohibited or when out of
position. This excludes any lane change movement or turning movement to pass another
vehicle. Does not apply on freeways.
F. Making U Turn - Select this element for a vehicle turning in order to proceed in the opposite
direction.
G. Backing - Select this element for a motor vehicle backing up, except when associated with
parking ("K" - Parking Maneuver).
H. Slowing, Stopping - Select this element for a motor vehicle in the process of slowing or
stopping the forward movement of the vehicle. Speed is not a factor in determining whether
this movement applies.
I. Passing Other Vehicles - Select this element if a motor vehicle on a two-way/two-lane road
moved into the opposing lane in order to pass another vehicle going in the same direction.
This excludes any movements where the passing vehicle and the over-taken vehicle are
traveling in the same direction in separate lanes ("J" - Changing Lanes).
J. Changing Lanes - Select this element for a motor vehicle making a lane change on a
roadway divided into two or more clearly marked lanes for traffic in one direction.
EXAMPLE: A violation of 21658 (a) VC (unsafe lane change) when a vehicle in the number one
lane of a multi-lane road changing lanes into the number two lane, sideswipes
another vehicle traveling in that lane; or a vehicle in the number one lane of a
multi-lane road unintentionally drifts into and sideswipes a vehicle in the adjacent
lane.
K. Parking Maneuver - Select this element for a motor vehicle in the process of parking. This
applies to any movement associated with parking (parallel or angle) a vehicle whether or
not the area is legally designated for parking. Includes a vehicle entering a designated
parking area; an area where normal usage permits parking, such as a curb or shoulder; or
an area where vehicles are parked illegally outside of a traffic lane. This excludes a vehicle
backing from a parked position in an attempt to enter traffic; for example, a vehicle backing
from a diagonal parking area or other type "parking strip" (L - Entering Traffic).
L. Entering Traffic - Select this element for a motor vehicle entering a designated lane of traffic
from a shoulder, median, parking strip, alley or private drive. Usually this is a forward
movement, but may include a backing movement associated with leaving a parked position.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/374
M. Other Unsafe Turning - Select this element for a motor vehicle making a turning movement
not described in other elements.
EXAMPLE: A violation of 22107 VC (unsafe turning movement). Do not use for a vehicle
making a lane change ("J" - Changing Lanes). Do not use coding "Other Unsafe
Turning" on freeways. Code "R" - Other for unsafe turning on freeways, 22107 VC.
N. Crossed into Opposing Lane - Select this element for a motor vehicle making an involuntary
or unplanned movement into an opposing lane of traffic on a two-way road. Do not use for a
vehicle that runs off the road and crosses a median prior to collision on other roadway.
O. Parked - Select this element for a motor vehicle not moving and outside of a traffic lane.
Includes a vehicle stopped on a shoulder or in another area where parking is designated or
permitted; or a motor vehicle parked illegally, but otherwise outside of a traffic lane, such as
blocking a driveway, beside a fire hydrant, or in a loading zone. This excludes a vehicle
stopped or parked in a traffic lane where prohibited, such as double parked, in a tunnel, or
on a bridge. Indicate these vehicles Stopped (A - Stopped).
P. Merging - Select this element for a vehicle merging into traffic preceding the collision.
EXAMPLE: A vehicle entering traffic from an on ramp, merging because the road narrows from
four to three lanes, or a vehicle exiting a traffic lane onto a collector road.
Q. Traveling Wrong Way - Select this element for a motor vehicle proceeding opposite to the
designated direction of traffic.
R. Other - Make this selection for a motor vehicle's or bicycle's movements not defined in
Elements "A" through "Q."
EXAMPLE: Motor vehicles passing or traveling on the shoulder or which veer onto the shoulder
and strike a parked vehicle, pedestrian, or other object. Also select for non-motor
vehicles including herded or ridden animals and animal drawn conveyances.
Describe the movement on the line provided. This section excludes a pedestrian.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/375 SOBRIETY, DRUG / PHYSICAL
Select one to two element(s) for each involved party which best describe(s) the condition of each involved
party with regard to alcohol, drugs, or physical impairment.
A. Had Not Been Drinking - Self-explanatory.
B. HBD-Under Influence - HBD and is under-the-influence of alcohol. Do not use for parked or
driverless vehicles ("H" - Not Applicable).
C. HBD-Not Under Influence - HBD but not under-the-influence of alcohol. If this element is
selected, explain in the narrative how the "drinking" was established and the method used
to determine the party was "not under-the-influence. "Do not use for parked or driverless
vehicles (“H” - Not Applicable).
D. HBD-Impairment Unknown - HBD but it is impossible to determine the extent of impairment.
EXAMPLE: The involved party was unconscious when removed from the scene, or was fatally
injured in the collision. If, as the result of a chemical test, the involved party is later
determined to have been under-the-influence and collision report copies have
already been distributed, submit the updated sobriety information on a
Supplemental. Do not use for parked or driverless vehicles ("H" - Not Applicable).
E. Under Drug Influence - The involved party appears to be under-the-influence of a drug other
than alcohol. Explain in the narrative the type of drug known or suspected. Do not use for
parked or driverless vehicles (“H” - Not Applicable).
NOTE: When either "B," "C," "D," or "E" is marked, a Driving Under-the-influence Arrest
Report face sheet, Form 5.02.05, is required.
F. Impairment-Physical - The involved party has physical handicaps such as paralysis, special
braces, etc. Includes parties who suffered a heart attack, epileptic seizure, diabetic coma,
or other physically incapacitating impairment which may have contributed to the collision.
This excludes defective eyesight or hearing if these impairments were adequately corrected
at the time of the collision. Do not use for parked or driverless vehicles (“H” - Not
Applicable).
G. Impairment Not Known - The collision involves a hit and run driver(s), or the existence of an
impairment cannot be determined.
H. Not Applicable - The motor vehicle is parked at the time of the collision. Do not select this
element for an involved party if any element “A” through “G” is applicable.
I. Sleepy/Fatigued - The involved party is not physically handicapped, but appears functionally
impaired. Also select if the party had fallen asleep prior to the collision. Do not use for
parked or unoccupied vehicles.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/377 SKETCH INSTRUCTIONS
A sketch shall be made for every report when a full diagram is not required (Traffic Manual 3/201).
A. When more detail or space is required, a large sketch may be drawn on the Factual
Diagram Page of CHP Form 555.
B. The sketch of the collision scene should be in proper proportion. The use of a diagram
template or straight edge is recommended to improve the clarity of the sketch.
1. Identify the compass direction "North" by placing an arrow in the circle located in
the upper right corner of the sketch box (North should be the top of the paper).
2. Identify all highways by official route number or name.
3. Identify all relevant elements of the collision scene, such as stop signs, fences,
trees, rock walls, etc.
4. Identify structures or objects involved in the collision, location of traffic control

devices, vision obscurement, and unusual or temporary conditions, such as
barricades in a repair zone.
5. Write parallel to the bottom of the page so that entries may be read horizontally.
C. To ensure uniformity in description and interpretation, the following basic symbols should be
used for a SKETCH only.
1. Vehicle (not parked) or bicycle
2. Pedestrian or animal
3. Train
4. Parked vehicle
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/377
D. Examples of the use of the symbols are shown below. The small circle identifies the AOI or
the POI.
1. Head-on
2. Head-on sideswipe
3. Rear end
4. Overtaking sideswipe
5. Broadside
6. Approach turn
7. Overtaking turn
8. Out of control spin out
9. Overturned (Maximum of 2 loops regardless number of

overturns)
10. Vehicle backing
E. Show all POI/AOI on the sketch. Where additional POI/AOI are

indicated, number them consecutively within each circle beginning with the initial POI.
Explain each POI in the narrative.
F. Identify paths of vehicles before POI/AOI by solid lines even though the vehicles may have
been moved prior to the officer's arrival. Place an arrowhead at each POI (small circle)
shown on the sketch. Number the solid lines as necessary to identify vehicles.
G. Identify paths of pedestrians or animals by dashed lines.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/378 MISCELLANEOUS
A. This space shall be used by officers to record their partner officer's name and serial
number.
B. This space shall be used to record the VIN number of a vehicle that does not have a license
plate.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/380 INJURED/WITNESS/PASSENGER PAGE, CHP 555 FORM SET
The information entered in this section identifies an injured party, witness or passenger. The term "injured"
refers to a person who has incurred any injury or complains of pain as a result of the collision. The term
"witness" refers to a non-injured, non-involved person. The term "passenger" refers to a vehicle occupant.
Witness are assigned sequentially numbers. When possible, list injured persons first in order of injury
severity.
3/381 PAGE NUMBER
The CHP INJURED/WITNESS/PASSENGER page shall be inserted immediately following the last
TRAFFIC COLLISION CODING page and numbered accordingly.
3/382 DATE OF COLLISION/TIME/NCIC NUMBER/OFFICER I.D./NUMBER
month, day, year, time, NCIC number, the employee's serial number and DR number as completed on the
first page of the original CHP Form 555. These categories are used to identify each Traffic Collision
Reported to SWITRS and shall be the same on every page of the report.
3/383 WITNESS ONLY/PASSENGER ONLY
Select the appropriate box if the person is a witness or uninjured passenger. A passenger, who could
provide witness testimony, should be listed as "Passenger Only." Include all passengers in each vehicle.
3/384 AGE
Enter age of party, passenger or witness. If age is estimated, indicate by entering a question mark after age
in the Age box.
3/385 SEX
Enter "M" for male or "F" for female.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/386 EXTENT OF INJURY (Party or Passenger)
Select the one box which best describes the condition of the injured party.
A. Fatal Injury - Dead at the time the collision report is prepared, or any injury resulting in death
within 30 days of the accident.
NOTE: The unborn fetus of a pregnant female involved in a traffic collision will be counted
as a fatal injury if the coroner attributes the death to the collision.
B. Severe Injury - Any serious, incapacitating injury which normally requires hospitalization,
other than for observation, and prevents the person from walking or driving. This includes
bone fractures, severe internal injury, unconscious, coma, dismemberment, etc.
C. Other Visible Injuries - Includes bruises, which are discolored or swollen places where the
body has received a blow (includes black eyes and bloody noses); and abrasions, which
are areas of the skin where the surface is roughened or broken by scratching or rubbing
(includes skinned shins, knuckles, knees and elbows). A little blood generally oozes from
abrasions.
D. Complaint of Pain - This classification may include any of the following:
1. Persons who seem dazed, confused, or incoherent (unless such behavior can be
attributed to intoxication, extreme age, illness, or mental infirmities).
2. Persons who are limping, but do not have visible injuries.
3. Any person who is known to have been unconscious as a result of the collision
although it appears he has recovered.
4. Any persons claiming an injury.
5. Verified internal or other nonvisible injuries.
6. Fraudulent claims of injury.
3/387 INJURED WAS
Select the appropriate classification of the injured party. If other is used, explain in the narrative.
3/388 PARTY NUMBER
Enter the number of the involved party with which the injured person or passenger is associated.
3/389 SEATING POSITION
Enter the numeric code for the seating position of each party and passenger. Select the seating position
numeric code from the "Seating Position" legend on page 2 of the CHP 555 Form Set (Traffic Manual
3/359).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/390 AIRBAG / SAFETY EQUIPMENT
Enter the appropriate alpha code from the "Safety Equipment" legend on page 2 of the CHP 555 Form Set
that best describes the condition of any airbag and safety equipment for each party and passenger seated
in the vehicle (Traffic Manual 3/360). Mention additional equipment in the narrative.
3/391 EJECTED
Enter the numeric code for the ejected box of each party or passenger(s). Select the appropriate alpha code
from the "Ejected" legend on page 2 of the CHP 555 Form Set (Traffic Manual 3/361).
NOTE: Age, Sex, Extent of Injury, Injured Was, Party Number, Seating Position, Safety
Equipment and Ejected boxes are mandatory and shall be completed for all parties
and passengers. The seating position, safety equipment and ejected boxes will be
left blank for pedestrians.
3/392 NAME/DOB/ADDRESS/TELEPHONE
A. Enter the injured person's full name, first name first. Entries such as "Driver No. 1" or
"Pedestrian No. 3" are acceptable if the injured party is on the face page.
B. Date of birth, self explanatory.
C. Address with ZIP Code, home and business phone numbers with area codes.
NOTE: If the witness or passenger is not available by phone, enter "no phone."
3/393 TRANSPORTED BY/TAKEN TO (Injured only)
Enter the name of the ambulance service or party who transported the injured person. Also enter the name
of the doctor and/or hospital, including the city and state, where the injured party was transported. If the
person will seek their own aid, enter the applicable information.
EXAMPLES:
A. Seek own aid
B. Own transportation. Will see Dr. Smith, Palo Alto, CA.
C. LAFD RA35 Jones #J1234 & Smith #S5678 transported to Los Angeles County Medical
Center, Los Angeles, CA.
NOTE: On "Late-Reported" collisions, where injuries are claimed, the officer shall
ascertain if medical treatment was received and enter the name of the doctor
and/or hospital, including the city and state, where the injured person received
treatment or "No Medical Treatment," as applicable (Traffic Manual 3/201).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/394 DESCRIBE INJURIES
A. Briefly describe the type of injury sustained by the person. Include the hospital’s patient
number and by whom treated. If a traffic felony occurs, be specific (number of sutures).
B. If the person dies, include date and time that death was pronounced, where, by whom, and
the coroner's case number.
C. Describe known or suspected injuries to uninvolved persons resulting from

exposure/contamination to or by a hazardous substance and how exposed (inhalation, skin
contact, etc.). Do not include these injuries in the number injured count and do not complete
"Extent of Injury."
3/395 VICTIM OF VIOLENT CRIME NOTIFIED
When a Victim of violent crime is notified and a LAPD form 03.17.0 (Victim's Report Memo) is issued, enter
an "X" in the appropriate box.
NOTE: A form 03.17.0 shall be given to all victim's of violent crime. The term "Victim of
Violent Crime" means any death of injury resulting from the operation of a motor
vehicle, when such death or injury is sustained by another as a result of a driver
in violation of 20001 VC, 23152 VC or 23153 VC (Department Manual
4/203.35).
3/396 PREPARER'S NAME/I.D. NUMBER/MONTH, DAY, YEAR
Enter the name and serial number of the officer that completed this page of the report, also the month, day
and year it was completed.
NOTE: The name, serial number and date on the bottom of each page should reflect the
officer that completed that page, this information need not be the same on each
page.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/398 FACTUAL DIAGRAM PAGE, CHP 555 FORM SET
3/399 FACTUAL DIAGRAM PAGE
This page is used to complete POI/AOI diagrams. Officers may complete a factual diagram(s) in addition to
a POI/AOI diagram when they deem necessary in order to clarify physical evidence.
A. A collision diagram is required on all Class I Traffic Collision Reports (Department Traffic
Manual 3/202).
B. DATE OF ORIGINAL INCIDENT, TIME, NCIC NUMBER, OFFICER I.D. Complete each of
the boxes on this line with the appropriate information.
C. Enter the report DR number.
D. On full page diagram, the diagram is to be made to scale or as close to scale as possible.
E. The standard scale used by the Department is “one inch equals 20 feet (1”=20”). A scale
bar shall be included in the diagram body depicting this scale. If the diagram is not drawn
to scale, place the notation “Not To Scale” in the diagram body.
F. Whenever a Traffic Collision Report is made at an Area desk, make the diagram as
accurate as possible with the aid of a map and information obtained from the reporting
party.
G. The following information shall be shown on the diagram:
1. Names of the primary and secondary streets
2. Street widths
3. Each vehicle at each POI/AOI
4. Each vehicle's direction of travel
5. Location of all traffic controls
6. Sidewalks that establish unmarked crosswalks
7. Vision obscurement - blind intersections, construction zones, etc.
8. Depict the scale used with a scale bar
NOTE: The light blue grid lines on this page will not reproduce when photocopied.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/399
H. Preparer's name/I.D. number/month, day, year
Enter the name and serial number of the officer that completed this page of the report, also
the month, day and year it was completed.
officer that completed that page; this information need not be the same on each
page.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/400 NARRATIVE/SUPPLEMENTAL, CHP FORM 556
The Narrative/Supplemental, CHP Form 556, is a dual purpose form. When the CHP Form 556 is used as a
narrative is shall be numbered as a page of the original Traffic Collision Report. This form may also be used
as a supplemental.
3/410 CHP FORM 556, NARRATIVE
The CHP Form 556 Narrative is used to record the findings of fact resulting from the investigation. It
includes the information gathered at the scene of a traffic collision and reflects the officer's investigative
ability. Factual information is entered in a logical sequence.
NOTE: Opinions of officers, other than those opinions pertaining to primary cause and
sobriety, shall not be included.
THE MOST IMPORTANT ELEMENT OF A TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORT IS THE AT-SCENE

INVESTIGATION.
3/413 PAGE NUMBER
The CHP Form 556 Narrative shall be numbered as a page of the report.
3/414 DATE OF ORIGINAL COLLISION/TIME/NCIC NUMBER/OFFICER I.D.
3/415 NUMBER
Enter the original report DR number.
3/416 "X" ONE
A. "X" the Narrative box to indicate the CHP Form 556 is being used as a narrative.
B. "X" the Collision Report box to indicate this is a narrative to a traffic collision.
3/417 TYPE OF SUPPLEMENTAL
Leave these boxes blank when being used as a narrative.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/418 CITY/COUNTY/JUDICIAL DISTRICT
Optional, when using as a Narrative report.
3/419 REPORTING DISTRICT/BEAT
3/420 CITATION NUMBER
3/421 LOCATION/SUBJECT
3/424 PROPERTY DAMAGE
Include any additional property damaged that is not listed on page 2 of the CHP 555 Form Set.
3/425 REQUIRED HEADINGS FOR CLASS I INVESTIGATIONS
The minimum information required on CHP F orm 556 Narrative for Class I investigations shall include but is
not limited to, the following headings:
A. Collision Summary
B. Areas of Impact
C. Upon Arrival
D. Traffic Controls
E. Physical Evidence
F. Lighting
G. Photographs
H. Injuries
I. Remarks
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/425
J. Interview Summary
K. Arrest and Filing.
NOTE: Additional heading may be used to document other pertinent information (Roadway
Configuration, Vehicles, Additional, etc.).
3/427 COLLISION SUMMARY
A. The collision summary is a word picture of the traffic collision and must depict all of the
occurrences and points of impact in the traffic collision.
B. When an investigation is not conducted at the scene, the collision summary shall be
prefaced by a statement as to where the report was taken.
EXAMPLE: "All information in this report was obtained from Party #2 at 77th Street desk."
C. The collision summary shall include all of the following:
1. Party/vehicle number(s) and other property
2. Directions of travel
3. Names of the streets
4. Lane numbers for lanes involved
5. All points or areas of impact
6. Action of each party after the initial POI/AOI
D. Officers SHALL use the word "COLLIDED."
3/428 POINTS/AREAS OF IMPACT (POI/AOI)
Indicate all points/areas of impact including the original POI/AOI.
A. Indicate what quadrant all measurements were taken from.
B. Indicate how each point/area of impact was established and substantiated (measured,
paced or estimated).
C. All points/areas of impact shall be taken from the same quadrant whenever practicable.
When this is not possible, document which quadrant was used for each measurement.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/428
D. When using other that the quadrant method for scene measurements indicate which
measuring technique was utilized.
EXAMPLE: POI #2 between V-1 and V-3 was 14' N/S of Temple Street and 16' E/W of Main
Street.
3/429 UPON ARRIVAL
A. Every Traffic Collision Report SHALL include the time that the officers received the call and
the time the officer's arrival to the scene.
B. Document the "at rest" positions of all vehicles and the locations of parties, passengers and
witnesses on any Class I investigation.
3/430 TRAFFIC CONTROLS
Indicate the description, location, condition, and visibility of all signals, signs, or roadway markings involved.
If the collision occurs in an intersection, a brief notation of the controls present should be made regardless
of involvement. If the controls are damaged from the collision, indicate who was notified and who made the
notification.
A. Tri-light Signals - Indicate whether properly operating, extended mast arm, upright, 3 -phase,
4-phase, 8-phase, etc., green arrows, trip plate actuated, traffic sensor actuated, and
whether signals were clearly visible.
1. If it appears that a party has failed to obey the signal, describe the signal phasing.
2. The signal should be timed as soon after arrival at the scene as possible in order to
obtain, as near as possible, the timing that was in effect at the time of the traffic
collision. Note the time the phasing was obtained. Do not use timing from the
control sheet inside the control box.
3. Types of Signal Phasing:
a. Fixed timed or standard on a 50-second through 90-second cycle.
b. Traffic sensor actuated - signal goes through a cycle when vehicles drive
over the sensor. This type will almost always be in conjunction with offset
left-turn lane green arrows, but in some instances the traffic signal loops
will control all signals at an intersection.
Type of phasing may be verified by calling Traffic Control Records,

extension 52257 (0745 hours to 1615 hours).
c. Include the time the phasing was obtained.
4. Note location and condition of limit lines or crosswalk.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/430
B. Boulevard Stop Signs - State if standard, erect, in good order, and if clearly visible to
approaching vehicles. If a probable violation is indicated, give the exact location of the
sign, using the coordinate method. Establish the legal stopping point by noting a marked
crosswalk and/or limit line.
C. Posted Signs - In collisions involving a violation of a posted sign, including speed posting,
officers should record the description, location, and visibility of the sign. Portable signs
mounted on standards should be documented in the same manner.
D. Marking - Describe existing markings on the roadway in collisions involving turning

movements at intersections ("Left Turn Only" or "Right Turn Only"). Include the location of
the applicable marking, the condition of the paint, the color, and visibility.
E. Painted Lines - Give the types of line(s), single or double, solid or broken, width, condition
of paint, the color, location, and visibility.
F. Traffic Lane Designation - When reporting an incident in which traffic lanes are a factor, the
following procedure shall be used for traffic lane designations:
1. Traffic lanes shall be numbered consecutively from left to right for each direction of
travel.
2. The direction of travel shall be indicated by the appropriate abbreviation ("N," "S,"
"E," or "W").
3. When an offset lane is provided in the center of a street or roadway for a left turn
only, that lane shall be designated the "offset left-turn lane," and the lane to its right
shall be lane #1.
G. Center Separations and Left-Turn Lanes - When a street or roadway has an area in the
center bounded on both sides by curbs or double lines, that area shall be designated the
"divider strip." Broken lines denote two-way left-turn center lanes.
H. Crosswalks - Crosswalk information shall be included in all collisions involving pedestrians

or if the crosswalk line is necessary to establish location of required stopping, include
location, condition of the paint, and width of the crosswalk. If the crosswalk is not painted
(unmarked crosswalk):
1. Include width of sidewalk from property line to roadway edge (Traffic Manual 3/106
and 3/124).
2. Include width of parkway, if applicable.
3. Indicate distance of any offset in the prolongation of sidewalk.
4. Indicate on the diagram the exact shape of the corners involved.
5. Show any objects blocking the path of crosswalks.
a. Parked vehicles (common at "T" intersection)
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/430
b. Excavation or repair
6. Include angles of intersecting streets
7. Attempt to determine the exact location of a pedestrian in or near an unmarked

crosswalk from statements and physical evidence.
3/431 PHYSICAL EVIDENCE
This heading is designated for documentation of ALL physical evidence including tire marks and items
removed and booked into property. Include where evidence was found, who recovered the evidence, who
booked the evidence and where evidence was booked.
Enter a description of the physical evidence such as tire marks or gouge marks left by each vehicle prior to
the point of impact, and any tire marks and/or scrub marks after impact, up to the at rest position(s). Also
document debris patterns, location of pedestrian clothing, etc. If there were no tire marks, give a brief
statement to that effect. The following information should help the officer in recognition and use of tire marks:
A. Measure and describe tire marks exactly as they appear. If unable to measure, indicate the
method used to determine their length (paced, estimated).
B. Have the driver of the concerned vehicle identify his tire marks and, if possible, have other
parties and witnesses identify them.
C. If tire marks are present, take photographs.
D. Tire marks are formed in four basic types (Traffic Manual 3/1600):
1. Impending - Light gray to black, made before wheels lock.
2. Locked - Black, made after wheels lock.
3. Scrub - Gray to black, occur after impact, good for locating the POI.
4. Yaw (Centrifugal) - An arching tire mark that is black on the outside to gray on the
inside.
3/432 LIGHTING
A. Describe the type of lighting at the time of the investigation, Daylight or Artificial.
B. If artificial lighting, describe the source and location:
1. Number of lamps (single globe, double globe, triple globe, etc.)
2. Type of standard (upright, overhanging)
3. Location
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/432
4. Indicate whether the lighting was working order or not in working order at time of
investigation. DO NOT give an opinion as to condition (fair, poor, etc.).
C. Do not use abbreviations ("SGOHMVLS") to describe lighting.
EXAMPLES:
1. DAYLIGHT
a. Daylight, clear
b. Daylight, overcast
2. ARTIFICIAL LIGHT
a. The roadway was illuminated by single globe lamp standards, the closest
located 20 feet N/W of POI.
b. The roadway was illuminated by lighting supplied from private property

(store front, parking lot) located 45 feet south of POI # 2.
c. There was no artificial lighting in the area of the collision. The nearest
lighting was 400 feet north of PI and consisted of an overhanging single
globe lamp standard.
3/433 PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photos should be taken to depict damage or lack of damage.
B. Officers shall take photographs in the following cases:
1. In all fatal and near-fatal collisions
2. When City property is involved
3. In felony hit and run collisions
4. When evidence may disappear before a follow-up investigation
NOTE: When a unit that is not equipped with a camera has one of the above types of
collisions, a traffic collision investigation unit with a camera shall be requested:
5. When photos would be of evidential value.
6. When photos would be of value for education. If photos are taken for educational
value, notify the Traffic Safety Unit, TCS, of the DR number and the reason the
photo has educational value.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/433
C. Indicate the total number of photographs or rolls of film exposed and a brief description of
what was documented.
EXAMPLE: Officer Smith, Serial No. 11111, exposed two rolls of 24 exposure film depicting
the identity of and damage to V-1 and V-2/.
D. In all cases where photos are taken, complete a Field Photographic Service Request, Form
15.44, and include the control number in the Traffic Collision Report.
3/434 INJURIES
This heading is only required when the medical information exceeds the space provided on the
"Injured/Witness/Passenger" page (Traffic Manual 3/113).
3/435 REMARKS
The "Remarks" section is designed for any additional investigative information not contained in a specific
portion of the report. It should contain all additional information pertinent to the investigation.
The following information is to be included in the "Remarks" section of the CHP Form 556 when appropriate:
A. Condition of parties - Examine parties for conditions which might impair driving, such as
alcohol or drug intoxication or any physical defects. Include any physical evidence and/or
tests which might substantiate initial observations.
1. Record the type of examination given, including the result, time, location, and by
whom given.
2. Explain any action taken and conclusions regarding intoxication.
3. When there is a possibility of a traffic felony, a supervisor shall be consulted and

apprised of the facts.
NOTE: The elements of the offense are to be established independent of a

separate arrest report.
B. Condition of vehicles
1. Check all vehicles for a possible unsafe condition or load, and include the following
information on the CHP Form 556.
2. Give the details of any faulty condition observed. Equipment should be inspected
to determine whether it was in use or activated at the time of the traffic collision.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/435
C. Pertinent physical features at the scene - Describe on the CHP Form 556 any feature which
may have had an influence on the collision.
EXAMPLES:
1. Prima facie speed limit. Document the existing conditions at or near the scene that
determine the speed zone.
a. If posted, include the posting and its location.
b. If a blind intersection, establish by measurement as set forth in 22352(a)(2)

VC.
c. If not posted, establish as a business district or residential district as set

forth in 22352(b)(1) VC.
2. Excavations - If a factor, include description and contractor, if known.
3. Road surfaces - if contaminated, include contaminant.
4. Upgrades and/or downgrades - include percentages.
5. Any obscured traffic control devices, BO signals, faded paint, or any engineering
defect should be documented.
NOTE: Document action taken to alleviate hazards created by a traffic collision,

including the unit or person handling.
D. License violation information - (vehicle or driver's license) - Document on the CHP Form
556 the elements of the violation.
E. Hit and run information - When an investigation substantiates a violation of hit and run,
document the elements of the violation on the CHP Form 556. Include all pertinent
information concerning the hit and run vehicle and/or driver on the Los Angeles Municipal
Form, unless driver has been positively identified and is listed as a party on CHP 555
Form Set.
NOTE: Do not place information obtained via DMV on the Los Angeles Municipal
Supplement.
F. Additional pertinent information - Include on the CHP Form 556 any additional information
or any explanations that would be pertinent to the investigation.
1. Temporary Address - When investigation discloses that a party or witness will be in

the City temporarily, record the time available here and the temporary and
permanent addresses.
2. Questionable Witness - When a witness's statement is impaired by prejudice,

factually explain the impairment or describe the actions or statements that
indicated prejudice, without including any opinion by the officer(s).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/435
G. Identity of advising supervisor - Indicate on the CHP Form 556 the name, serial number,
and division of assignment of any supervisor making recommendations regarding
investigation or arrest.
H. Follow-up investigation - Show on the CHP Form 556 any further information obtained other
than at the scene of the traffic collision. If a follow-up investigation is conducted, document
the results under "Remarks."
I. Notifications -List any notification made to any additional agencies or departments.
J. Photo Red Light intersection - Document that the intersection is equipped with an
automated photo enforcement camera. If a personal service citation has been issued at the
scene, offier shall document the citation number and CVC section cited in the “Remarks”
section of the traffic collision report.
3/436 INTERVIEW SUMMARY (Statements)
A. Verbatim statements shall be taken in collisions involving:
1. Fatal Injury
2. Severe injury likely to cause death.
3. Traffic felonies
4. City liability
5. Filing requests
NOTE: Verbatim statements shall be in quotations with the interviewing officer's

initials following the statement.
B. The greatest source of information in collision investigation is found in the statements of

parties and witnesses. The most important phase of the investigation is the obtaining of
complete and accurate statements which will aid the numerous agencies that will process
and utilize these reports.
C. A witness statement obtained prior to the completion of the Traffic Collision Report should
be included in the narrative section, on a CHP Form 556 and numbered as a page of the
report.
NOTE: The CHP Form 556 Supplemental should be completed by the officer not the
Party, Passenger or Witness.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/436
D. A complete word picture should be obtained from each party and witness, establishing the
point of earliest knowledge of pertinent detail and continuing with a full account of the action
witnessed. Whenever possible, the knowledge to be obtained should include the action of
the parties:
1. BEFORE the collision developed.
2. DURING the development, consisting usually of the start of the hazard period up to
and including the collision.
3. AFTER the collision, describing the action to the point of rest and any further
observations such as hit and run, sobriety of parties.
4. Each party involved in a collision must be specifically identified by the other parties
and witnesses as the particular participant. Inquiry must then be made as to the
elements concerned in the collision. The statements should include lack of
knowledge as well as knowledge.
a. Any discrepancies in statements between parties or witnesses and any

variance from the facts indicated by physical evidence must be covered
specifically in the statements. Any reason or alibi offered for the cause of
the collision must be covered by statements and a study of the evidence.
Confronting a driver with physical evidence may lead to an admission.
b. The investigation is conducted with the various sections of the Vehicle

Code in mind. The statements should specifically cover the elements of
the concerned violation, both positive and/or negative observations or
knowledge.
c. Parties, passengers and witnesses should be interviewed separately in

order to obtain their independent knowledge of the facts pertinent to the
investigation.
E. List all parties, passengers and witnesses indicated on CHP Form 555.
1. Enter only the party number (P-1) of hit and run parties who are not interviewed (P-1
GOA).
2. Parties and witnesses are listed by party/witness number, last name, and first
name, if necessary.
3. Passengers are listed by last name, first name and vehicle they were associated
with ( Jones, Bill V-1).
4. Officers may paraphrase statements if the requirements for verbatim statements do

not apply (Traffic Manual 3/436 A).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/436
F. Statements of a suspect.
1. When the interview of a suspect is conducted statements should be recorded

2. If an arrest is made, the investigating officer should request another unit to transport
the suspect to the station. The transporting officers should be advised of whether
the suspect has been admonished. They should not question the suspect. Should
the suspect make any voluntary statements, the transporting officer(s) shall
document the statements and shall be listed as witnesses on the Traffic Collision
Report.
G. Statement Verification
Officers shall repeat the statement in a brief organized form to the person interviewed and
inform him that it will be recorded on the Traffic Collision Report as stated. It is the officer's
responsibility to determine that the person agrees with the facts as stated and understands
the terminology used.
H. Statements should answer the questions:
1. Who, What, Why, Where, When, How
2. Do not exclude statements of children because of their age. Their statements

often cover information that would otherwise be overlooked.
3. Statements which are obtained by telephone should be so indicated.
4. When the capacity of a single CHP Form 556 is inadequate, additional CHP Form
556 sheets are to be used.
5. When common carriers or buses are involved and several passengers are aboard
but not injured, it is not necessary to include their statements unless some pertinent
information can be obtained.
3/437 ARREST
The arrest heading shall be used on combined traffic collision and arrest reports and on Unbooked DUI's.
The arrest narrative shall be in the arrest report format and the Form 5.02.05 shall also be included if
required.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/438 FILING REQUESTS
Use this heading when the investigation reveals the need to file on a party or passenger for a VC violation.
All filing requests must be substantiated by statements and/or physical evidence.
A. If the investigation reveals a violation and the violator was not arrested, request a filing for
the violation in this section.
B. List the name of the violator, party, witness or passenger, the violation(s), and the name,
party, witness or passenger, of whoever can testify to the violation.
NOTE: A verbatim statement must be included in the Traffic Collision Report. That
statement must establish the identity of the violator and substantiate the violation.
C. Filing on an Unbooked DUI driver requires the completion of a Driving Under-The-Influence

arrest narrative and Form 5.02.05, with SFST and chemical test admonition completed.
The narrative must be in Arrest Report format.
EXCEPTION: Under the "Booking" section of the report state: "Not booked due to extent of
injuries (describe injuries) and released at hospital for further medical treatment on
advice of Sergeant , Bureau Traffic Division Watch Commander. Request
filing for 23152(a) VC (Misdemeanor DUI) or 23153(a) VC (Felony DUI).”
D. When a speed filing is based on pre-impact tire marks, include a Skid - Speed Chart, CHP
Form 185, or calculations on a supplemental CHP Form 556.
E. All filing requests require two copies of a DMV driver's license printout, which shall be
attached to the report.
3/440 PREPARER'S NAME/I.D. NUMBER/MONTH, DAY, YEAR
Enter the name and serial number of the officer that completed this page of the report, also the month, day
and year it was completed.
officer that completed that page, this information need not be the same on each
page.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/441 REQUIRED NARRATIVE FOR CLASS II INVESTIGATIONS
A. The minimum information required on CHP Form 556 Narrative for Class II investigations
shall include:
1. A condensed collision summary
EXAMPLE: V-1, N/B - 2 collided with V-2, E/B - 1.
2. Area(s) of impact measurements
3. A remarks heading to cover the following information:
a. 4.37 information exchanged
b. The incident number
c. The time the call was received
d. The time the officer arrived at the scene
e. Any misdemeanor arrest information including the elements of the crime,

the booking location and booking number of the suspect, and the type and
location booked for any evidence obtained.
3. Controls present
4. Statements
B. The pre-printed, “fill-in-the-blank” narrative forms may also be used when completing a
Class II investigation (Traffic Manual 3/442).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/442 PRE-PRINTED CLASS II NARRATIVE FORM
The pre-printed, “fill-in-the-blank” narrative forms may also be used when completing a Class II investigation.
This narrative is designed to enable officers to quickly and thoroughly report the information required in a
Class II narrative.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/442
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/443 NO AT-SCENE INVESTIGATION
Check this box, enter the party reporting and the location reported when there is no at-scene investigation.
3/444 COLLISION SUMMARY
Enter a condensed summary of the collision in the spaces provided. ALL areas of impact must still be
described. (Department Traffic Manual 3/427-A).
3/445 AREAS OF IMPACT
Fill in the location of the areas of impact in relation to the nearest curb lines. This form provides blanks for
up to two areas of impact. Additional areas of impact shall be documented in the “Additional” section
provided on page 2 of the narrative forms. Indicate how the AOI’s were determined by checking the
appropriate box.
3/446 UPON ARRIVAL (AT SCENE INVESTIGATIONS)
When completing an at-scene investigation, check the box if flagged down, or if a radio call, document the
time the call was received and the time of arrival. Always document the full ten digit incident number.
3/447 CONTROLS
A. If controls were not a factor in the collision, check the appropriate box.
B. If a factor in the collision, select the controls present at the collision scene. Controls
described on the form are:
1. Tri-light signals - Document condition
2. Stop signs - Document condition and visibility
3. Lane Markings - Describe markings in the space provided
C. If other controls are present and a factor in the collision (crosswalks, other signs, etc.),
check the other box and describe the controls in the space provided.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/448 PHYSICAL EVIDENCE
A. If no physical evidence is present, check the appropriate box.
B. If physical evidence is present, describe the type of evidence and give a brief description of
the location of the evidence in the space provided.
EXAMPLE: V-1 laid down approximately 40 feet of four wheel locked tire marks in the
E/B -2 lane, terminating at the AOI.
3/449 REMARKS
A. Indicate 4.37 information exchange. The “Yes” box should always be checked unless
unusual circumstances were present that prevented the exchange. These circumstances
shall be explained in the “Additional” portion of the narrative.
B. Check the appropriate crime element when applicable.
C. Document any claims of mechanical failure made by parties involved.
3/450 STATEMENTS
Record paraphrased statements of the parties or witnesses involved.
3/451 ADDITIONAL
Record any information pertinent to the investigation that either did not fit in another section of the report, or
was not covered in a previous section of the report. This could include:
A. Additional AOI’s
B. Additional property damaged
C. Additional evidence
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/452 CHP FORM 556, SUPPLEMENTAL
The CHP Form 556 shall be completed as a "Supplemental" when any of the following apply:
A. A Department employee is involved in a CPI collision as a party, passenger or witness

B. An officer obtains a statement from a hit and run driver.
The officer shall, when possible, record the statement of a hit and run driver on a Form 556
supplemental followed by his signature, including identification information, if not listed on a
CHP Form 555 face page. This signed statement shall be obtained if the suspect admits
or denies driving.
C. An officer interviews a private person who has additional information of a previously

reported traffic collision. When a CHP Form 556 Supplemental is used for the purpose of
recording the statement of a party, passenger or witness, all pertinent identification
information shall be included.
D. An officer obtaining a statement from a party, passenger or witness involved in a traffic

collision where a traffic collision report would not normally be made. When a CHP Form
556 Supplemental is used for the purpose of recording this statement, officers shall include
all pertinent identification information.
E. An officer obtains evidence relative to a traffic collision which is written on a piece of paper.
1. The officer shall cause the presenting person sign and date the paper to
preserve the chain of evidence. This applies whether the presenter personally
wrote the evidence or not.
2. The paper shall be attached to a CHP Form 556 Supplemental.
3. A DMV printout shall be attached to the collision report. The DMV printout shall not
be numbered as a page of the report and shall not be forwarded to R & I Division.
F. As a cover sheet when an administrative report is completed.
G. An officer making corrections to a Traffic Collision Report after it has been distributed.
When making a correction, list the error, then the correction ("V-1 N/B should read V-1
S/B").
inside or outside the Department, to ANY entity including the City Attorney, District
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/452
H. An officer assigned a follow-up investigation of a traffic collision, except when the

information is contained within a Status Report, Form 4.16.
I. An officer calculating a vehicle's speed mathematically without the use of a speed skid
chart, or an officer completing an accident reconstruction for a D ivisional Traffic Detective.
3/455 PAGE NUMBER
The CHP Form 556 Supplement, is never numbered as a page of the original Traffic Collision Report. Each
CHP Form 556 Supplemental shall be numbered separately and signed by a supervisor.
3/457 NUMBER
3/458 "X" ONE
A. "X" the Supplemental box to indicate the CHP Form 556 is being used as a supplement.
B. "X" the Collision Report box to indicate this is a supplement to a traffic collision.
3/459 TYPE OF SUPPLEMENTAL
Select one or more boxes to identify the content of the supplemental.
3/460 CITY/COUNTY/JUDICIAL DISTRICT
Enter the city, county and judicial district in the same format as on the original Traffic Collision Report.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/461 REPORTING DISTRICT/BEAT
Enter the correct four digit number of the RD (0729, 1259, etc.).
Optional
3/463 LOCATION/SUBJECT
Enter the primary location as completed on the face page of the original CHP 555 Form set.
Select the appropriate box to indicate whether or not the collision occurred on or was "associated with" a
state highway.
3/465 PREPARER'S NAME AND I.D. NUMBER/DATE
Enter the name and serial number of the officer who completed the supplemental and the date of completion.
3/466 REVIEWER'S NAME AND I.D. NUMBER/DATE
Prior to signing their name and serial number in the reviewer's box the supervisor SHALL ensure the report
is read for propriety, essential information, clarity and legibility.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/500 LOS ANGELES MUNICIPAL SUPPLEMENT
The Los Angeles Municipal Supplement is intended to be used by officers as a supplement to the CHP 555
Form set and CHP Form 555-03. This additional information is needed by the Traffic Division Detectives in
presenting cases for prosecution. Officers shall include the supplemental when the investigation meets any
one of the following criteria:
A. A traffic collision involving a juvenile party; or passenger/witness subject to filing.
B. A traffic collision where a party, passenger or witness is booked.
C. A traffic collision involving a DUI investigation.
D. A traffic collision involving a hit and run.
3/501 PAGE NUMBER
The Los Angeles Municipal Supplement is to be inserted as the last page of the collision report and
numbered accordingly.
3/502 DATE/TIME/NCIC NUMBER/OFFICER I.D./DR NUMBER
Complete each of the boxes on this line with the appropriate information.
NOTE: Date, Time, NCIC Number, and Officer I.D. (employee serial number) and DR
number shall be completed in the same way on the top of each page of the Traffic
Collision Report, as they comprise the four fields which identify each collision
report in the SWITRS computer files.
3/503 JUVENILES INVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISION
The following information is required for each juvenile party and each juvenile subject to filing:
A. Full names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the natural mother and father, even if
divorced. If deceased, give name and enter "deceased" for address; OR
B. Name, address, and telephone number of a stepmother or stepfather; OR
C. Name, address, and telephone number of a legal guardian, in cases where the court has
granted custody.
D. Name, address, and telephone number of person with whom the juvenile is presently living;
OR
E. If married, the name, address, and telephone number of the juvenile's spouse, regardless of
the spouse's age.
F. Juvenile's date of birth
G. School and last grade attended
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/504 BOOKING INFORMATION
A. If a party, passenger or witness is arrested for any offense enter the party, passenger or
witness number, charge, booking number, and location booked.
B. If more than one charge, indicate only the most serious.
C. If more then two parties, passengers or witnesses are arrested, list all others under
"Remarks" section.
3/505 DUI
A. Driving established by:
1. Indicate the method(s) used to establish driving.
2. 40300.5 VC is authority to arrest a 23152 VC violator when driving is established

by circumstantial evidence.
B. Opinion of sobriety
1. Enter the party number of the DUI violator.
2. Mark the appropriate box to indicate your opinion of sobriety.
C. Chemical Tests
1. Breath Test - Indicate the serial number of the officer administering the test, the
location where the test was given, the time observed from, the time of the first
sample, the Breath Testing Device number, and the readings.
2. Blood Test - Indicate who drew the blood and the time it was drawn. This person
shall be listed as a witness on the Injured/Witness/Passenger page.
3. Urine Test - Indicate the time bladder was first voided and the time the sample was
taken. Time period must be a minimum of 20 minutes.
3/506 SUSPECT DESCRIPTION
A. The first column is for hit and run suspect number. If there is more than one hit and run
suspect or more than one description, enter the appropriate suspect number. The
additional spaces are to be used if there are any conflicting descriptions or in cases of
multiple hit and run suspects.
B. The "Described By" column is for a listing of who gave the description. Enter the
appropriate party, passenger or witness.
C. Physical description is self-explanatory (Traffic Manual 3/332 for proper descent

abbreviations).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/506
D. The last column is for listing any outstanding characteristics that would assist in identifying
the suspect (missing front teeth, full beard, etc.).
NOTE: If the suspect is positively identified, put the suspect information in the party
information box on the CHP Form 555 and show "In Custody" on the Los Angeles
Municipal Supplement (Traffic Manual 3/324(c)).
3/507 HIT AND RUN VEHICLE DESCRIPTION
This portion of the Los Angeles Municipal Supplement is important to the Traffic Detectives as a tool to
relate damages to the vehicles involved. The detective uses the information
when inspecting a suspect vehicle to positively identify or eliminate that vehicle.
A. The first column is for hit and run vehicle number. If there is more than one hit and run
vehicle or description, enter the appropriate vehicle number. The additional spaces are to
be used if there are any conflicting descriptions or in cases of multiple hit and run suspects.
B. The second column is for a listing of who gave the description. Enter the appropriate party
or witness number.
C. Description is self-explanatory.
NOTE: Under "Outstanding Characteristics unknown state," put license plate colors in the
box. Put the color of the letters and numbers in the first space.
D. The additional spaces are to be used if there are any conflicting descriptions or in cases of
multiple hit and run suspects.
E. If the hit and run vehicle is positively identified or is in custody, put vehicle information on the
CHP Form 555 and show "In Custody" on the Los Angeles Municipal Supplement (Traffic
Manual 3/324).
F. The first box is for V-1 only. The second and third boxes may be used to relate damages
sustained by the vehicle(s) of the victim(s).
1. "Vehicle inspected by investigating officer," "ignition punched," "keys in vehicle,"

mark the appropriate boxes.
2. "Indicate the exact location o f damage.” Indicate the height above ground level and
length of the visible damage in inches.
3. "Extent of damage" Mark the most appropriate box to indicate paint transfer only;
dent, crease, etc., smashed fender, etc.
G. Immediately below the vehicle damage boxes, create a word picture relating the damage
related to, or as observed by the investigating officer. Show that there was sufficient
damage to indicate that P-1 should have had knowledge that a collision occurred.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/508 PREPARER'S NAME AND I.D. NUMBER/DATE
Enter the name and serial number of the officer completing the Municipal Supplement and the date of
completion.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/600 PROPERTY DAMAGE ONLY REPORT, CHP FORM 555-03
3/601 PDO REQUIREMENTS
A. Traffic Collision Report PDO, CHP Form 555-03, may be completed at scene, at a station
desk, or telephonically for any number of parties involved when:
1. No unusual circumstances exist, AND
2. There is property damage only.
NOTE: Contact with City-owned property where the damage to the City-owned property is
minor (not likely to be repaired) does not require a report unless other reporting
criteria apply. Officers shall continue to make notification to the proper City entity
(Department Traffic Manual 3/706).
EXAMPLE: Two vehicles collide in an intersection. One of the vehicles continues and collides
with a curb, causing minor damage to the curb and rim damage to the vehicle.
Because the damage to the City-owned curb is minor, and there is no possibility of
City liability, no report is required providing no other reporting criteria apply.
3. If the collision is a misdemeanor hit and run:
a. The person reporting (PR) is the party involved, registered owner, lessee,
property owner, or person responsible for the property; AND
b. There is no anticipated prosecution or possibility of follow-up.
NOTE: Follow up is defined as a complete license number, named

suspect or distinctly marked vehicle.
B. A Municipal Supplement shall be included when any of the appropriate criteria apply.
C. Traffic Collision Reports should be completed and submitted for approval prior to the
investigating officer’s EOW. All collision reports SHALL be turned in at EOW, whether
D. Collisions which do not meet the above criteria shall be documented on a standard collision
report, CHP 555 Form Set.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/602 PDO FORMAT
A. The PDO form is a three page report on pressure-sensitive paper.
B. The first, or original page is two-sided and becomes the Department's copy. The face
page contains location, party, witness, and registered owner information; sketch, narrative
and miscellaneous boxes; and collision analysis data.
C. The reverse side SHALL be used by the reporting officer to record additional narrative
information.
D. The carbon copies should be given or mailed to the involved party.
3/603 COMPLETING THE PDO FORM
See Volume 3/300 for completion instructions of items on the form. In addition, the following items are
included on the form.
A. Witness/Registered Owner (R/O) - Mark an "X" in the appropriate box to indicate either a
Witness or an R/O.
1. When the witness box is checked, leave the Party Number box blank.
2. When the R/O box is checked, leave Age and Sex boxes blank. Enter the
applicable party number with the R/O information. If the party and the R/O are the
same, enter "Same."
3. Passenger information shall be entered in the report narrative.
4. Additional witness information shall be entered in the report narrative.
B. Narrative - The narrative account of the collision should follow the report narrative format
(Traffic Manual 3/441) and be documented on the back of page one, or the optional pre-
printed Class II narrative form may be completed.
C. Municipal Supplement - The Municipal Supplement shall be completed and attached when
a hit and run or a juvenile party is involved.
D. Photo Red Light Intersection - The PDO report shall be completed up to, but not including
the coding section of the report. The words “NO REPORT TAKEN, 4.37 EXCHANGE FOR
ALL INVOLVED PARTIES” shall be written in the diagram portion and “PRL I/S” shall be
written in red ink in the “Special Conditions” box in the upper left hand corner of the CHP
Form 555-03. A copy of the PDO report shall be given to all parties instead of the Traffic
Accident Information Card, Form 4.37.
On the reverse side of the CHP Form 555-03, officers shall only complete the header
(date/time of collision) and footer (preparer’s name/I.D. number) portions. The PDO report
does not require a narrative, DR number, or supervisor approval. The report shall be
completed, submitted for approval prior to the officer’s end of watch, and forwarded to the
PRLO in the bureau of occurrence.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/700 CITY-PROPERTY-INVOLVED (CPI) TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
City property is considered to be involved when there is damage to any property owned, maintained, or
contracted by the City; or when there is damage to another's property as a result of contact with property
owned, maintained, or contracted by the City; or when any employee of the City is involved while acting
within the scope of his employment. City property need not sustain damage nor have physical contact if the
actions of any involved party were influenced by City property.
3/701 DUTIES OF EMPLOYEES INVOLVED IN TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
When an LAPD employee (sworn or civilian) becomes involved directly or indirectly in, or participates in the
events leading to a traffic collision while acting within the scope of their official duties, the employee shall:
A. Immediately request Communications Division to dispatch a collision investigation unit and

a supervisor to the scene.
NOTE: The supervisor should be from the involved unit’s division.
B. Complete a CHP Form 556 Supplement when involved as a Party, Passenger or Witness.
NOTE: Do not give the detailed statement(s) to an outside agency (Traffic Manual
3/702(C) 2).
1. The Employee Statement shall be submitted to the investigating officer or the

traffic division watch commander prior to the involved employees’ EOW.
NOTE: When an involved employee is unable to complete their statement prior to

their EOW, approval shall be obtained from the appropriate traffic division
watch commander and this information shall be included in the remarks
section of the traffic collision report. If not submitted prior to EOW, the
involved employee’s watch commander shall be responsible for obtaining
the statement as soon as possible.
2. An employee involved in a CPI traffic collision, that qualifies for DMV address
confidentiality, shall use the address and telephone number of his/her division of
assignment for his/her residence address in the completion of the Traffic Collision
Report or Administrative Report.
3. Stamp "Employee Statement" in the top margin of the CHP Form 556
Supplemental and complete the form.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/701
4. A Department Employee's Statement shall include the following information:
a. Assignment (division, unit and watch).
b. Partner's name and serial number.
c. Passenger(s) name(s) and reason for being in the police vehicle.
d. Type of police vehicle (marked, hybrid or unmarked) and shop number.
e. Type of emergency equipment, and if the equipment was in operation at

the time of the collision.
f. The approximate speed of the police vehicle at the time of the collision, if
known. When the CHP Form 556 Supplemental is completed by a witness
only, this field is optional.
g. Starting point, destination and purpose of the trip (on patrol, responding to
a call, etc.).
h. A brief statement describing the circumstances of the collision and any

observed traffic violations.
I. Injuries or lack of injuries sustained by driver and passenger(s) in vehicle.
j. Were seat belts used by driver and passenger(s)? Did air bags deploy?
List motorcycle safety equipment worn.
k. A statement regarding private insurance coverage while either a driver or

passenger in a city-owned vehicle.
l. A statement justifying the employee's actions or why the collision was

unavoidable if possible.
m. An estimate of the distance between their vehicle and the actual collision.
n. Describe amount and location of damage or lack of damage to vehicles or

property.
NOTE: When practical, the employee’s statement should be signed by his supervisor. In
the event an employee involved in a collision refuses to complete a statement, the
employee’s supervisor shall follow the procedures outlined in Department Manual
Section 3/820.07.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/702 CPI TRAFFIC COLLISIONS OCCURRING OUTSIDE OF LAPD JURISDICTION
When an LAPD vehicle or on-duty police Department employee is involved in a traffic collision a report shall
be completed (traffic collision, PDO CPI 15.07 or administrative report).
The CHP will handle all official investigations and reports for CPI traffic collisions o ccurring on the freeway
system.
Additionally, CPI collisions occurring in any other outside agency's jurisdiction, the outside agency has the
authority to complete the official Traffic Collision Report of record.
NOTE: An administrative report may be completed any time CPI, other than LAPD, is
involved in a collision outside of LAPD jurisdiction.
A. For all collisions occurring on a freeway within the City limits, involving an LAPD vehicle or
on-duty police Department employee, a traffic unit and supervisor shall respond to the
scene and an Administrative Report shall be completed, provided the CHP complete the
report of record.
B. For all collisions occurring outside the City limits, involving an LAPD vehicle or on-duty
police Department employee, the involved officer shall notify the nearest traffic division.
The traffic division watch commander shall make the determination as to whether a traffic
unit or traffic supervisor will be dispatched to the scene.
1. If an LAPD traffic unit is sent to the scene, the traffic unit shall complete an
administrative report.
2. If no LAPD traffic unit responds to the scene the involved officer shall be
responsible for:
a. Completing the cover sheet of the administrative report (Traffic Manual

3/703).
b. Completing the employee statement of the administrative report (Traffic

Manual 3/701 B).
c. Assuring the cover sheet and the employee statement are mailed to the
appropriate traffic division auditors.
NOTE: When an outside agency takes the official Traffic Collision Report, LAPD shall
complete only an administrative report. If an outside agency elects not to take a
Traffic Collision Report, LAPD personnel shall take the official Traffic Collision
Report of record and need not complete an administrative report.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/702
C. When the collision occurred outside LAPD's jurisdiction the involved employee shall:
1. Cooperate with the concerned investigative agency.
2. Provide a "Public Safety Statement." When an investigating officer is from another

agency, an LAPD’s employee statement concerning his involvement shall only
include his personal identification, registration information for the vehicle he was in
and a description of his direction of travel.
3. Complete statements as to the identity, actions, and statements of persons other

than Department employees may be made.
4. Ensure that the appropriate law enforcement agency is notified and investigates all
reportable collisions (injury, death, hit and run, etc.).
5. Notify the Civil Liability Division, City Attorney's Office, when the collision results in
injury, death, or serious property damage. When it is impractical to notify the City
Attorney's Office, the notification shall be made to city hall operator.
6. Comply with local ordinances and VC provisions relating to traffic collisions.
3/703 COMPLETION OF ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS - CPI
Department personnel completing an Administrative Report shall adhere to the following format:
A. A CHP Form 556 Supplemental shall be used as a cover sheet.
B. Personnel shall write "ADMINISTRATIVE REPORT" across the top margin of the CHP
Form 556 in block letters.
C. Personnel shall complete the top four sections as follows:
1. Obtain a miscellaneous DR (4400) and indicate this in the "Number" box.
2. Date and time of original report, NCIC (1942), and serial number of LAPD officer
completing the Administrative Report.
3. Mark an "X" in the "Supplemental" and "Collision Report" boxes.
4. In the "Type Supplemental" area mark an "X" in the "Other" box and list "Admin
Rpt" in the space indicated.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/703
D. Personnel shall complete the narrative portion of the Administrative Report as follows:
1. Officer(s)/Unit(s) Involved - shall include:
a. Employee(s) name(s) and serial number(s)
b. Division of assignment and unit identification
c. The City vehicle's information including license number, shop number and
color
2. Incident Summary - shall include a word depiction of the incident.
NOTE: If officers utilize the collision report "summary" wording, they must
remember to identify parties in their summary.
3. Injuries - shall describe the injuries sustained by all persons involved in the collision
and include:
a. Fire Department/Paramedic units at-scene
b. Location injured persons were transported and by whom
4. Outside Agency Information - shall include:
a. The investigating officer's name, serial number and report number
b. The investigating officer's work address, phone number and where LAPD
can obtain a copy of the completed Collision Report
5. Photographs - should be taken whenever possible and shall be taken on severe

and fatal injury collisions. Briefly describe what the photographs depict. Include the
name and serial number of the person obtaining the photographs as well as the
SID control number.
6. Physical Evidence - is an optional title to be used when there are any facts or items
in dispute between LAPD personnel and the investigating agency.
7. Miscellaneous - is an optional title to be used to explain any facts that are not
covered under other titles.
E. Administrative Reports (with the attached employee statement) shall be forwarded through
the normal traffic division report review process.
NOTE: The traffic division report auditors shall obtain a copy of the official report of record
from the outside agency and attach it to the administrative report prior to dispersing
the report (Traffic Manual 4/101).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/704 ON-DUTY OFFICER INVOLVED IN A TRAFFIC COLLISION
When an on-duty peace officer, fire fighter, or paramedic operating an authorized emergency vehicle is
involved in a traffic collision, the investigating officer shall complete the "Special Conditions" box on the
Traffic Collision Report, CHP Form 555 (Traffic Manual 3/303).
3/705 ADVISING OTHER PARTIES WHEN DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE INVOLVED IN

TRAFFIC COLLISION
When a Department employee is involved in a collision with a person who is not a member of this
Department, the employee shall urge the person to remain at the scene of the collision until the arrival of a
collision investigation unit. If the person insists upon leaving the scene, the employee shall obtain:
A. The person's name, address, and telephone numbers for work and home
B. The location where he may be interviewed
C. The license number, make and model of his vehicle
D. The number of his driver's license or other valid identification
E. The parties' automobile insurance information
3/706 INVESTIGATING OFFICER'S DUTIES ON CPI TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
An officer conducting an investigation at the scene of a CPI traffic collision shall:
A. Request a supervisor to be dispatched to the scene when the collision involves a Police
Department employee or Department equipment.
B. Photograph the extent or lack of damage and other pertinent details.
C. Complete the necessary reports. Ensure that the Traffic Collision Reports are marked
"CPI" in the "special conditions" box (Traffic Manual 3/303).
D. Notify the Civil Liability Division, City Attorney's Office, by telephone when the collision
involves a city vehicle or any possibility of City liability. Document whom was notified, date
and time of the notification in the “Remarks” section of the report narrative.
E. Cause the appropriate City department to be notified regarding the damage to City
property.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/707 NOTIFYING THE CITY ATTORNEY ON CPI TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
Notification to the Civil Liability Division, City Attorney's Office, shall include:
A. The DR number and location of the collision.
B. A description of the collision and the extent of City involvement.
C. The extent of injuries.
D. The date and time that the notification was made and the name of the person notified shall
be included in the Traffic Collision Report narrative.
NOTE: When the Civil Liability Division is closed, the City Hall telephone operator shall be
given all the information on the CPI collision report (DR number, date and time, and
location).
3/708 REPORTING DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE TRAFFIC COLLISIONS TO THE

DEPARTMENT OF MOTOR VEHICLES
When a department employee becomes involved in a traffic collision while operating a City-owned or
mileage vehicle, the employee shall not submit reports to the DMV regarding financial responsibility.
Employees receiving correspondence from the DMV concerning a traffic collision shall forward the
correspondence, without entries, to Civil Liability Division, City Attorney's Office.
3/709 LAPD MOUNTED DETAIL
A. When the horse is being ridden at the time of collision, it shall be listed in the appropriate
party box as "Other." If not ridden, the horse shall be listed as "Property Other."
NOTE: If the horse is being used in a tactical situation (crowd control) and causes injury, an
Injury Report shall be made.
B. Movement of the horse which is caused by an intentional act (rock thrown at horse) and
which in turn causes injury or damage is not a traffic collision. The appropriate report
(ADW, vandalism) shall be made and shall include the information on the injury or damage.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/710 CPI BICYCLE
A. When a CPI bicycle, including LAPD bicycle detail unit, i s involved in a traffic collision upon
a highway a Traffic Collision Report shall be completed.
B. When a CPI bicycle, including LAPD bicycle detail unit, is involved in a traffic collision on
other than a highway and no other reporting criteria exist, an injury report, death report or
administrative report shall be completed.
1. The injury report or death report shall:
a. Include an injury or death cover sheet followed by a Traffic Collision Report

(CHP 555 Form Set).
b. Include a Employee's statement, CHP Form 556 supplemental.
c. Have the appropriate injury or death DR number.
2. The administrative report shall:
a. Include a CHP Form 556 supplemental cover sheet followed by a traffic

collision report.
b. Include a Employee's statement, CHP Form 556 supplemental.
c. Have a miscellaneous (4400) DR number.
C. The Injury, Death or Administrative Report shall be forwarded to the appropriate traffic
bureau for auditing and distribution. The report shall be distributed the same as an officer
involved traffic collision involving a motor vehicle except no copy shall be forwarded to DMV
or Department of Transportation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/711 CPI AUTOMATED PHOTO ENFORCEMENT EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment Defined – Automated photo enforcement equipment is defined as the camera,

pole, and cabinet. At intersections equipped with automated photo enforcement
equipment, the camera poles will be located in near proximity to the tri-light signal poles.
The cameras will never be attached to the tri-light signal pole. There will be a maximum of
two poles at each intersection.
B. Reporting Procedure - Officers investigating a reportable traffic collision at an intersection

equipped with an automated photo enforcement camera involving damage to the PRL
equipment (cameras, poles and cabinets) will be reported as “City Property Involved” (CPI).
rd
Ownership will be listed as Lockheed/Martin IMS, 606 South Olive Street, 23 Floor, Los
Angeles, CA 90014. Officers assigned to the traffic investigation shall telephonically notify
the PRLO in the concerned bureau during normal business hours or the traffic division
Watch Commander in the bureau of occurrence during off-hours.
Where damage to the equipment is severe requiring immediate attention, Traffic Signal
Repair (TSR) shall be requested to the scene to render the equipment safe, and/or take
possession of the equipment. Officers shall remain at the scene of downed poles or
cameras until relieved by TSR.
When investigating a reportable traffic collision at a PRL intersection, officers shall write in
red ink “PRL I/S” in the “Special Conditions” box in the upper left hand corner of the CHP
555 Form Set. In addition, officers shall note in the “Remarks” section of the narrative
portion of the traffic collision report, the intersection was equipped with an automated
enforcement camera. If a personal service citation has been issued at the scene, officers
shall note the citation number and the CVC section cited in the “Remarks” section of the
traffic collision report.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/712 CONTACT- ONLY CPI INCIDENTS
A “contact-only CPI incident” is defined as an occurrence involving contact between a vehicle or conveyance
operated by a Department employee (sworn or civilian), with property or pedestrians where there is no
damage or injury involved.
EXAMPLE: Officers are stopped at a red light waiting for the tri-light signal to turn green. The
police vehicle rolls forward and bumps the rear of the vehicle stopped directly ahead.
Officers determine neither party is injured and there is no damage to either vehicle.
A contact-only CPI incident is not a traffic collision and does not meet fleet safety guidelines.
3/713 DUTIES OF EMPLOYEES INVOLVED IN CONTACT-ONLY CPI INCIDENTS
A. When a Department employee becomes involved in a contact-only CPI incident, the

employee shall:
1. Remain at the scene and request a supervisor;
2. Request a collision investigation unit to respond to the scene. If no collision

investigation unit is available, a patrol unit shall be assigned to document the
incident; and,
3. Complete a California Highway Patrol (CHP) Form 556, employee’s statement

as outlined in Traffic Manual Section 3/701. The statement shall be submitted to
the investigating officer or to the traffic division watch commander prior to the
involved employee’s end of watch (EOW). If not submitted prior to EOW, the
involved employee’s watch commander shall be responsible for obtaining the
statement as soon as possible.
B. When investigating a contact-only CPI incident, an officer shall:
1. Photograph all four sides of the involved vehicles, including close-ups

photographs of the areas of contact to verify lack of damage. Also document
any physical evidence which may be pertinent to the investigation;
2. Attempt to obtain statements of all parties or witnesses involved stating they are
not injured and their vehicle or property was not damaged;
3. If at scene, ensure all parties involved receive a business card (Department

Manual Section 4/296) and inform them if any additional information is to be
reported they should contact the concerned traffic division;
NOTE: Since the incident is not a reportable traffic collision, officers shall not
provide parties with a Traffic Collision Information Card (4.37).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/713
4. If parties or witnesses are not at scene, contact the concerned traffic division watch
commander to determine if a follow-up should be conducted;
5. Complete an “Administrative Report, Contact-Only CPI Incident” utilizing a CHP

556 Narrative/Supplemental as page 1 (refer to Traffic Manual Section 3/703, A, B,
and C), followed by a CHP 555 form set with a sketch documenting the incident
and list the responding supervisor’s name and serial number in the “Remarks”
section of the report;
6. Obtain a miscellaneous DR Number 4400; and,
7. Submit completed report to a traffic division watch commander for approval.
C. A supervisor responding to the scene of a contact-only CPI incident shall:
1. Advise involved parties or witnesses the incident is not a reportable traffic

collision and is being documented for administrative purposes only; and,
2. Review and sign the employee’s statement, when practical.
D. Desk officers’ responsibilities:
When a party involved in a contact-only CPI incident appears at the station at a later date
and advises they are now injured or their property was damaged, desk officers shall
document the involved party’s statement on a CHP Form 556 Supplemental. The statement
shall include how the injury or property damage occurred (refer to Traffic Manual Section
3/1105).
NOTE: If the collision occurred over 24 hours prior to the time of reporting, the injured
person must present evidence of treatment by a doctor. The evidence presented
must state the injury was probably the result of a traffic collision, Traffic Manual
Section 3/201 A. If the doctor’s note does not contain the information listed above,
the desk officer shall contact the concerned traffic division detective section during
normal business hours or the concerned traffic division watch commander during
off-hours, for advice.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/800 SKID - SPEED CHART, CHP FORM 185
The Skid - Speed Chart, CHP Form 185, is used to determine the minimum speed of a vehicle prior to
collision.
3/801 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION
A CHP 185 shall be completed for a filing or arrest when speed is a factor. The investigating officer must
have completed a basic collision investigation course in order to use this form.
If the investigating officer is qualified to complete speed computations he may do so on a supplemental

CHP Form 556 without using the CHP form 185 (Traffic Manual 3/415).
3/802 PAGE NUMBER
The Skid - Speed Chart, CHP 185, shall be inserted after the narrative portion and numbered as a page of
the Traffic Collision Report.
3/804 NUMBER
3/805 SKID - SPEED CHART
The Skid - Speed Chart is designed for use with locked tire marks and yaw marks.
A. IMPENDING MARKS - A mark left by the rotation of a tire slower than the forward motion of
the vehicle; usually preceding the locked skid mark.
B. LOCKED SKID MARKS - A frictional mark on a surface made by a tire that is sliding
without rotation (Sliding of a tire may be due to braking, collision damage, or other
circumstances).
C. YAW MARKS - A mark left on a surface by a rotating tire of a vehicle in a turning movement
when its centrifugal force exceeds the frictional force of the surface.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/806 MEASUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
The following information is required for completion of the CHP Form 185:
A. Straight Tire Marks.
1. Tire mark length, average
2. Coefficient of friction (absent test skids, use .70)
3. Grade of the roadway
B. Yaw Marks.
1. Chord length, 50 feet to use chart. Any other length may be used and documented
in the physical evidence section.
2. Middle ordinate length, in inches
3. Coefficient of friction (absent test skids, use .60)
4. Grade of the roadway
NOTE: For information on obtaining and recording measurements (Traffic Manual 3/1600).
3/807 COMPLETION OF BASIC INFORMATION SECTION
A. The CHP 185 shall be numbered as a page of the Traffic Collision Report.
B. Enter the DR number in the "Accident Number" box.
C. Enter collision location in the "Accident Location" box.
D. Enter the date of occurrence.
E. Enter the date test skids were conducted.
3/808 COLLISION SKID DATA
A. Enter the skid data for all four tires in the impending and locked wheel columns. Then total
the length of the tire marks in the right column. Enter the longest skid mark in the "Longest"
box and the average length of the tire marks in the "Average Skid" box. Enter the year,
make and model of the vehicle in the appropriate box.
B. Under the "Centrifugal Skid" title, enter the overall length of the tire mark in the first box, the
chord in the second box, and the middle ordinate in the third box. The overall length and
chord length should be in feet.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/809 ROAD CONDITIONS
A. Type of road - Asphalt, concrete, asphaltic-concrete, dirt, grass, gravel, etc.
B. Road condition - Clean, dry, wet, polished, traveled, etc.
C. Grade/Direction
1. List the percent of grade.
2. Show if it is upgrade (+) or downgrade (-) for direction traveled.
D. Indicate the method used to measure the tire marks.
E. Tire and tire mark data
1. Enter the length of impending tire marks for each wheel.
2. Enter the length of locked tire marks for each wheel.
3. Total the length for the impending and locked tire marks for each wheel.
4. Total the length of all tire marks (grand total).
NOTE: A dual wheel (truck-tractor) counts as one tire mark and one wheel group.
3/810 TEST SKID INFORMATION
A. Enter the name and serial number of the officer who completed the
Skid - Speed Chart.
B. Indicate the method used to measure the tire marks under the "Method Skidmarks
Measured/Test" box .
C. Enter the date of the test skid in the "Test Skid Date" box.
D. Enter the driver of the test vehicle under the "Speed Skid Officer" box.
E. Enter the test vehicle license number or shop number.
F. Enter the year, make, and model of the test vehicle.
G. Enter the speedometer and radar speed.
1. When the vehicle speedometer is used, enter the calibration data.
2. When a radar unit is used, enter the radar speed in the "Actual Speed" box and the
radar unit number in the "Date-Calibrated" box.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/810
H. Conduct three (3) skid tests, listing the following information for each test:
1. Test vehicle speed
2. Skid distance for each wheel
I. Determine the coefficient of friction for each longest skid test.
J. Determine the average coefficient of friction from the three longest skid tests and enter the
value in the "Coefficient of Friction" box.
K. Minimum speed from chart
1. Using the skid chart, apply the coefficient of friction to the skid distance measured
from the collision vehicle.
2. Obtain a minimum speed and enter the value in the box.
3/811 CRITICAL SPEED SCUFF (Yaw Mark)
The Skid - Speed Chart is designed for use with a 50-foot chord.
A. List the following information:
1. Total length of entire tire mark
2. Length of chord
3. Middle ordinate length
B. If a 50-foot chord is not obtainable, enter the measured chord and middle ordinate for
mathematical calculation at a later date.
3/812 CRITICAL SPEED SCUFF FORMULAS AND SYMBOLS
A. The illustration depicts the elements of a yaw speed scuff measurement.
B. The symbols indicate the necessary information for use of the formulas.
C. The formulas may be utilized to determine the speed mathematically.
NOTE: The formulas for calculating the speed shall only be used by an officer who has
been properly instructed in their use.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/813 COMPLETION OF THE SPEED CHART
A. To determine the minimum speed of a vehicle from locked tire marks:
1. Draw a line horizontally from the average skid length on the left side of the chart to
the average coefficient of friction line (absent test skids, use the line which
represents .70).
2. From the intersection between the skid length and the coefficient of friction line,
draw a line vertically to the bottom line.
3. This will indicate the minimum speed of the vehicle in MPH.
B. To determine the minimum speed of a vehicle from critical speed scuffs:
1. Draw a horizontal line from the middle ordinate scale to the coefficient of friction
line (absent test skids, use the line which represents .60).
NOTE: The middle ordinate scale for a 50-foot chord is on the right side of the
chart.
2. From the intersection between the middle ordinate and the coefficient of friction
line, draw a line vertically to the bottom line.
3. This will indicate the minimum speed of the vehicle at the start of the yaw speed
scuff.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/900 TRUCK/BUS SUPPLEMENTAL REPORT, CHP FORM 555D
3/901 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
These instructions correspond with the CHP Form 555D, revision 4/99, implemented for use September 1,
1999.
3/902 SCREENING INFORMATION/REPORTING CRITERIA
A. An important decision facing an officer who encounters an accident involving a truck or bus
is whether this accident qualifies as a “reportable” accident as defined by the National
Governors’ Association (NGA).
In making this decision, the officer must determine whether the vehicles involved in the
accident meet the definition of a truck or bus and, if so, whether the incident is severe
enough to qualify. For convenience, the definitions of truck and bus and the severity criteria
for a “reportable” accident are listed on the back of the CHP Form 555D.
B. There are two conditions that the officer must consider when determining if the incident
must be reported. Both of these conditions must be met:
1. Qualifying Vehicles - The accident must involve either:
a. A power unit with GVWR of 10,001 pounds of more.
b. A vehicle displaying a hazardous material placard.
c. A bus with seating for more than 10 persons, including the driver.
2. Severity of the Accident - The accident must result in:
a. At least one fatality
b. At least one injury severe enough for the injured person to require
transportation from the scene for immediate medical attention
c. At least one involved vehicle sustaining “disabling damage” (damage other

that a flat tire which is sufficient to prevent the vehicle from being driven
away without repair) or a “disabling event” (an event which requires that the
vehicle be moved, up righted, or otherwise assisted by emergency
equipment).
NOTE: The severity criterion applies to any vehicle or persons involved in the
accident. If the accident is determined to be "reportable," a separate form
must be completed for each qualifying vehicle.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/903 PAGE NUMBER
The CHP Form 555D is never numbered as a page of the original Traffic Collision Report. Each CHP Form
555D shall be numbered separately and signed by a supervisor.
3/905 NUMBER
3/906 TOTAL NUMBER OF VEHICLES INVOLVED IN THIS COLLISION
Enter the total number of vehicles involved in this collision.
3/907 TYPES OF ROADWAY
Indicate the type of roadway on which the collision occurred.
3/908 ACCESS CONTROL
Indicate the access control characteristics which best describe the roadway on which the truck or bus was
traveling at the time the collision occurred by placing the correct code in the space provided. The following
access control descriptions are available:
A. Full Access Control - An expressway or freeway where the only means of entry to or exit
from the roadway, is by ramps connecting to other streets or highways. All cross streets
are bridged over or under the main roadway.
B. Partial Access Control - A street or highway that contains a combination of full access
control (interchanges) and no access control (intersections).
C. No Access Control - A street or highway where driveways provide access to an exit from
adjacent properties and where cross streets intersect at grade.
EXAMPLE: An accident involving a bus occurs on a state highway. While cross streets are
generally grade separated and no driveways exist, a few intersections a re at grade
and are controlled by traffic signals. Since the highway has features of both full
access control (interchanges) and no access control (intersections), the correct
access control code would be “B” (Partial Access Control).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/909 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS (For This Vehicle)
A. Indicate the order and type of events which occurred relevant to this vehicle. In the boxes
provided, enter the number(s) that best describes the sequence of events for this vehicle in
this accident.
B. Since the report from and the data processing system used to store and process the data
are limited to four events, the investigating officer must code only the first four events that
happened in the accident.
EXAMPLE: A tractor/semi-trailer goes out of control on an icy roadway and eventually strikes a bridge
abutment and overturns. The tractor then overturns and catches fire. The following codes
are entered to properly describe the sequence of events for this accident:
Event 1: 11 (Ran Off Road)
Event 2: 15 (Collision Involving Fixed Object)
Event 3: 03 (Overturned or Rollover)
Event 4: 06 (Explosion of Fire)
3/910 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INVOLVEMENT
This block is used to indicate whether the vehicle being reported on this form was carrying a hazardous
material and what that material was.
A. Did vehicle have a hazardous material placard?
1. Most vehicles carrying hazardous materials are required by law to conspicuously

display a placard indicating the class, type, or the specific name of the hazardous
material cargo. In addition, vehicles transporting hazardous materials in tank cars,
cargo tanks, or portable tanks are required to display the four digit hazardous
materials number assigned to the specific material on placards or orange panels.
2. There are two shapes of placards - diamond and rectangular. Most trucks that
have placards will have the diamond variety. Several types of typical hazardous
material placards are shown on the back of the form.
3. If the vehicle displays a hazardous materials placard, such as one or more of those
previously described, the correct response is “Yes.” Indicate a “Yes” or “No”
response to this question by placing the correct code in the space provided.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/910
B. If “Yes,” from placard indicate:
1. From the middle of the diamond placard or from the rectangular box placard,
record either the four digit number or the name in the space provided on the form.
If the four digit number is not displayed, the placard should have one of the following
names:
a. Explosives
b. Gases
c. Flammable Liquid
d. Flammable Solid
e. Oxidizer
f. Poison
g. Radioactive
h. Corrosive
I. Dangerous
2. If a one digit number also appears at the bottom tip of the diamond, enter it in the
space provided on the form.
3. When multiple placards are displayed on the vehicle, write down the information
from only one of the placards.
C. Was the hazardous material release from this vehicle?
The purpose of this question is to record whether or not the placarded material was
released. The correct response is “Yes” only if material was released from the cargo tank
or compartment of the truck. Fuel spilled from the vehicle fuel tank should not be counted,
even though it is a hazardous material. Indicate a “Yes” or “No” response to this question
by placing the correct code in the space provided.
3/911 GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING OF POWER UNIT
Indicate the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of the power unit in the box provided.
A. The GVWR for most four tire and some six tire vehicles is located on a metal plate on the
driver’s door edge or door latch post. The GVWR for larger trucks is usually found on the
driver’s side of the vehicle by opening the door and looking at the hinge pillar, door latch
post, or door edge.
B. The GVWR of buses is often difficult to locate and this information is generally not useful to
agencies concerned with bus safety. Thus, in order to facilitate completion of the form, the
GVWR for buses need not be reported. Rather, if the vehicle being reported is a bus, enter
“NA” (Not Applicable).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/912 VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
Indicate the description of the truck or bus involved in this collision by placing the correct code in the space
provided. The back of the CHP Form 555D includes silhouettes of the various types of vehicles.
NOTE: The trucking industry is innovative and diverse. Companies frequently develop new
types of vehicles to meet special needs. As a result, many non-standard vehicle
configurations may appear. If uncertain about how to classify a vehicle in one of the
above categories, code it as “10" (Unknown Heavy Truck, Cannot Classify) or “15”
(Other) to avoid grouping it with a more common type.
3/913 CARGO BODY TYPE
Indicate the response that describes the cargo body of the truck or bus involved in this accident by placing
the correct code in the space provided. The cargo body type selected should be the one which best
represents the purpose for which the vehicle was designed and built.
3/914 CARRIER INFORMATION
A. This section is used to report information on the commercial carrier that has caused and
directed the movement of cargo or passengers. If more than one vehicle involved in the
accident meets the definition of a qualifying truck or bus; the same set of information should
be compiled on a separate form for each qualifying vehicle.
B. Determining the motor carrier and recording the carrier’s identification number, name, and
address can be difficult. A motor carrier is “the business entity, individual, partnership,
corporation, or religious organization responsible for the transportation of the goods,
property, or people.” The goal is to record the carrier’s name, the carrier’s address, and at
least one carrier identifying number.
C. The shipping papers are the most reliable means of identifying the carrier and the
carrier address. However, following severe accidents and under unusual circumstances,
the shipping papers may not be available. In these cases, the officer must rely on back-up
sources such as the name printed on the side of the vehicle or by questioning the driver.
On single-unit trucks, there should only be one carrier name on the vehicle. However, with
multi-unit trucks, there might be one name on the tractor and others on the semi-trailer or
trailers.
D. Enter the carrier U.S. DOT #.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1000 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS IN TRAFFIC COLLISIONS
3/1001 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS - DEFINED
Hazardous materials are defined as: any material or substance capable of posing unnecessary risks to
health, the environment, or property.
3/1002 POLICY
Hazardous materials awareness is an officer-safety concern of primary importance. This is especially true
for personnel investigating or assisting with traffic collisions in which hazardous materials are involved.
Officers should provide for maximum personal safety as well as for the safety of the public and other involved
parties. Additionally, the potential for adverse impact on the environment must be considered in all incidents
involving the release of hazardous materials.
Hazardous materials are found as cargos in all modes of transportation. They encompass a wide variety of
forms and chemical characteristics. They can be solid, liquid, gaseous, or any combination of these.
Department personnel shall not enter any contaminated area to evacuate people, however they may
evacuate areas in danger of becoming contaminated. Fire Department personnel in protective clothing and
breathing equipment will evacuate contaminated areas.
3/1003 CLASSIFICATIONS
Hazardous materials are generally classified by their characteristics or potential effects. These materials
can be:
A. Corrosive
B. Toxic
C. Flammable
D. Reactive
E, Explosive
F. Radioactive
WARNING: Some materials may become hazardous when contaminated or mixed with other
substances (fuel, brake fluid, or oil), creating a toxic gas, fire, or explosion.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1004 SAFETY FACTORS AND CONSIDERATIONS
Every traffic collision involving hazardous materials creates situations that are potentially dangerous to life
and property. Those dangers are dependant on the type of materials involved, the method of containment,
weather conditions, and type of collision.
Personnel approaching collisions in which hazardous materials are a factor should take precautions to limit
the risk for illness, injury, or death from exposure. The following guidelines should be considered:
A. Stay upwind from the incident.
B. Do not touch any suspected material or container involved at the incident.
C. Traffic collision investigations should not commence until the hazardous materials have
been removed and the area decontaminated.
D. Do not eat, drink, or smoke at the scene of a hazardous materials incident.
E. Contaminated persons must be decontaminated and receive medical attention.
F. Potentially exposed persons shall have the exposure documented.
G. Do not use flares; instead, request cones, barricades, or banner tape.
H. Maintain safe initial isolation and evacuation distances from the incident (refer to the
Emergency Response Guide Book).
NOTE: Treat all hazardous materials as if they were toxic or explosive. Police
officers do not generally carry appropriate protective equipment.
Department-issued gas masks do not filter out toxic vapors.
3/1005 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG)
Spills involving a ruptured liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) container or hose, where there is leakage only, are
potentially more dangerous than containers which are on fire because the danger is perceived to be less
and people may congregate nearby. Escaping vapors are toxic, easily ignited, and can explode. Many
gases are heavier than air and flow along the ground, moving as much as 300 feet from the source. This
expanding cloud or plume increases the potential for an explosion or fire due to the higher probability of it
reaching an ignition source. Flammable gases can be ignited by any electrical spark (telephones, radios,
traffic signals, flashing signals, flashlights, or open flame).
3/1006 ENCLOSED VEHICLES AND SEMI-TRAILERS
When a collision involving an enclosed trailer, semi-trailer, van, or truck carrying hazardous materials occurs,
do not open the vehicle to inspect the extent of damage. Chemicals may have spilled from their containers,
releasing toxic vapors, powders, or liquids into the vehicle's interior. Most trailers or vans are not well-
insulated and temperatures inside can exceed 130 degrees Fahrenheit. The combination of heat and
confining space can cause the materials to react, forming a deadly atmosphere. Opening the vehicle doors
can vent the toxic vapors directly onto the collision scene, contaminating all present.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1007 SCENE RESPONSE
A proper, safe approach to a collision scene involving hazardous materials is critical:
A. As you arrive, look for visible vapors or smoke.
B. Ensure that you park so that smoke or vapors are blowing away from your vehicle.
C. Look for any spilled liquids. If any are present, approach the scene from uphill so the liquids
do not reach your location or escape route.
D. Look for evidence of the presence of hazardous materials (placards, chemical markings,
vehicle type, or names of chemical manufacturers).
The variety of hazardous materials, their different forms, and their potential for harm make it necessary for
officers to take a conservative approach when responding to collision scenes.
Some materials are particularly dangerous because they can permeate anything they contact. Such
contamination can have short- and/or long-term health effects.
Particular caution should be used when exotic chemicals or pesticides are suspected. Some are so toxic
that inhalation of a small amount of dust or fumes or the absorption of only a few drops through the skin can
cause illness, unconsciousness, or death.
3/1008 AT-SCENE INVESTIGATIONS
Officers at incidents with the potential of hazardous materials involvement should be alert to unusual odors,
smoke, or colored liquids. These conditions may indicate chemical contamination.
A. Officers should leave the immediate area, establish a perimeter, and close the area (409.5
PC), allowing only proper authorities to enter.
1. When parking at an incident where hazardous materials are involved or suspected

to be involved, park your vehicle facing away from the incident. This facilitates your
escape from the scene if the situation escalates.
2. Park a safe distance from the scene and allow sufficient area for access by Fire
Department equipment.
B. Rescue of injured or immobilized people in a possibly contaminated area must be

evaluated with extreme caution. When a person is observed down in a contaminated area,
officers should await the arrival of trained personnel in protective clothing, including a
breathing apparatus.
C. When any Department vehicle becomes contaminated, leave it parked at the scene.
Personnel from the Department's Hazardous Materials Unit should be summoned to the
location to provide for the vehicle's decontamination.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1009 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Because there is an immediate need for specific information concerning the nature of a hazardous materials
spill, the United States Department of Transportation (US DOT) has developed a hazardous materials
communications system. Presently, US DOT regulates over 30,000 hazardous materials in transport by rail,
highway, air, and vessel.
A. The US DOT hazardous materials communications system utilizes the following indicators:
1. Placards
2. Labels
3. Markings
4. Identification numbers
5. Shipping papers
B. The rules on the use and placement of the indicators vary with the following:
1. The type of hazardous materials shipped
2. The quantity
3. The mode of travel
4. The container type
NOTE: Each indicator provides information that will assist the responder i n identifying the
GENERAL class of the hazardous materials.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1010 PLACARDS, LABELS, AND COLORS
A. PLACARDS
1. A large 11-inch square-on-point warning device that is placed on transport vehicles

and containers to indicate the presence of hazardous materials.
2. Placards are generally placed on each side and each end of a vehicle.
a. Some materials require placards for any amount, while others only require
placards at 1,000 pounds or greater.
b. It is common to transport up to 1,000 pounds of a hazardous material and

not be placarded.
B. LABELS - A small four-inch square used to warn of hazardous materials in individual

packages and containers. Generally, any package containing a hazardous material must
have a label indicating the hazard presented by its contents.
C. Placards and labels use four different indicators to identify the hazard class of the material
being transported. These indicators are listed below in the order found on the placards and
labels -- top to bottom:
1. The color
2. The pictograph of the hazard
3. The hazard name or identification number
4. The United Nations hazard class number
D. COLORS - The color of placards and labels is the primary method of identifying the hazard
category of a commodity. It is the most visible feature of the US DOT communications
system. Each color indicates a general set of characteristics for hazardous materials in
transport:
1. Orange - Explosives and blasting agents
2. Red - Flammable solids, gases, and liquids
3. White - Poisons and health hazards
4. Yellow - Materials that produce violent reactions
5. Blue - Water-reactive material
6. Green - Highly compressed gases
7. Black and white - Corrosive materials
8. Yellow and white - Radioactive materials
9. Red and white stripes - Flammable solids
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1010
10. Red and White - Dangerous
E. PICTOGRAPHS - The pictograph is located on the top portion of the placard or label.
F. HAZARD NAME OR IDENTIFICATION NUMBER - The hazard name or identification

number is located in the center of the placard or label (Refer to US DOT Emergency
Response Guide).
NOTE: The center of the placard may have a four (4) digit ID number in place of the name,
which would be the preferred choice for determining the precautions to employ.
G. UNITED NATIONS (UN) HAZARD CLASS NUMBER - The United Nations Hazard Class
Number also indicates hazardous characteristics. These numbers, which are located at the
bottom of most placards and all labels, may also indicate the physical state of the material
(Refer to US DOT Emergency Response Guide).
1. Explosives (class A, B, C, and blasting agents)
2. Compressed gases (flammable, nonflammable, and poisonous)
3. Flammable liquids
4. Flammable solids (and water-reactive)
5. Oxidizers and organic peroxides
6. Poisons (solid and liquid etiological agents and irritants)
7. Radioactive materials
8. Corrosive materials
9. Miscellaneous other regulated materials
NOTE: Some UN numbers are two digits, with the second number further defining the
material.
3/1011 MARKINGS
Markings are the "proper shipping name" of the material and the "identification number" associated with that
name. The marking is generally located on the sides of cargo tanks and on individual packages near the
label.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1012 IDENTIFICATION (ID) NUMBERS
To facilitate material identification, the United States Department of Transportation (US DOT) has
implemented a system wherein each hazardous material is assigned a permanent four-digit identification
number. The identification number may be displayed on the 11-inch diamond-shaped placard or on a 6 x 15
inch rectangular orange panel. The identification number can also be located on all shipping papers and
packages.
Once the identification number has been located, it can be used in conjunction with the US DOT Emergency
Response Guidebook. This guidebook identifies hazardous materials by the four-digit identification
number, as well as by material names.
3/1013 SHIPPING PAPERS
Shipping papers describing hazardous materials in transit are required to be within the driver's reach in the
vehicle. While the vehicle is parked, the papers must be on the driver's seat. As an alternative, the papers
may be in a pocket located on the driver's door. The shipping papers give the proper shipping name
(chemical or generic), the hazard class, the ID number, and the total weight or volume. Additionally, the
papers may give the consignee, consignor, or information on chemical hazards and contact telephone
numbers.
NOTE: Officers should not enter a contaminated area to secure shipping papers, but
should instead wait until the arrival of specialized personnel with protective
equipment.
Other information sources include the vehicle tractor or trailer numbers, license plates, and carrier names.
These can be useful in tracing unknown cargos.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1014 THE EMERGENCY RESPONSE GUIDEBOOK (ERG)
This guidebook was developed by the US DOT for use by fire fighters, police officers, and other emergency
services personnel as a guide for initial actions to be taken to protect themselves and the public when called
upon to handle incidents involving hazardous materials.
The information given is intended for the initial phases of the incident only, and additional guidance from
specialists will be needed as the incident progresses. The guide is divided into color-coded sections for
ready reference:
A. The orange border pages are response "guide pages." These pages give information on
the potential hazards associated with the material and appropriate emergency response
actions.
1. Potential hazards include adverse health effects, fire and explosion hazards, and
other information.
2. The action portion gives general emergency actions, fire actions, spill or leak
actions, and first aid.
B. The yellow border pages provide an ID number which leads to the appropriate response
guide number. Yellow highlighted ID numbers are associated with inhalation hazards, which
direct the user to check the green border pages in addition to the guide page.
C. The blue border pages convert the shipping name into a response guide number. Blue
highlighted shipping names are inhalation hazards and the user should check the green
border pages in addition to the guide page.
D. The green border pages give isolation and evacuation distances for materials that are
identified as an inhalation hazard.
NOTE: The ERG contains informational pages in the front and back. These pages are all
white and give information on the use of the guide, the United Nations hazard class
numbers, generic placards to guide numbers, Chemtrec information, and other
information.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1015 NFPA 704M SIGN
This warning sign is used on fixed sites (buildings and tanks). The sign and associated codes are also used
on packages as an employee right-to-know warning. The sign is divided into four quadrants, each indicating
a hazard area:
A. Red - Flammability
B. Blue - Health
C. Yellow - Reactivity
D. White - Special hazards
Inside the Red, Blue, and Yellow Fields, numbers are used to indicate the degree of hazard. The range of
these numbers is from "0" (indicating no hazard) to "4" (indicating an extreme hazard).
The white area gives some specific information such as "OXY" for oxidizer and "C" for chlorine. Some
limitations of this system are the amount of the materials, the location of the materials and the specific
material are not specifically identified.
3/1016 SCENE INVESTIGATION AND MANAGEMENT
A traffic collision involving vehicles with hazardous cargos can rapidly escalate to major proportions during
the time it takes to organize an effective response.
Broadcast of a situation estimate, followed by a request for the necessary resources, could mean the
difference between an emergency of short duration and one that continues for a prolonged period.
A situation estimate must be formulated without delay and transmitted to Communications Division. It should
include the:
A. Type of emergency
B. Location
C. Type of structures/vehicles involved
D. Size of involved area (actual or potential)
E. Number of additional officers needed
F. Field command post and staging area locations
G. Access routes for emergency vehicles
H. Special assistance needed (DWP, RA's, Street Maintenance, etc.)
I. Number and type of casualties
J. Type of specialized equipment required (MERV, light truck, etc.)
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1016
K. Estimate of the degree of hazard to citizens and response personnel
L. Traffic control and routing needs
M. Weather condition, including wind direction
N. Placard, shipping papers, or other warning information
O. Material name(s) and identification number(s), if known
P. Physical state of the material (liquid, gas, powder, etc.)
Q. Quantity of the material, if known
R. Broadcast a Sig-Alert as appropriate
After the original situation estimate is communicated, the next consideration is to establish a field command
post a safe distance upwind from the scene (Department Manual 3/108.40). After this is accomplished, the
field command post location should be broadcast to all concerned personnel.
At the scene of a traffic collision involving hazardous materials, the Fire Department incident commander
has the authority to direct all operations and to take those actions deemed necessary to save lives, protect
property, and to prevent further injury or damage.
When Fire Department personnel are not at the scene, officers should be prepared to make necessary
notifications and prevent others from becoming involved in the emergency. The potential or actual threat of
an incident may be diminished if officers have a basic understanding of methods to identify the materials
involved, their potential dangers, and appropriate tactics to employ in controlling such incidents.
Officers should not attempt to assist Fire Department personnel in their control efforts within the
contamination area.
Department personnel provide for traffic control and conduct evacuations outside the contaminated or
potentially contaminated areas.
NOTE: Perimeter traffic control measures and evacuation warnings will usually be
commenced with the concurrence of the Fire Department incident commander.
3/1017 FLARE USE
Flares shall not be used to protect the scene and personal property at a hazardous materials incident. The
perimeter of an incident should be established through the use of cones, barricades, or other warning
devices.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1018 REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP OF HAZARDOUS WASTE
The Los Angeles Fire Department, Bureau of Sanitation Industrial Waste Section, and the Los Angeles
County Health Department all have the authority to contact private environmental clean-up contractors for
removal of hazardous materials.
Police Department personnel shall never call for this service or sign work orders and Hazardous
Waste Manifests. Additionally, only the Los Angeles County Health Department officer can declare an area
safe and suitable for use by the public subsequent to a hazardous materials incident. No other agency or
department has that authority.
3/1019 CONTAMINATION
During the response to a hazardous materials emergency, officers may become contaminated by hazardous
materials through skin absorption, inhalation, or ingestion.
In some incidents, initial symptoms of chemical contamination are apparent (dizziness, skin irritation, or
shortness of breath).
With some materials, delayed symptoms or secondary health effects (pulmonary edema, chemical hepatitis,
or cancer) may require years to develop.
When an officer becomes contaminated, manifests symptoms of toxic exposure, or when the Los Angeles
Fire Department incident commander indicates that possible contamination has occurred, the officer shall
receive immediate medical treatment.
In every case where medical treatment is given, an Employee's Report of Occupational Injury or Illness, Form
General 166, shall be completed (Department Manual 3/720.10).
Exposed officers shall complete an Employee's Report, Form 15.7, describing their participation in the
incident, and submit it to their supervisor or watch commander for review (Department Manual 3/712.10).
Upon approval, the Form 15.7 shall be transmitted to Medical Liaison Section, Personnel Division, for
inclusion in the officer's medical records.
Vehicles driven into a contaminated area should be inspected and, if necessary, decontaminated prior to
returning to service. Contaminants accumulating on hot engine parts, catalytic converters, or exhaust
systems can vaporize, allowing toxic fumes to be circulated within the vehicle.
Officers walking in contaminated areas, including areas with runoff from "wash down," can become
contaminated and carry contamination back to their vehicles or spread it beyond the incident.
NOTE: In all circumstances where Department personnel or equipment have been

contaminated, the Department's Hazardous Materials Unit shall be contacted
immediately.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1020 NOTIFICATION TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS UNIT
A. Officers shall, as soon as practical, notify the Hazardous Materials Unit (485-4011 or DHD) when an
incident or collision involving hazardous materials or hazardous wastes result in:
1. Fatality, injury, or hospitalization of any Department personnel due to exposure to any

hazardous materials or hazardous wastes
2. Continuing danger to life, health, or natural resources at the scene of the incident,
necessitating a field command post
3. When any Department equipment or vehicle has been contaminated
4. Involvement of any radioactive material
B. No notification is required for the following releases:
1. Vehicle fuel tanks under 30 gallons with no discharge to storm drain
2. Vehicle storage batteries
3. Twenty-five (25) gallons or less of nonflammable paint with no discharge to storm drain
4. Oil, transmission fluid, radiator fluid, etc., from vehicle engines and ancillary equipment
5. Materials classified as "consumer commodities”
3/1021 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE IMPOUNDS
Officers shall notify the Hazardous Materials Unit (485-4011 or DHD) for approval prior to impounding ANY
vehicle containing hazardous materials or hazardous wastes as cargo. The Hazardous Materials Unit shall
determine the suitability of the impound with regard to safety, legality, and Department liability.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1100 INVESTIGATIVE RESPONSIBILITY
3/1101 INVESTIGATIVE RESPONSIBILITY OF ASSIGNED UNIT (DEPARTMENT MANUAL

4/410.15)
A unit assigned a traffic collision call shall be responsible for completing the investigation and the necessary
reports unless advised by the Communications Division control operator that the call has been reassigned
or canceled.
NOTE: Notify the CHP via Communications Division when the location of the traffic
collision is within the California Highway Patrol's area of responsibility.
3/1102 TRAFFIC COLLISION WITNESSED BY OFFICER (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/420.25)
A. When an on-duty officer observes a reportable traffic collision, he shall notify the
Communications Division control operator and request a unit to be assigned to investigate
the collision. If no units are available, or when so directed by Communications, the
witnessing officer shall handle the call.
B. When an officer who has witnessed a reportable traffic collision is assigned the call, he
shall:
1. Complete the investigation and reports.
2. List himself as a witness on the Traffic Collision Report.
NOTE: When a Traffic Collision Report is taken, a citation shall not be issued. The
reporting officer shall request filing for all violations.
EXCEPTION: A witnessing officer shall complete a CHP Form 556 Supplemental when the
collision involves a Department employee or City vehicle, directly or by influence
C. When an on-duty officer witnesses a non-reportable traffic collision, he may issue a

personal service citation to the violator if all essential elements of the violation have been
observed by the officer. The citation shall be subsequent to an exchange of Traffic Collision
Information.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1104 ASSIGNMENT OF TRAFFIC COLLISION CALL TO OTHER THAN WITNESSING

OFFICER (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/420.35)
When the investigation of a reportable traffic collision witnessed by an officer is assigned to another officer,
the investigating officer shall:
A. Complete the investigation and reports.
B. List the witnessing officer as a witness on the Traffic Collision Report.
NOTE: The witnessing officer shall remain at the scene until released by the investigating
officer.
EXCEPTION: An on-duty witnessing officer shall complete a Traffic Collision Report Supplement,
CHP Form 556, when the collision involves a Department employee or vehicle,
either directly or by influence.
3/1105 REPORTING TRAFFIC COLLISIONS NOT INVESTIGATED AT-SCENE

When a report is taken at a location other than at the scene of a traffic collision, the desk officer or other
officer assigned shall obtain the reporting person's name and the date and location of the collision. After
obtaining the information, if practicable, the officer should check the information via ADRIS in Area records
to determine whether the report will be an original or supplemental.
A. Original Report - When the report is an original, the report taken shall be the same as
would be taken if the collision had been investigated at the scene.
NOTE: When a traffic collision involves death or a Department employee, on or off duty, the
collision shall be investigated at the scene. A field supervisor shall be dispatched
to the scene.
B. Supplemental Report - When the report is supplemental and a statement of the reporting
person is required, the DR number shall be obtained and the officer shall complete a Traffic
Collision Report Supplement, CHP Form 556.
3/1106 NOTIFICATION TO MOTOR TRANSPORT DIVISION
When a police vehicle is involved in a traffic collision and defective equipment is alleged by the driver or
revealed during the investigation, the investigating officer shall immediately notify the watch commander,
Motor Transport Division, who will initiate a vehicle safety inspection.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1107 INVESTIGATIVE RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURSUIT COLLISIONS/ARRESTS
A. A pursuit collision SHALL NOT be investigated by any unit that was involved in the pursuit.
B. Traffic collisions resulting from a pursuit shall be investigated by the traffic division in which
the pursuit was initiated.
C. Traffic related follow up investigations resulting from the pursuit shall be the responsibility of
the Traffic Detective Section in which the pursuit was initiated.
3/1108 FLEET SAFETY - INVESTIGATION AND PROCEDURES
The Fleet Safety Program is an ongoing responsibility of all Department employees. The program has two
adjudication paths: preventable and non-preventable. In all cases, the following procedures shall be
followed:
A. The report auditor in each traffic division sends one copy of the Department-employee-
involved Traffic Collision Report or Administrative Report involving vehicles, bicycles or
motorcycles to the commanding officer in the employee's division of assignment and two
copies to the Fleet Safety Coordinator at TCS.
B. Traffic Collision Report are entered into the Fleet Safety computer by TCS and this initiates
the Fleet Safety Report, Form 1.13, and the employee's Accident History, Form 4.12.
C. Once a week, the Fleet Safety Coordinator, sends the Form 1.13, Form 4.12, and a copy
of the traffic collision report to the appropriate Bureau to assign to the appropriate
commanding officer for adjudication. One copy of the 1.13, the 4.12, and the traffic collision
report is retained in the Fleet Safety file as a control. The time limit for adjudication and
return to TCS is 60 days. The Fleet Safety Coordinator will initiate a 15.2 inquiry on
overdue reports.
D. Preventable Collision
A preventable collision is defined as: A collision in which the action, or lack of action by a
Department employee was a factor associated with the cause of the collision.
1. IF THE REPORT IS CLASSIFIED PREVENTABLE, the Area commanding

officer signs off and sends the original report, via the commanding officers chain of
command, to Internal Affairs Division (IAD) for review and final processing. When
IAD has completed their procedure, they send the original Fleet Safety Report
(Form 1.13, Form 4.12, and traffic collision report copy) to Personnel Division to be
filed in the employee's personnel package.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1108
2. Approximately once a month, IAD sends a 15.2 “Traffic Accidents Involving City-
Owned Vehicles” to TCS listing preventable Fleet Safety traffic collision
dispositions, along with copies of the completed 1.13's, to be closed out in the
computer and filed in the employee's Fleet Safety package at TCS.
E. Non-preventable Traffic Collisions
1. IF THE REPORT IS CLASSIFIED NON-PREVENTABLE, the Bureau

commanding officer signs off and sends the original Fleet Safety Report (Form
1.13, Form 4.12, and traffic collision report copy) back to TCS, via the
commanding officers chain of command, to be closed out on the computer.
2. All adjudicated non-preventable Fleet Safety Reports received at TCS are

reviewed prior to the disposition information being entered into the computer. This
is to ensure that the traffic collision report has been appropriately classified as non-
preventable. The original non-preventable report is then filed in the employee's
Fleet Safety file at TCS.
F. When the involved employee has transferred, since the date of the collision, Internal Affairs
Division has directed that the Commanding Officer of the employee on the date of
occurrence shall complete the Classification portion of the Form 1.13. If the collision is
found to be preventable, the report shall be forwarded to the employee’s current
Commanding Officer, for corrective action via the review level chain of command. A copy
of the Form 1.13 shall be forwarded to TCS noting the officers current division of
assignment.
3/1200 AT-SCENE INVESTIGATION
The duties of a collision investigator require a high degree of alertness. Officers must always be aware of
potential hazards while conducting investigations at the scenes of traffic collisions.
It is of the utmost importance that officers use every safety measure possible in reducing the danger inherent
to their duties. Officers cannot rely on safety devices alone, but must remain constantly alert.
YOU MUST PROTECT YOURSELF

NEVER TURN YOUR BACK ON THE TRAFFIC.
THE MOST IMPORTANT ELEMENT OF A COLLISION INVESTIGATION IS THE INITIAL

INVESTIGATOR. The primary objectives of an investigation are to investigate thoroughly and to report
accurately. These objectives are attained through an organized and systematic method of investigation.
There are basic procedures which are applicable to every investigation, although each collision must be
investigated on the basis of the circumstances of the particular situation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1201 ARRIVAL AT THE SCENE
Arrival at the scene presents the officer with the problem of "first things first" in taking necessary emergency
steps to eliminate hazards and control the situation. These actions are dictated by the particular
circumstances.
3/1202 PARKING OF POLICE VEHICLE
Park the police vehicle legally, if possible, or at least where it will not create a hazard. Generally, officers
should not park a police vehicle to protect a traffic collision scene.
3/1203 PERSONAL SAFETY
Think constantly of personal safety.
A. Stay out of the roadway except when absolutely necessary.
1. Have an escape route in mind (place to run).
2. Face approaching traffic at all times.
B. In a particularly hazardous situation, delegate an officer to watch approaching traffic.
C. NEVER stand between vehicles or allow anyone else to stand between vehicles.
3/1204 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Officers investigating or assisting in the handling of a collision or incident involving a hazardous material
shall ensure maximum personal safety to the public, the parties involved, and themselves (Traffic Manual
3/1000).
3/1205 FIRST AID
Upon arrival at the collision scene, summon an ambulance and render first aid if necessary (stop bleeding
and start breathing). Due to the availability of medical assistance, officers seldom are required to
administer first aid, nevertheless, they must be alert for the instance when it may be necessary.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1206 FLARE USE
Flares produce temperatures of 2,000 degrees or more and may ignite spilled fuel, brush, or other
flammable material in the roadway (Care should be exercised in igniting, placing, or extinguishing flares).
A. Ignition of Flares
1. Do not uncap flares prior to immediate use.
2. Always strike the ignition surface in a direction away from face, body, and other
persons.
3. Hold flares in a horizontal or down position. Slag will drip if flare is held upright.
B. Placement
1. Road surfaces should be checked for flammable material (gasoline, oil, or other
flammable substances), grade, etc., prior to placing ignited flares. The Fire
Department suggests placement never closer than 50 feet from vehicle spills.
2. Do not put a flare pattern downwind or downhill from bulk liquid spills.
3. Maintain flare patterns, but do not depend on them for personal safety; they are only
a warning device.
C. Extinguishing Flares
1. The Fire Department suggests snuffing the lighted end of a flare on pavement.
Flares shorter than three inches should not be handled.
2. Cover flare with dirt, if available.
3. Officers shall not "kick out" flares, as slag may enter their shoes and cause deep
burns. Kicking flares out of the roadway may ignite flammable liquids in the gutter.
3/1207 CROWD/TRAFFIC CONTROL
Remove spectators from roadway and immediate vicinity of injured persons and damaged property.
Maintain traffic flow and arrange for traffic direction.
3/1208 LOCATE DRIVERS AND WITNESSES
Ascertain if a hit and run violation is involved.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1209 ADDITIONAL ASSISTANCE
When anyone, other than the primary investigative unit, conducts any part of the investigation their name,
serial number and the duties performed shall be documented in the remarks section of the report.
3/1210 INVESTIGATION
Superior investigators routinely follow certain procedures. This systematic approach inevitably alerts
officers to any different or unusual circumstances. Make written notes.
A. Observe involved vehicles and injured persons and note their locations.
B. Obtain a driver's license or identification. Retain until investigation regarding drivers is

complete.
1. Get brief summary of collision from drivers, but conduct detailed interview later in
the investigation.
2. Observe physical condition of all drivers. When any objective symptoms of

intoxication are present, further investigation is required.
C. Remove hazards as quickly as possible (clear roadway).
D. Locate and interview witnesses; this is usually the most important part of an investigation.
Officers must remain constantly alert for possible witnesses. Independent witnesses tend to
make the least biased statements. They often do not identify themselves and leave the
scene because they are not aware of their importance or because they do not want to
become involved. For these reasons, officers must aggressively seek out witnesses and
interview them prior to a detailed interview of the drivers.
E. Interview the parties (who, what, when, where, why, and how). The interview of any person
(party, witness, or suspect) is the very heart of most investigations. Officers shall repeat the
statement in a brief organized form to the person interviewed and inform him that it will be
recorded on the Traffic Collision Report as stated. It is the officer's responsibility to
determine that the person agrees with the facts as stated and understands the terminology
used.
F. Compare and evaluate evidence and statements, Confer with partner, Re-interview, if
necessary, Resolve conflicts.
1. Elements of violations, conflicting statements, license restriction, physical

evidence, etc.
2. Does evidence verify statements (location and kind of damage, point of impact,
obstructions, etc.)?
G. Examine vehicles (brakes, registration, lights, wipers, etc.).
H. Confer with partner prior to releasing any party, witness, or vehicle.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
I. Check the scene for evidence (tire marks, lighting, signs, signals, defects in roadway,
hazardous conditions, etc.).
J. Take photographs when required.
K. Assist parties to exchange information. It is the investigating officer's responsibility to be

certain party information has been exchanged and each party understands the disposition
of his vehicle and property.
L. Cause the scene to be cleared of debris (27700 VC).
3/1211 SCENE OF A NON-REPORTABLE TRAFFIC COLLISION
Officers may be dispatched on traffic collision calls which do not require reporting. The fact that the Traffic
Collision Report is not required does not preclude the necessity of officers taking other appropriate action.
Officers at the scene of a traffic collision that does not require a Traffic Collision Report shall:
A. Keep the peace.
B. Alleviate traffic congestion.
C. Inform the concerned parties that a police report is not required.
D. Assist all concerned parties to exchange driver information per 16025(1) VC & 16025(2)
VC.
E. Inform involved parties regarding the requirements for submission of the state form SR-1 to
the Department of Motor Vehicles.
3/1212 SUPERVISORS TO SCENE
A. A TRAFFIC supervisor shall be called to the scene of a collision involving any of the
following:
1. Traffic fatalities
2. Traffic felony
NOTE: A supervisor should be contacted any time there is a question regarding policy or
procedure.
B. A supervisor shall be called to the scene of a collision involving any of the following:
1. On-duty Police Department employee
2. Off-duty Department employee
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1212
3. Prominent or important person(s) involved
4. Major incidents
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1300 HIT AND RUN COLLISIONS
3/1301 HIT AND RUN MISDEMEANOR - 20002 VC
A. Elements - The driver of any vehicle involved in a collision shall:
1. Locate and notify the owner or person in charge of the property of the name and
address of the driver and the owner of the involved vehicle; OR
2. Leave in a conspicuous place a written notice giving the name and address of the
driver and owner of the vehicle.
B. Booking Advice - A supervisor of the geographic area of occurrence or a traffic supervisor

may give booking advice.
3/1302 HIT AND RUN FELONY - 20001 VC
A. Elements - The driver of any vehicle involved in a collision resulting in injury to any person,
other than himself, or in death of any person shall:
1. Immediately stop the vehicle at the scene of the collision.
2. Fulfill the requirements of 20003 VC
a. Give his or her name, current residence address, name and current
residents addresses of any occupants of the drivers vehicle.
b. Give license number and registered owner of the vehicle.
c. The driver shall also upon being requested, exhibit his driver’s license, if
available, to any person involved in the collision or any police officer.
d. Render reasonable aid to persons injured in the collision, including

carrying to or making arrangements for the carrying of such persons to a
hospital, physician, or surgeon for medical treatment, if it is needed or
requested by the injured person.
B. Booking Advice - A traffic supervisor shall give booking advice.
C. In addition to the above elements, although not an element by statute, it is impossible to

obtain a conviction without proof of knowledge of the collision and intent to leave the scene.
EXAMPLE: There was extensive damage, loud noise, or other unusual circumstances, OR the
injury is visible and obvious, OR the seriousness of the collision would lead a
reasonable man to assume there must have been a resulting injury.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1303 INFORMATION NEEDED BY THE TRAFFIC DETECTIVE SECTION
A. Include in investigations for identification:
1. All descriptive information of the hit and run driver on Los Angeles Municipal
Supplement.
2. All descriptive information of the hit and run vehicle on Los Angeles Municipal
Supplement.
3. Amount of time spent by hit and run suspect at the scene, and conversation with
victim and witnesses.
4. Whether the victim asked for the identification of the hit and run suspect.
5. Whether the victim found any note attached to his parked vehicle.
6. Whether the victim or witness can identify the hit and run driver.
B. Evidence of knowledge:
1. Describe any unusual actions of the hit and run driver.
2. Describe any unusual movements of the hit and run vehicle.
3. Indicate the intensity of impact and amount of noise.
4. Indicate whether the injuries of the victim were readily apparent to the hit and run
driver.
C. Facts from inspection of victim's vehicle:
1. Brief description of damage and its location.
2. Indicate close scrutiny of surface for slight contact (when contact is minor or
doubtful).
3. Indicate color of victim's vehicle.
4. Any paint deposited by a hit and run vehicle.
D. Physical evidence at-scene (pertinent to investigation):
1. List any parts of the hit and run vehicle left at the scene, and their disposition.
Officers should book any vehicle parts containing a part number.
2. Investigation of rim marks, water, or oil left by the hit and run vehicle that lead from
the scene.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1303
3. If the hit and run vehicle is abandoned at the scene or found nearby, officers should
show the results of careful examination and comparison with the victim's vehicle.
The hit and run vehicle should be thoroughly searched for evidence of the identity of
the driver and/or current owner. Include evidence or lack of evidence that would
show vehicle theft (punched ignition or hot-wired, etc.).
4. If the suspect is present, photograph him, full face, for use in a photo lineup.
E. Further investigation and other action taken:
1. Indicate the results of the DMV license check with.
2. If apprehension of suspect is made by other than the at-scene investigating

officers, list the officers as witnesses.
3. If a hit and run broadcast is made, note this in "Remarks" on the CHP Form 556
narrative.
3/1304 HIT AND RUN FELONY TELETYPE FORMAT
After approval by a traffic supervisor, a hit and run teletype shall be sent in the following format:
Hit and Run Felony
Brief description - (felony - auto vs. ped)
Occurred - (Date, time, location, reporting district)
Vehicle - (Describe fully, including damage to same)
Suspect - (Description or unknown)
Registered owner - (Name and address of owner of the hit and run vehicle, if known)
Reconstruction - (Describe incident, listing all pertinent information including seriousness of

injuries or death, when advisable, and any evidence at-scene that may assist in identifying
the vehicle)
Reference - (Investigating unit or personnel and DR number)
3/1305 NOTIFICATIONS
A. Traffic division detectives shall b e notified in all hit and run traffic collisions involving fatal or
severe injuries.
B. Traffic division detectives shall be notified of any traffic felony arrest made during normal
business hours. The notification may be made in person or by telephone.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1306 HIT AND RUN FIELD PROCEDURES
A. Determine if hit and run.
B. Obtain and broadcast description of hit and run vehicle and occupants. (Do not broadcast
hit and run misdemeanors unless the case is unusual, the driver is intoxicated, or there is
reason to believe that the hit and run driver/vehicle is still in the immediate area).
C. Thoroughly interview witnesses and canvass area for additional witnesses.
D. Locate, document, and maintain continuity of all physical evidence.
E. Canvass area and scene for hit and run vehicle and driver.
F. Check hit and run vehicle thoroughly for identification.
G. Vehicle Impounds
A vehicle involved in a hit and run may be impounded when located, using the following
guidelines:
1. Highway - felony and misdemeanor (22655 VC)
2. Private property - felony and, under specific conditions, misdemeanor cases

(22653 VC)
3. An impound is not necessary if the misdemeanor suspect has been interviewed

and admits the collision (COMPLETE A CHP FORM 556 FOR STATEMENT).
H. Vehicle Holds - Mechanical check, hit and run, grand theft auto - do not for the coroner.
I. Officers should conduct a follow-up for misdemeanor and felony cases if:
1. The location is within the bureau
2. For an unusual case outside the bureau, consult supervisor
J. Booking Policy:
1. Establish prima facie case
2. Consult supervisor
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1307 RELEASE OF HIT AND RUN VEHICLE INFORMATION
Information received from DMV documents and/or automated files is confidential. The investigating officer
may release the information ONLY when the following criteria is satisfied.
A. The DMV information on a hit and run vehicle and/or suspect has been verified by a follow-
up investigation by Department personnel.
B. The information may only be released to the following personnel and only in person after
verifying the identity of the requestor (Department Manual 3/410.10):
1. Involved party or parties
2. Parents or legal guardian of minor parties
3. Persons injured in reported collisions
4. Owners of vehicles or damaged property
5. Persons or agencies who may incur civil liability
6. An attorney or authorized representative of any of the above persons (Department

Manual 3/410.20).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1400 FATAL INVESTIGATIONS
3/1401 DETERMINING DEATH
Except when a person is obviously dead, it shall be the responsibility of the emergency ambulance crew to
determine if death has occurred.
3/1402 PROCEDURE AT THE SCENE OF A FATAL TRAFFIC COLLISION
An officer assigned to investigate a traffic collision which resulted in a death shall:
A. Immediately request Communications Division to dispatch a traffic supervisor. If none is

available, request a patrol supervisor.
B. The initial investigating officer is responsible for maintaining a crime scene log charting the
arrival and departure of all personnel.
C. Allow no one to search the body except Coroner's deputies.
NOTE: If the deceased died as a result of a traffic collision, an officer MAY search a dead
body for a universal donor's card. The card is normally attached to or kept with the
driver's license. However, in most cases body parts from traffic collisions will not
be accepted for the donor program due to the blunt trauma involved.
D. Obtain a receipt from the Deputy Coroner when personal effects are removed from the
body.
E. Contact the supervisor at the scene for advice before releasing drivers involved in the traffic
collision.
F. Cause identification photographs to be taken of the victim at the scene, if possible.
G. When officers arrive at the scene of this type of collision and the victim is still present, they
should view the victim and cause witnesses to view him so that identification can be made.
The nature of the injuries can be described at a future date. Discretion shall be used when
causing a witness to view corpses, especially if the corpse is mangled, burned or a young
child.
H. When the victim has been removed prior to arrival of officers, ascertain whether anyone
present is acquainted with him or is qualified as an identification witness.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1403 REPORTING TRAFFIC DEATHS
The officers originally charged with the investigation of a traffic collision shall be responsible for completing a
Death Report, Form 3.11, for a death resulting from a traffic collision when the victim is dead at the scene or
dies while the officer is on the same tour of duty. Officers shall reconstruct in the "Narrative" section of the
Death Report the events surrounding the death. The information shall include how the deceased was
involved in the collision (driver, passenger, pedestrian) and a summary of the collision, including the type of
collision (auto vs. auto, auto vs. pedestrian, etc.) and any other pertinent description. The Coroner needs as
much information as possible since they do not receive a copy of the Traffic Collision Report.
3/1404 DEATH REPORT COMPLETION - END OF WATCH
When the original investigating officer has reported end of watch, the Death Report, Form 3.11, shall be
completed by the concerned traffic division detective.
3/1405 NOTIFICATION TO RELATIVES OF DECEASED TRAFFIC VICTIM
The officer assigned to the initial investigation of a fatal traffic collision shall cause the deceased person's
next of kin to be notified if death occurs prior to end of watch. Whenever practicable, notification shall be
made in person by the investigating officer. The Coroner shall be requested to make the notification if the
deceased person's relatives live outside the City.
3/1406 NOTIFICATION OF JOHN OR JANE DOE
Officers completing the death report for a John or Jane Doe traffic death shall notify Missing Persons
Section, Detective Headquarters Division. The name of the person receiving the notification shall be
included in the report, along with the date and time of notification.
NOTE: The above notification should also be made to DHD in the event a party is
unconscious.
3/1407 REPORTING DEATH OF UNITED STATES ARMED FORCES PERSONNEL
When the deceased person is a member of the Armed Forces, a telephonic notification shall be made to
Detective Headquarters Division by the officer reporting the death.
The notification information shall also be included, when practicable, in the Death Report, Form 3.11. The
notification shall, when practicable, include:
A. Division reporting
B. Reporting officer's name and serial number
C. Location where reports were made
D. Name, rank, and serial number of the deceased
E. Branch of service
F. Name and location of deceased's organization
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1407
G. Location, date, and time of death
H. Whether wearing civilian clothes or uniform
NOTE: This information also applies to members of the Armed Forces who are seriously
injured to the extent they require hospitalization.
3/1408 DEAD BODIES - CORONER CASES AND NOTIFICATIONS
A. When a death is accidental, by suicide, or as a result of a criminal act, the Coroner shall be
notified.
B. When a dead body comes within the jurisdiction of the Coroner, the investigating officers
shall notify the Senior Coroner's Investigator within one hour of their arrival at the scene
(Special Order No. 9, March 30, 1999). The investigating officers shall be guided by the
instructions of the Coroner's representative dispatched to the scene.
C. When a supervisor at the scene of a death determines that a dead body exposed to public
view would probably create an adverse incident, he shall notify the Senior Coroner's
Investigator who will contact the Deputy Coroner for permission to immediately remove the
body by ambulance. The instructions of the Coroner shall be given to the ambulance crew.
D. If no phone is available, the concerned Area station supervisor shall be notified via MDT.
The watch commander will call the Senior Coroner Investigator to obtain permission for
removal of the body.
E. No matter where the body is located, it cannot be moved without authorization from the
Coroner's Office.
F. When the cause of death is readily apparent (death occurs as a result of a traffic collision
and parties or witnesses can establish same), the Coroner's Office may give immediate
authorization to remove the body.
3/1409 PHOTOS OF DEAD BODIES
An officer investigating a traffic collision which resulted in a death shall:
A. Telephonically notify the Photographic Section, SID, and request that photographs be taken
of the victim(s) at the County Coroner's Office if at-scene photographs would not be
adequate for identification. When SID is closed, this notification shall be made to Detective
Headquarters Division.
B. Include in the notification the victim's name, the date and time of the collision, the DR
number, and the location of the body.
C. Document in the Traffic Collision Report the name of the person notified.
NOTE: Officers shall not make or allow photos for private use.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1500 IMPOUNDING VEHICLES
3/1501 RESPONSIBILITY FOR ARRESTEE'S VEHICLE
The arresting officers shall be ultimately responsible for the care of a vehicle in the possession of an
arrestee. When an officer arrests the driver or person in control of a vehicle, he may impound the vehicle per
22651(h) VC. The decision to impound is at the discretion of the arresting officer.
3/1502 IMPOUNDING VEHICLES INVOLVED IN A COLLISION
When a vehicle is involved in a traffic collision resulting in the driver being transported from the scene, and
the registered owner is not present, the investigating officer shall cause the vehicle to be impounded if:
A. The vehicle is on a highway, cannot be moved, and is obstructing traffic.
B. The vehicle is unable to be secured while parked at the curb.
NOTE: The tow truck operator shall be requested to remove all broken glass and other
debris from the street at the scene of the collision.
3/1503 ILLEGALLY PARKED VEHICLE
An officer may impound an illegally-parked vehicle when it:
A. Obstructs the normal movement of traffic;
B. Is left standing upon a highway;
C. It is impractical to move the vehicle to a legal parking space in the vicinity. A police vehicle
shall not be used to move an illegally parked vehicle.
NOTE: A citation shall be issued when an illegally parked vehicle is impounded or moved.
3/1504 HOLDS - WHEN TO PLACE
A. Misdemeanor hit and run vehicle - Place a hold when the driver is not apprehended or
interviewed.
NOTE: When the driver is arrested and/or interviewed and the case is complete, do NOT
impound the vehicle; photographs are sufficient.
B. Felony hit and run vehicle - Place a hold when the driver is not apprehended, or when the
driver is apprehended but there is a need for color photos, or when an examination of the
vehicle by a mechanical expert is needed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1504
C. Felony drunk driving, traffic death, manslaughter, or other felony crimes - Place a hold where
an examination of the vehicle by a mechanical expert is necessary to investigate an
equipment violation.
D. Misdemeanor hit and run with a stolen vehicle - Place a hold for the agency initiating the
stolen report.
E. Un-licensed driver's - Vehicles being operated by an un-licensed driver may be impounded

when an officer has observed the operation of the vehicle in question. Hold for the Area
Auto detectives for the Area of impound.
F. Place a hold when it is necessary for further investigation.
3/1505 HEAVY-DUTY TOW
An employee shall request heavy-duty tow service when the vehicle to be towed:
A. Has three or more axles; OR
B. Has a gross weight, laden or unladen, in excess of 10,000 pounds; OR
C. Is a combination of commercial trailers; OR
D. Is determined by the requesting employee to require heavy-duty tow equipment.
3/1600 SKID AND TIRE MARKS
Tire marks at the scene of a traffic collision are invaluable in reconstructing the events that took place prior to
and during a collision. Care must be taken to accurately measure and describe tire marks, giving their type,
location, direction, and length.
3/1602 USE OF TIRE MARKS
Tire marks can be used to:
A. Establish the point of impact.
B. Establish the direction of travel for the vehicles.
C. Establish the position of vehicles on the roadway.
D. Establish the speed of vehicles.
E. Establish approach and departure angles for reconstructing the collision.
F. Establish if mechanical failure occurred.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1603 TYPES OF TIRE MARKS
There are several types of tire marks that may be observed at a collision scene. Tire marks should be
accurately documented on all Traffic Collision Reports.
A. Impending tire marks - A mark left by the rotation of a tire slower than the forward motion of
the vehicle, usually preceding the locked skid mark.
1. These tire marks are made when the brake shoes are applied to the drum or the
brake pads are applied to the rotor disc and the wheel is turning, but is being
retarded.
2. They may be harder to detect due to the very light markings they leave on the
roadway surface. The length is included in the locked wheel tire mark
documentation.
B. Locked Wheel Tire Marks (Skid Marks) - A frictional mark on a surface made by a tire that
is sliding without rotation. (Sliding of a tire may be due to braking, collision damage, or
other circumstances.)
1. These tire marks are made when the wheels are locked (not turning) and the tires
are skidding along the road surface.
2. The color of these skids vary from a light gray to very black.
3. The marks are approximately the same width as the tire tread.
4. When all tires are skidding, the tire marks are in an approximate straight line with
striations parallel to the tire mark.
5. Tire marks resulting from anti-lock braking systems are considered locked wheel
marks.
C. Yaw Mark - A mark left on a surface by a rotating tire of a vehicle in a turning movement
when its centrifugal force exceeds the frictional force of the surface.
1. These tire marks are made by a vehicle attempting to change direction (turn) at a
speed in excess of the critical speed for that surface, which causes the vehicle to
slip sideways. A vehicle in a "yaw" will have the rear tires tracking outside the front
tire tracks.
2. Yaw marks are curved in nature and vary in width. Sometimes they will be wider
than the tires that made them.
D. Scrub marks - A short, usually broad skid mark made during engagement of the vehicles in
a collision.
1. They are caused by a vehicle spinning or sliding after impact, with or without
evidence of braking, or being pushed by another vehicle in a collision.
2. Scrub marks are used mainly for reconstructing a traffic collision. Scrub marks
cannot be used on the Skid - Speed Chart, CHP 185, but should be indicated on
the Traffic Collision Report, as they may assist an expert at a later date.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1603
E. Tire Print - A print of the tire tread is left in soft material or on the roadway surface. Tire
prints indicate if tires were free rolling.
NOTE: See "Characteristics of Tiremarks" chart (3/1608).
3/1604 DOCUMENTATION OF TIRE MARKS
Tire marks are always measured to the nearest foot. Officers shall use the coordinate or reference point
method to document each tire mark.
A. Independent tire marks
1. Measure the length, the beginning point, and the ending point of each mark.
a. Tire marks of trucks with dual tires are handled in the same way as single
tire marks.
b. When a two-wheeled motorcycle leaves a locked tire mark(s), the tire

mark(s) should be measured and documented as an independent tire
mark(s).
B. The following example will illustrate how an independent tire mark should be documented on
a Traffic Collision Report using the coordinate method:
EXAMPLE:
Vehicle #1 laid the following tire marks:
Right Front 50 feet of locked skid.

Beginning 7 ft S/N curb of Green St. and,
40 ft E/E curb of A St.
Ending 7 ft S/N curb of Green St. and,
10 ft W/E curb of A St.
Left Front 55 feet of locked skid.

Right Rear 45 feet of locked skid.

Left Rear 45 feet of locked skid.

0 ft E/E curb of Green St.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1604
C. Overlapping tire marks
Measure the length, the beginning point, and the ending point of each side.
1. It must be verified that all four wheels were locked the entire distance.
2. When a vehicle remains in a position where the overlapping locked tire marks lead
up to and under the wheels of the vehicle, the tire marks are measured from their
point of origin up to the center of the rear wheels.
D. The following example will illustrate how an overlapping tire mark should be documented on
a Traffic Collision Report:
EXAMPLE:
Vehicle #1 laid the following locked overlapping tire marks:
Right Side 50 feet of locked skid.

Left Side 55 feet of locked skid.

No grade or banking at-scene, pavement clean and dry at time of investigation.
NOTE: This documentation can be applied to the Skid - Speed Chart, if necessary. If the
vehicle which made the tire marks is not at the scene or is in such a condition as to
limit a wheel base measurement, a standard 10' length must be applied.
E. Post-impact tire marks can be used for the computation of speed. They should be
documented in the report. However, they cannot be applied to the Skid - Speed Chart.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1605 MEASURING YAW MARKS
A yaw mark is left on the roadway when a vehicle slips sideways while attempting to change direction at a
speed in excess of the critical speed for the roadway surface or vehicle itself.
The following example will illustrate how a yaw mark should be documented on a traffic collision report:
EXAMPLE:
Vehicle #1 traveling westbound left the following right front yaw mark:
Beginning 29 ft S/N curb of Pico Blvd. and,

81 ft W/W curb of Union Ave.
Interim Point #1 24 ft S/N curb of Pico Blvd. and,





Ending 38 ft S/N curb of Pico Blvd. and,

No grade or banking at-scene, pavement clean and dry at time of investigation.
The investigating officer placed a 50' chord at the beginning of the tire mark and obtained a
6" middle ordinate.
Applying these measurements to the Skid - Speed Chart, CHP 185, a minimum speed of
45 MPH was obtained.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1606 GAPS IN SKIDS
A. Skip Skids - occur when the tire group or axle bounces on the road and the tire surface
momentarily leaves the road surface. When this occurs, identify the skids as "skip skids" in
the Traffic Collision Report and measure the entire length of the tire mark. Do not deduct
the length of the break in the mark.
B. Gap Skids - occur when there is a physical interruption in the application of the brakes.
When these skids are present, measure the length of the first tire mark, the length of the
gap, and the length of the second tire mark. Identify the tire mark in the Traffic Collision
Report as a "gap skid" and record all three measurements.
NOTE: Skip skids have a break between marks of five (5) feet or less and gap skids have
a break between marks of five (5) feet or more.
3/1607 DETERMINATION OF GRADE
Grade - The change in elevation, up or down, in a specified direction, along the center line of the roadway.
This change is expressed as a percent.
A. One foot of rise in 100 feet of distance is 1% upgrade. The coefficient of friction increases
in proportion to the percentage of upgrade and decreases in proportion to the percentage
of downgrade; therefore, the following applies:
1. On upgrades, add the percentage of grade to the coefficient of friction.
2. On downgrades, subtract the percentage of grade from the coefficient of friction.
B. An efficient method of determining the percentage of grade is to use a measure meter, tape
measure, or Northwestern Traffic Template.
1. Measure along a level surface adjacent to the collision scene (step-riser, wall,
foundation).
2. Measure for a distance of 8 feet, 4 inches (100 inches).
3. Measure the distance from both ends of the tape, downward to the grade surface.
4. The difference between the latter two measurements is the percentage of grade.
EXAMPLE: When measuring the distance from both ends of the tape down to the grade
surface, assume that one end is 8 inches and the other is 11 inches. Subtract the 8
from the 11, and the percentage of grade is 3%.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1608
CHARACTERISTICS OF TIREMARKS
SKID MARK ABS * YAW ACCELERATION FLAT

LOCKED IMPENDING TIRE
WHEEL Slide, no roll Retarded, Retarded Roll and Slip and spin Roll, no
MOTION rolling rolling slip slip
OPERATION Braking Braking Braking Steering Accelerating Rolling
NUMBER OF Up to 4 Mostly 2, from Up to 4 Up to 4 Usually 1, sometimes Only 1,

MARKS rear tires 2 rarely 2
RIGHT AND Equally Equally strong Equally Front Equal if 2 Usually

LEFT TIRES strong strong outside equal
usually
stronger
CONTRAST Front Negligible Front slightly Rear Only driven wheels Equally
stronger stronger fainter rotating clear
WIDTH If straight, If straight, same Same as tire Varies, 1" Same as tire Tire tread
same as as tire - 1' edge marks
tire
BEGINNING Usually faint Faint Faint Strong Strong Varies
END Usually Start of locked Faint Strong Very gradual Varies

abrupt tire mark
STRIATIONS Always Always parallel * Always Always Always parallel to the None
parallel to to the mark parallel to the oblique mark
the mark mark
OTHER Outer Dissipate Side rib Outer edges often May include
DETAILS edges often quickly marks stronger rim marks if
stronger on may show tire
front unseated
from rim
* When there is steering input by the driver, the tire marks left by a vehicle equipped with ABS are
unique insofar as they may be different types of marks. When a vehicle is equipped with ABS, each
wheel has an individual sensor. This may cause one tire to leave a mark with characteristics of a
locked wheel and another to leave a mark with the characteristics of a yaw.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1700 AIRCRAFT MISHAP INVESTIGATIONS (DEPARTMENT MANUAL 4/206 AND

TACTICAL MANUAL, WATCH COMMANDER'S GUIDE #10)
3/1701 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) has responsibility for the investigation of
all civil, municipal and some military aircraft mishaps. The NTSB investigator in charge is
responsible for the supervision and coordination of all at-scene resources during the field
phase of the investigation. This authority may be delegated to the Federal Aviation
Administration.
B. If the aircraft is a Department unit, the Department's Aircraft Mishap Investigation Team, Air
Support Division, will also conduct an investigation regardless of the mishap location. The
collision investigation officers shall assist the team with the scene investigation.
C. Officers directed to an aircraft mishap within the City shall protect the scene until relieved by
the appropriate entity responsible for investigating the incident.
WARNING: The majority of military and many civilian aircraft are equipped with oxygen,
ejectable canopies, and ejectable seats. Do not move, pull, or otherwise disturb any seat
releases or other protrusions on the seat itself, as this may be fatal to the crew members
and to the rescuer.
When Department aircraft are not involved, officers assigned to the mishap scene shall
complete required reports for death, injury, or City property damaged (The completion of a
Traffic Collision Report is no longer required on aircraft mishaps).
NOTE: The collision between conveyances and an aircraft crashing onto a highway is not
classified as a traffic collision. However, once a mishap has stabilized, any
subsequent collision of a conveyance into the wreckage would constitute a traffic
collision and a Traffic Collision Report would be required.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1800 TRAFFIC COORDINATION SECTION
3/1801 SPECIALIZED COLLISION INVESTIGATION DETAIL (SCID)
The Specialized Collision Investigation Detail (SCID) is comprised of Department personnel specially
trained in collision reconstruction and analysis of contributory collision factors. Teams are available for
assistance on certain types of collisions.
Upon activation, the SCID Team will be functionally responsible to the OIC, TCS. The team will be
responsible for the completion of the investigation and all related Traffic Collision Reports ONLY.
3/1802 CRITERIA FOR SCID CALL-OUT
SCID should be requested when any of the following criteria are present at a collision location:
A. Any traffic collision involving a City-owned or a City mileage vehicle that results in a fatal or
severe injury as defined in the Traffic Manual 3/112. This includes CPI by influence, such as
pursuits.
B. Any traffic collision resulting in a fatal or severe injury which may result in a felony criminal
prosecution and which is beyond the scope of the investigating officer's expertise. This
would require the recommendation of the concerned traffic division watch commander or
on-call traffic division detective, with final approval by the OIC of TCS.
C. Any major unusual traffic occurrence, when requested by the concerned traffic division
watch commander and approved by the OIC of TCS.
NOTE: When the OIC of TCS is not available, the on-call SCID Team Leader shall make
the final determination for response.
3/1803 INITIAL INVESTIGATING OFFICER’S DUTIES
A. The vehicles involved in the collision shall not be moved, pending arrival of the SCID
Team.
B. The initial investigating officer is responsible for maintaining a crime scene log charting the
arrival and departure of all personnel.
C. The initial responding officer is responsible for tracking the whereabouts of all transported
parties, passengers and witnesses.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1804 PROCEDURES FOR SCID CALL-OUT
A. If the investigating officer at the scene of a collision determines the collision meets the
criteria for SCID Team notification, the investigating officer will notify the bureau traffic
division watch commander.
B. The SCID Coordinator is to be contacted through TCS during normal business hours or
through Detective Headquarters Division outside of normal business hours. The OIC of
TCS will be notified and will determine whether the SCID Team should respond.
C. The OIC of TCS will cause the notification and prompt response of the team.
D. The field supervisor requesting the SCID Team shall ensure that:
1. The initial investigating officer has secured the scene, consistent with a homicide
scene.
2. All parties and witnesses shall be located and identified.
3/1805 PROCEDURES FOR CALLING OUT SCID TEAM MEMBERS
When the decision has been made to have the SCID Team respond, the following procedures shall be
implemented:
A. The on-call SCID Team Leader will be notified of the call-out and appropriate data.
B. The SCID Team Leader will assemble the remainder of the team, using the follow criteria:
1. Cause the on-call team member to be notified.
2. Contact the traffic division watch commander of the Bureau of occurrence for on-
duty SCID team members.
3. If needed, contact the remaining traffic division watch commanders for on-duty
SCID team members.
4. Contact the off-duty team members.
C. Officers notified to respond from home should respond to the station nearest their
residence and obtain a vehicle and radio.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1806 SCID OFFICER’S INITIAL ACTIONS AT THE SCENE
A. Upon arriving at the location, each SCID member will immediately report to the SCID Team
Leader for assignment.
B. The SCID Team Leader will inform the at-scene supervisor that SCID is assuming
responsibility for the investigation.
C. The SCID Team Leader will meet with the initial responding officer to determine the status
of the investigation and assess all known factors.
D. It will be the responsibility of the SCID Team Leader to brief team members and make
appropriate assignments.
E. The SCID Team Leader will keep the traffic division watch commander fully informed
regarding the progress of the investigation.
3/1807 SCID VAN AND EQUIPMENT
The equipment contained in the SCID van will be inventoried to ensure proper maintenance and timely
replacement. This should be done by the assigned SCID Team Leader at the completion of each
investigation.
3/1808 DRESS STANDARD
A. Clothing worn while on-duty shall be of an appropriate type.
B. Uniform will normally be required, unless circumstances dictate other dress. Personnel may
work in a jumpsuit.
C. On-call personnel responding to a traffic collision scene from their residence may do so in
the Department-approved jumpsuit.
3/1809 SCID OVERTIME
All on call and investigative overtime for SCID call-outs shall be in accordance with current Department
policy.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1810 REPORT COMPLETION – SCID CALLOUTS
The SCID Team will be responsible for the completion of the traffic collision report. The completed
report should be delivered to the appropriate traffic division within 15 working days of the occurrence.
When circumstances arise that require a report completion time of greater than 15 working days,
additional time may be approved by the Commanding Officer, Uniformed Support Division.
In the event the traffic collision report is not completed within 24 hours of the occurrence, due to the
complexity of collision, the Team Leader shall be responsible to ensure that a Preliminary Traffic
Collision Report is delivered to the traffic division watch commander. The Preliminary Traffic Collision
Report must be delivered within 24 hours of the occurrence.
The Preliminary Traffic Collision Report shall include:
A. The CHP 555 face page, coding page, and Injured/Witness/Passenger page;
B. A CHP 556 including the following information:
1. An Incident Summary outlining the facts of the occurrence;
2. A “Roadway Configuration” section.
C. The words “Preliminary T/C Report” shall be written or stamped in bold lettering in the
top margin of each page.
D. The word “Preliminary” shall be written in the “Special Conditions” box.
E. The appropriate DR # shall be placed on the report prior to delivery to the watch
commander.
NOTE: The completion of a Preliminary Traffic Collision Report does not constitute distribution per
Manual 3/301. However, the Preliminary Traffic Collision Report shall be sent to
SWITRS and attached to any connecting arrest report until the complete Traffic Collision
Report is received.
In the event the incident results in a physical arrest, the primary unit assigned the call shall complete the
connecting arrest report. The arrest report shall stand alone and fully establish:
A. Positive identification of arrestee;
B. Elements of each crime to be charged;
C. A “Court Information” Section documenting what facts each Party, Passenger, or

Witness can testify to.
NOTE: This section shall only apply to incidents in which the SCID Team has responded and is
handling the traffic collision portion of the investigation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1811 TRAFFIC COLLISION RECONSTRUCTION REQUESTS
Pursuant to Special Order No. 10, dated April 21, 1994, all requests for traffic collision reconstructions shall
be handled through Traffic Coordination Section (TCS). The Specialized Collision Investigation Detail
(SCID) of TCS shall be responsible for:
A. Tracking of traffic collision reconstruction requests;
B. Maintenance of a roster of collision reconstructionists;
C. Completion of reconstructions for traffic division detectives and the City and District
Attorney’s offices; and
D. Dissemination of overflow cases to qualified officers assigned to the Bureau of request.
NOTE: Consideration for dissemination of overflow cases shall be given to any current
arrangements existing between detective commands and Department personnel.
However, all such arrangements must be identified to the SCID so that the
appropriate notifications and tracking can be implemented.
When a detective requires a traffic collision reconstruction in order to complete an investigation, the
detective shall:
A. Notify TCS/SCID of the need for a traffic collision reconstruction; and
B. Provide the assigned reconstructionist with the materials necessary to complete the
analysis.
In the event a detective has dealt with a reconstructionist in the past, and would like to have a specific
reconstructionist assigned to a case, the detective shall:
A. Ensure the availability of the chosen reconstructionist;
B. Notify TCS/SCID in order to complete the tracking portion of the request; and
C. Provide the reconstructionist with the materials necessary to complete the analysis.
A reconstructionist, while working a field assignment, requested to complete a traffic collision reconstruction
shall:
A. Notify TCS/SCID of the reconstruction request for tracking purposes;
B. Notify the Watch Commander on their assigned watch of the reconstruction request and
obtain approval to complete the analysis while assigned to a “Special Detail”;
NOTE: In the event a conflict arises which prevents the officer assigned the reconstruction
from being able to complete the analysis, notify the requestor and TCS/SCID for re-
assignment of the reconstruction to another qualified officer.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1811
C. Obtain the necessary materials to complete the analysis from the requestor; and,
D. Complete the reconstruction in a timely manner, reporting the results of the analysis to the
requestor on a CHP 556 supplemental.
When contacted by an officer regarding a traffic collision reconstruction request, the Watch Commander for
the assigned officer shall:
A. Analyze available resources on the watch;
B. When appropriate, assign the officer requested to complete the reconstruction to a “Special
Detail” for the period of time required to complete the analysis. This should be done taking
into consideration the current Department and/or Divisional overtime policy; and
C. Ensure the analysis is completed in a timely manner.
NOTE: In the event a conflict arises which prevents the officer assigned the reconstruction
from being able to complete the analysis, the Watch Commander shall cause the
officer to notify the requestor and TCS/SCID for re-assignment of the reconstruction
to another qualified officer.
3/1815 TCS PROCEDURES FOR CALLING OUT A SPECIALIZED ENFORCEMENT UNIT

(SEU) OFFICER
A. Fatal or serious injury collisions involving LAPD motor officers.
B. An SEU officer should be contacted in cases involving commercial vehicles where a fatality,
serious injury or traffic felony is involved for the following:
1. Air brake inspections
2. Weight inspections
C. During normal business hours, the request will be made through Communications Division.
D. At times other than normal business hours, the OIC of TCS or the SCID Team Leader will
call the SEU officer directly.
E. The SEU officer should use his regularly-assigned vehicle to respond.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1900 TRAFFIC DAILY FIELD ACTIVITIES REPORT (TDFAR), FORM 15.52.1
The Traffic Daily Field Activities Report, Form 15.52.1, is designed for use in a traffic function. With the
varying focus on traffic enforcement and collision investigation, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Every activity of a police nature requires an entry. Each follow-up activity requires an entry
on a separate line.
EXCEPTION: When the follow-ups are handled immediately after the original activity, with no
interruption by unrelated activities, they should be recorded on the same line. If the
follow-ups take more than one line, additional lines may be used.
B. All times shall be within the nearest five-minute interval.
C. When a unit's assignment changes during a tour of duty (T to TL), the officer shall continue
to use the same log.
D. If more than one TDFAR is required for a single tour of duty, enter on each additional sheet
the officer's last name (box #1) and the date (box #3). Staple the pages together at the
upper left corner.
3/1901 OFFICER'S LAST NAME - INITIALS
Each officer shall enter their name and serial number in the space provided. The passenger officer shall be
listed first and the driver officer second.
3/1902 ASSIGNED SUPERVISOR
Enter the immediate supervisor for each officer.
NOTE: The supervisor responsibility shall be posted by the watch commander at the
beginning of the deployment period.
3/1903 DATE
Enter the six-digit date (09/02/90) for which the officer will be credited as having worked.
3/1904 DAY
Enter the day of the week.
3/1905 WATCH
Enter the appropriate watch designation.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1906 ASSIGNMENT
Enter the full unit assignment; include the area, type of unit (T, TL, M, MX, etc.), and number.
3/1907 DIVISION
Enter the division of assignment: CTD, STD, VTD, or WTD.
3/1908 SHOP NUMBER
Enter the complete shop number of vehicle(s) assigned for the officer's tour of duty.
3/1909 ON-DUTY
Enter the time reported to roll call or duty assignment, even if late, for each officer (use the 24-hour clock).
3/1910 OFF-DUTY
Enter the time that each officer completes their tour of duty (use the 24-hour clock).
3/1911 ACTIVITIES RECAP
The following credit value shall be recorded for each entry on the officer(s) TDFAR:
* One-officer unit receives full credit (1.0); and
* Two-officer unit receives half credit (0.5) for each officer.
A. Radio Call - Record a credit for each radio call assigned.
EXAMPLE: A traffic unit is assigned a 415 man call via Communications Division.
B. Observations - Record a credit for each activity which is the result of an officer's
observation.
EXAMPLE: An officer observes a traffic violation which results in an arrest for DUI.
C. Other - Record a credit for any activity that is not the result of a radio call, observation, or
traffic call.
EXAMPLE: A unit responds to a back-up call.
D. Traffic - Record a credit for each activity which involves the investigation of a traffic collision
by the primary unit. This shall include an observed traffic collision.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1912 REPORTS RECAP
A. Traffic - One credit for each traffic DR number, regardless of the number of pages.
B. Vehicle Impound - One credit for each vehicle impound report.
NOTE: When a vehicle is impounded, the required notification, Form 15.23, shall not be
recapped as a report.
C. Other - One credit for any report completed other than the aforementioned reports.
NOTE: The mere fact that a form has a number on it does not constitute a recappable
report. A report must stand on its own to be a recappable report.
EXAMPLES:
1. A CHP Form 556 report completed with a hit and run vehicle's license number
attached is not credited as an additional report.
2. A CHP Form 556 report completed to document the statements of a party,

passenger or witness after the completion of the original report is credited as an
additional report.
3/1913 ARRESTS RECAP
A. Felony - Any felony arrest other than a traffic-related felony.
B. Misdemeanor - Any misdemeanor arrest other than a traffic-related or DUI arrest.
C. Drunk - Any arrest for 647(f) PC.
D. Felony Traffic - Any arrest for a felony charge which is a direct result of a traffic collision,
except felony DUI.
E. Misd. Traffic - Any arrest for a misdemeanor charge which is a direct result of a traffic
collision, except misdemeanor DUI.
F. Felony Drunk Driving
1. Call - Any radio call where an arrest for felony DUI is made.
2. Observation - An arrest made for a charge of felony DUI as a result of an officer's

observations.
G. Misdemeanor Drunk Driving
1. Call - Any radio call where an arrest for misdemeanor DUI is made.
2. Observation - An arrest made for misdemeanor DUI as a result of an officer's

observations.
H. DRE Evaluation - Enter the total number of evaluations for each officer.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1913
I. DRE Minutes - Enter the total time in minutes for the evaluations completed during the
watch.
3/1914 MAJOR MOVER RECAP
The officer who issued the citation shall take full credit for each citation issued for a major moving violation.
The following major moving violations were selected from traffic collision statistical data and are the
primary factors in the majority of traffic collisions that occur within the City of Los Angeles.
Speed Right-of-Way Pedestrians

22350 VC 21801(a) VC 21950(b) VC
22349(a) VC 21802(a) VC 21954(a) VC
23103 VC 21804(a) VC 21955 VC
23109(a) VC 21950(a) VC
21951 VC
Signal Direction Change Following Too Closely

21453(a) VC 22106 VC 21703 VC
21453(c) VC 22107 VC
21658(a) VC
21650(a) VC
21460(a) VC
3/1915 MOVER RECAP
The officer who issued the citation shall take full credit for each citation issued for a moving violation.
A moving violation is a violation of any section listed in Division 11 of the California Vehicle Code (CVC)
and occupant restraint, child restraint and safety helmet violations listed in Division 12. A moving
violation also includes the following Los Angeles Municipal Codes (LAMC):
80.02 LAMC – Obedience to Officers.

80.26 LAMC – Driving Through a Funeral Procession.
80.30 LAMC – New Pavement or Freshly Painted Markings on Roadways – Driving Over.
80.31(a) LAMC – Basic Speed Law on Private Property.
80.31(b) LAMC – Speed Contest on Private Property.
80.36.1 LAMC – Restricted Use of Certain Streets.
80.36.5 LAMC – Restricted Use of Certain State Highways.
80.36.7(a) LAMC – Contra-Flow Lanes.
86.01 LAMC – Boulevard Stop Signs in Parks.
86.02(a) LAMC – Basic Speed Law in Parks.
86.06 LAMC – Posting of Signs in Parks – Driving and Parking Prohibited.
86.07 LAMC – Crosswalks in Parks
89.15 LAMC – Authorized Emergency Vehicles – Failure to Yield to.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1916 NON-MOVER RECAP
The officer who issued the citation shall take full credit for each citation issued for a non-moving violation.
A non-moving violation is a violation of any section listed in the CVC with the exception of any section listed
in Division 11 and occupant restraint, child restraint and safety helmet violations listed in Division 12.
3/1917 PARKING RECAP
The officer who issued the citation shall take full credit for each absentee citation issued.
EXCEPTION: For a violation of 22500(h), 22500(j), or 22520 VC, a moving citation credit shall be
taken.
3/1918 WARRANTS RECAP
A. Arrests - Take credit for each arrest made from the issuance of an arrest warrant only.
B. Checks - Take credit for each suspect whose record is checked for warrants.
3/1919 VEHICLE RECOVERY RECAP
Take credit for each stolen vehicle that is recovered.
NOTE: Only one unit shall take credit for a recovered vehicle.
3/1920 SPECIAL SURVEY
This section is reserved for specialized instructions
3/1921 AVAILABLE TIME
Enter the time the unit is available for calls. The time shall be determined by subtracting the total minutes
assigned (box #32) from the total minutes possible during the watch.
NOTE: When a two-officer unit is assigned, the box shall be divided in half by drawing a
diagonal line from the top right to the bottom left. The top left portion shall contain
the total available time, and the bottom right shall contain half of the top left value.
3/1922 APPROVING SUPERVISOR
The approving supervisor shall review and initial the TDFAR log for completeness and accuracy.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1923 SUPERVISOR'S REMARKS
When a discrepancy is found, the reviewing supervisor shall note the location by number and letter and return
the TDFAR log to the first officer listed in box #1. All supervisor's notes and comments shall be listed in the
space provided.
3/1924 MILEAGE EOW
Record the ending mileage on the odometer of the vehicle assigned during the watch.
3/1925 MILEAGE OUT
Record the beginning mileage on the odometer of the vehicle assigned during the watch.
3/1926 TOTAL MILES
Subtract the beginning mileage from the ending mileage.
3/1927 BEAT MILES
Motor officers enter the miles traveled on their assigned beat.
3/1928 CITATION START TIME
Enter the time that the citation was issued.
3/1929 CITATION VIOLATION
Enter the most serious violation of the citation.
Enter the complete citation number.
3/1931 LOCATION OF CITATION
Enter the location where the violation was observed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1932 TIME
A. Start
1. Enter the time a call is received or when an activity begins (use the 24-hour clock).
2. When a unit is assigned two calls at the same time, the below procedure shall be
followed:
a. The time of the first call shall be entered in the start box.
b. When a second call is received, the start box on the next activity line shall
be divided with a diagonal line from the top right to the bottom left. The
time the call was received is entered in the upper left, and the time the
officer(s) begin to handle the second call is entered in the lower right.
NOTE: The starting time of the second call under most conditions should coincide
with the end time of the first call.
B. End
Enter the time the activity ends (use the 24-hour clock).
3/1933 AREA, SOURCE AND CODE
A. Area - Enter the computer-generated incident number; if none, enter the division in which
the activity occurred.
B. Source and Code - Enter the source and code for each line (R2, T2, UA, CZN, etc.).
NOTE: If the activity on the subsequent line is a follow-up from the line above or was
previously listed, enter the letter of the original activity.
3/1935 BOOKING NUMBER OR NAME
A. Booking Number - Enter the booking numbers for all persons arrested and recapped.
B. Name - Enter the name of the party involved in a collision or the PR, when a booking
number does not apply.
3/1936 DR/RFC Number
Enter the DR or RFC number on the line of the original call.
3/1937 SUPERVISOR AT-SCENE
When a supervisor responds to the scene, enter his/her rank and last name.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
3/1938 SPECIAL SURVEY
Boxes 1, 2, and 3 are reserved for special instructions.
3/1939 LOCATION
Enter the location of the activity for each line letter.
3/1940 CALL / DISPOSITION
Enter a brief description of the activity performed, including the number and type of report(s) taken.
3/1941 DEADLINES - TRAFFIC DAILY FIELD ACTIVITIES REPORT (TDFAR) AND TRAFFIC
COLLISION REPORTS
Motor officers shall not hold TDFAR's or Traffic Collision Reports while on days off, sick, or IOD. TDFAR's
and Traffic Collision Reports shall be turned in at end of watch prior to a day off (Sunday and holidays
excepted).
NOTE: Officers off sick or IOD who have TDFAR's or Traffic Collision Reports in their
possession shall notify the watch commander. If necessary, the watch commander
will arrange for TDFAR's or Traffic Collision Reports to be picked up.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/100 TRAFFIC DETECTIVE SECTION (TDS)
Each TDS shall have an auditing unit, an investigating unit, and an analytical unit.
The analytical unit shall maintain a log of Severe and Fatal injury traffic collision. A copy of this log shall be
forwarded to the Traffic Analysis Unit, TCS, on a weekly basis.
4/101 AUDITING UNIT RESPONSIIBILITIES
The TDS auditing unit shall be responsible for:
A. Auditing all information contained in Traffic Collision and Administrative Reports to ensure
adherence to the Department Traffic Manual, Traffic Detective Section policies, and
procedures of the Department.
B. Classifying and distributing Traffic Collision Reports and Form 556 Supplementals.
C. Issuing personal service citations to juveniles for alleged traffic violations, based upon
information contained in Traffic Collision Reports or resulting from follow-up
investigations, and forwarding these citations to TCS for mailing, filing, and coordination
with Superior Court.
D. Sending John/Jane Doe reports to DHD, Missing Persons Unit.
E. Obtaining copies of traffic collision “reports of record” resulting from collisions occurring
in other jurisdictions.
F. Reclassifying contact-only CPI incidents once it has been determined it meets

reportable traffic collision guidelines. The auditing unit shall be responsible for ensuring
the traffic collision report is reclassified and reprocessed with current distribution
procedures.
NOTE: Once a contact-only CPI incident has been reclassified as a traffic collision, it
now meets Fleet Safety guidelines. The traffic collision report shall be
forwarded to the Fleet Safety Coordinator, Uniformed Support Division, to
ensure timely adjudication.
4/102 INVESTIGATIVE UNIT RESPONSIIBILITIES
The TDS investigative unit shall be responsible for follow-up investigation and information concerning:
A. Felony DUI traffic collision
B. Felony and misdemeanor hit and run traffic collision
C. Traffic collision and administrative investigations which require special or additional

investigation
D. Felony evading arrest(s) which are not a result of other felony crimes
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/102
E. Felony DUI with three (3) prior convictions, 23550 VC
F. Fatal traffic collision including traffic collision that result in a “Watson” murder/vehicular
manslaughter case.
NOTE: Although the investigation of murder, attempt murder, and assault with a deadly
weapon is the responsibility of Area detectives, assistance from the TDS may
be requested when the incident is the result of an intentional traffic occurrence
and investigative expertise is essential to a successful prosecution.
Authorization for traffic detectives to assist in this type of investigation shall be
obtained from the OIC of the TDS of the appropriate traffic division.
G. Requests by outside police agencies for assistance on traffic-related matters. Prior

approval shall be obtained by the OIC, TDS.
H. Cases involving non-booked adult and juvenile DUI violations.
I. Giving advice of felony bookings for traffic offenses during normal business hours.
J. Providing assistance and/or advice to field officers when specifically requested by a

field supervisor.
K. Follow-up investigation of traffic collision involving on-duty officers with serious injury.
L. Photo identification and formal show-ups (Department Manual).
M. Train fatalities, including attempt suicides and suicides.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/200 AUDITING UNIT PROCEDURES
4/201 LOGGING OF REPORTS
Upon receipt of the original Traffic Collision Report, each TDS auditing unit shall record the DR number and
date of receipt.
4/202 PRIORITIZATION OF REPORTS
The reports shall be categorized, with custodies, felonies, fatalities, VIP -involved collisions, and hit and run
misdemeanors being given immediate attention for auditing.
4/203 AUDITING OF REPORTS
The reports shall be audited for legibility, completeness, and the appropriate format as required by the
Department Traffic Manual. Minor errors or omissions should be corrected by the report auditor when an
error or omission is obvious and the change can be made without altering the meaning and/or accuracy of
the overall report. Providing the report has not been distributed.
inside or outside the Department to ANY entity including the City Attorney, District
4/204 KICKBACK OF REPORTS
Reports which cannot be corrected by the auditor or are lacking necessary information shall be returned to
the reporting officer via a Form 15.2 to his commanding officer. The Form 15.2 shall delineate the
errors/omissions and specify the action to be taken by the reporting officer. The Form 15.2 shall request that
the corrected report be returned to TDS within ten (10) days. A copy of the original report and a copy of the
Form 15.2 shall be retained by the report auditor until the corrected report is returned. The OIC, TDS, shall
be notified in all cases when the report is not corrected as specified in the Form 15.2 or is not returned to the
auditor within the ten-day period.
4/205 DISTRIBUTION AND RETENTION OF REPORTS
After the report is audited, the report auditor may attach a Distribution Transmittal, Form 04.44, to the report,
which will indicate the number of copies to be made as well as the appropriate distribution for that particular
report (Distribution guidelines are located in Traffic Manual 4/211). After the Traffic Collision Report is
reproduced, the original document shall be forwarded as soon as possible to the Crime and Traffic
Information Unit, Records and Identification (R & I) Division. The date the report is forwarded to R & I
Division shall be entered in the distribution transmittal. This transmittal form and one copy of the Traffic
Collision Report or Administrative Report should be retained by the auditing unit for one year from the
date of occurrence.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/207 ADMINISTRATIVE REPORTS
Report auditors shall obtain a copy of the Traffic Collision "Report of record" when a traffic collision occurs in
another jurisdiction and attach the report to the Administrative Report face page. Auditors shall include any
officer's statements completed on a supplemental CHP Form 556.
4/208 FILING PROCEDURES FROM TRAFFIC COLLISION REPORTS
Traffic Detective Section shall prepare filing requests for traffic violations as documented in the Traffic
Collision Report. A log shall be maintained of all filing requests submitted for prosecution.
A. Adult - Prepare the appropriate number of copies of the Traffic Collision Report, the driving
record, support declaration, and warrant information sheet. Forward all copies to the
appropriate traffic court liaison unit for filing.
B. Juvenile - Issue a citation (in absentia) in accordance with the traffic violator referral
procedure. The citation, along with two complete copies of the Traffic Collision Report and
two copies of the violator's driving record, shall then be forwarded to TCS for distribution.
4/209 MISSING REPORTS
Auditors shall ensure that all missing Traffic Collision Reports either are located or the appropriate
documentation is forwarded to R & I Division.
A. Auditor's Responsibility
When an audit determines that a Traffic Collision Report is missing, and prior to the request
for a replacement Traffic Collision Report being sent to the original officer, the auditor shall
ensure that the following steps have been taken:
1. The traffic collision log book has been searched by location.
2. The concerned traffic Bureau kickback file has been checked.
3. Telephonic contact has been made with R & I Division for a search of the DR
number.
4. The records unit of the geographic Area of occurrence has been telephonically
contacted for a search of their files.
B. Officer's Responsibility
Whenever a missing Traffic Collision Report cannot be located, a new Traffic Collision
Report must be completed by the original reporting officer. When completing a new Traffic
Collision Report, the officer shall:
1. Delineate all known information relative to the collision.
2. Include a statement that the original report cannot be located.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/209
3. Complete all of the coding sections on the reverse of the CHP Form 555.
4. Complete a CHP Form 556 and any other related forms.
NOTE: In these cases, there shall be no requirement for a diagram or summary.
C. Supervisor's Responsibility
When a traffic supervisor approves a replacement Traffic Collision Report, the supervisor
shall ensure that the following steps have been taken:
1. The divisional files for the geographic Area of occurrence have been searched.
2. The officer's Traffic Daily Field Activities Report (TDFAR) has been reviewed.
3. Computer sources EI07-EI10 and DMV information have been reviewed.
4. Investigating officer's recollection and/or notes have been reviewed.
5. Re-interviews of witnesses, passengers and parties, if available, have been

documented.
4/210 COURTESY REPORTS
When a traffic collision report is completed by an agency other than LAPD for an occurrence within Los
Angeles the original CHP 555 Form set shall be forwarded to the appropriate traffic division auditors for
processing. The auditors shall:
A. Obtain an LAPD traffic DR#.
B. Make an additional entry to the narrative section to indicate that the report was completed
by another jurisdiction.
C. Process and distribute the report as any other traffic collision report
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/211 REPORT DISTRIBUTION GUIDELINES
The following are the distribution requirements for completed Traffic Collision Reports.
LAPD officer's statements (CHP Form 556 Supplemental) shall be distributed within the Department
and R&I Division only.
NUMBER
INVOLVED OF
OBJECT/ENTITY COPIES RECIPIENT OF REPORT
CITY PROPERTY-FIXED 2 * City Attorney

OBJECTS – IDENTIFIED Mail Stop 140
HAZARDS
(Including PDO/CPI 15.7) 1 * Concerned City Department
1 * Dept. of Water & Power

111 N. Hope Street, LA 90012
Mail Stop 800
* Bureau of Street Lighting

th
600 S. Spring Street, 14 Floor
LA, 90013
Mail Stop 545
* Department of Transportation
221 N. Figueroa Street, Ste. 500
LA, 90012
Mail Stop 725
* Bureau of Street Services

600 S. Spring Street, Ste. 1200
LA, 90012
Mail Stop 550
CITY VEHICLE 1 * City Attorney

(Including PDO/CPI 15.7) Mail Stop 140
POLICE VEHICLE- 2 * Traffic Coordination Section

(Including PDO/CPI Fleet Safety Coordinator
15.7, and Admin Rpt) Mail Stop 429
1 * Motor Transport Division

Mail Stop 435
1 * Concerned Area
Commanding Officer
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/211
NUMBER
INVOLVED OF
INJURED POLICE 1 per injury * Medical Records

DEPT EMPLOYEE Mail Stop 400
(Including Admin Rpts)
MOTOR OFFICER 1 * Traffic Coordination Section

ADDITIONAL COPY Specialized Enforcement Unit
(Including Admin Rpts Mail Stop 429
& PDO/CPI 15.7)
POLICE EXPLORER- 1 * Explorer Unit

(Including Admin Rpts Mail Stop 400
& PDO/CPI 15.7)
PURSUITS RESULTING 2 * City Attorney

IN T/C (Police Veh Not Mail Stop 140
Involved & Admin Rpts)
ARRESTS 1 * Concerned Detective

(Including Admin Rpts) Division handling arrestee
MILITARY PERSONNEL 1 * DHD

(HOSPITALIZED OR Mail Stop 400
ARRESTED)
SCHOOL BUS 1 * Calif. Hwy. Patrol

777 W. Washington
Los Angeles 90015
FATAL COLLISION 1 * Traffic Coordination Section

Traffic Analytical Detail
Mail Stop 429
OUTSIDE JURISDICTION 1 * City/County of Occurrence

(COURTESY REPORT) (Police Department/Sheriff's
Dept)
FREEWAY (CITY OF 1 * Calif. Hwy. Patrol

LOS ANGELES) 777 W. Washington
Los Angeles 90015
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/211
NUMBER
INVOLVED OF
ALL REPORTS, EXCEPT 1 * Calif. Hwy. Patrol

THOSE COMPLETED WITHOUT Data Processing-Production
AN AT-SCENE INVESTIGATION Control
AND THOSE OCCURRING ON 2555 1st St. Sacramento 95818
PRIVATE PROPERTY
STATE HIGHWAY RELATED 1 * Calif. Hwy. Patrol

OR "HAZ. MAT." IN Data Processing-Production
SPECIAL CONDITIONS BOX. Control
st
2555 1 St. Sacramento 95818
ALL TRAFFIC 1 * Department of Transportation

COLLISION REPORTS Mail Stop 725
(Including PDO/CPI 15.7)
ALL PDO/CPI 15.7's 2 * Each concerned City department

other than the Police Dept.
JOHN OR JANE DOE 1 DHD, Missing Persons Unit

INCLUDING HOSPITALIZED Mail Stop 400
OR SEVERE INJURY
PHOTO RED LIGHT 1 * Photo Red Light Operator in

INTERSECTION concerned traffic division
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/300 INVESTIGATIVE UNIT PROCEDURES
4/301 CATEGORIZATION
Upon receipt of a Traffic Collision Report requiring a follow-up investigation, the Officer-In-Charge, TDS, or
case assignment officer shall review and prioritize the report as follows:
A. Category 1 (must be assigned)
1. All traffic felony custodies
2. All traffic deaths
3. All Severe injury hit and run felonies
4. All special investigations cases, (to be assigned at the discretion of the OIC, TDS)
5. Hit and run with "Other Visible" or "Complained of Pain" injuries with a full license
number or named suspect
6. Hit and run involving City vehicle or City employee as suspects
7. Unbooked DUI drivers
8. Hit and run misdemeanor with full license number or named suspect
B. Category 2 (not assigned)
1. "Other Visible" or "Complained of Pain" injury hit and run without a full license
number
2. All other hit and run misdemeanors without a full license number
4/302 CASE ASSIGNMENT
After establishing an investigative category for each case, the assignment officer shall enter the DR number
of all cases in the TDS assignment blotter, along with the date of the incident, date of assignment, and the
assigned investigator's name and serial number. Assigned cases shall then be forwarded to the concerned
investigators.
4/303 ARRESTEE BLOTTER
All custody cases shall additionally be entered into a master arrestee blotter. This blotter shall contain the
arrestee's booking number, name, charge, date of arrest, a nd the related DR number. The investigator shall
be responsible for entering the arrest disposition and date in this blotter as soon as the case is filed or
rejected.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/304 FATAL COLLISION BLOTTER
All fatalities shall additionally be recorded in a separate log, the fatal collision blotter. This log shall reflect
the DR number, the date of the traffic collision, the name of the deceased, the date of death, and the
investigator's ID.
4/305 INVESTIGATOR'S ASSIGNMENT RECORD
Upon receipt of a report for investigation, each investigator shall first record the DR number, date of
assignment, location of collision, type of report (hit and run felony, fatal, etc.), and case category in their
investigator's assignment record. Once this is completed, a Traffic Collision Status Report, Form 4.16, shall
be attached to the case and completed with as much information as is available at that time.
NOTE: The completion of the Traffic Collision Status Report, Form 4.16, is discussed in
Traffic Manual 4/500.
4/306 CASE COMPLETION
Upon the completion of an investigation, each investigator shall indicate in their assignment record the
disposition of the case and the date the case is completed. Investigator's comments shall be concise but as
specific as possible relative to the case disposition. After making the appropriate notations in their
investigator's assignment record, each investigator shall then enter the same information in the TDS
assignment blotter. In cases involving an arrestee, the arrestee blotter shall also be updated.
4/307 FINAL DISTRIBUTION
The OIC, TDS, shall ensure that the correct distribution is made on all completed investigations.
A. Original Reports - With the exception of juvenile arrest reports, all original reports shall be
forwarded to R & I Division.
B. Fatal Collisions - One copy of the Form 4.16 shall be forwarded to TCS WITHIN 60
CALENDAR DAYS.
NOTE: If the deceased expired after initial distribution of the Traffic Collision Report, one
copy of the Traffic Collision Report a nd all supplemental records shall accompany
the Traffic Collision Status Report, Form 4.16, to Traffic Coordination Section.
C. CPI Collisions - One copy of all reports completed after the initial distribution of the Traffic
Collision Report shall be forwarded to the City Attorney's Office.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/308 INVESTIGATIVE PROCEDURES
The investigation of traffic-related crimes is not dissimilar to investigations by Area detectives. Investigative
procedures and reporting guidelines, as outlined in the Department Detective Operations Manual, will be
adhered to by TDS personnel.
NOTE: Due to the fact that traffic collision statistical systems require specific information
which is not included on crime reports, the Follow-up Investigation Report, Form
3.14, will not be used on traffic investigations (Traffic Manual 4/400).
4/309 STOLEN VEHICLES
Stolen vehicle reports should not be taken unless there is sufficient physical evidence to show that the
vehicle was actually stolen prior to the traffic collision. Detectives should normally take a statement from the
owner on a CHP Form 556 supplemental. If it is later determined that the vehicle was, in fact, stolen, a
Vehicle Investigation Report, Form 3.07, should be completed at that time.
4/310 VEHICLES IMPOUNDED AND HELD FOR TDS
The hold of a vehicle impounded for 22655 VC or 22653 VC shall be released upon the demand of the
registered owner after two business days. Vehicles shall only be released to persons who properly identify
themselves.
EXCEPTION: The supervisor (Detective III or higher) may authorize an extension when specific
circumstances warrant (22655.5 VC).
4/312 JUVENILE TRAFFIC VIOLATOR INFORMATION
To assist the assigned report auditor in completing the citations on cases to be referred to Juvenile Traffic
Court, it will be necessary for detectives to establish the elements of the case on the Form 4.16. All
elements of the violation should be documented and the necessary witnesses listed as the last entry in the
"Activities and Notes" portion of the report.
EXAMPLE: "Reports submitted to the traffic division auditors for juvenile citation, charging,
."
The documentation which follows should include the elements and witnesses to establish the violation, such
as:
A. W-1 can establish speed and driving;
B. P-2 can ID P-1, W-1 can establish hit and run;
C. Speed can be established by skid marks, P-2 can establish driving.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/313 AUTOMATED INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Currently, only information from the original crime report is input into the Department computer systems.
With little additional effort, information from TDS investigations can also be input, giving officers a much
broader data base for future investigations. Detectives completing an investigation which has identified a
suspected driver or new owner of a hit and run vehicle should use a red check mark next to the names,
dates of birth, and license numbers on the CHP Form 556 prior to turning in the cases. The OIC, TDS, will
establish a procedure to ensure that pertinent information is entered into appropriate systems prior to
forwarding to R & I Division.
4/314 VERIFICATION OF INJURIES IN TRAFFIC FELONY CASES
Due to increased caseloads and fewer personnel, it has become necessary to reduce the time expended by
detectives on certain types of cases, while still maintaining Department objectives. As a result, the following
guidelines have been adopted:
A. Injured victims need not be contacted regarding their injuries in those cases in which other
elements for a felony complaint cannot be verified.
B. Injured victims shall be contacted and their injuries verified in all traffic felony cases, both
custody and non-custody, which appear to be worthy of submission to the District Attorney
for a felony complaint.
C. Any questionable situation shall be resolved by the OIC, TDS.
NOTE: Reason for non-interview of injured victim shall be noted on Form 4.16.
4/315 SEVERE INJURY AND FATAL HIT AND RUN CASES
All Severe injury hit and run cases require contact with victims and/or witnesses, and also require a follow-up
to the collision scene within five (5) working days of assignment. All Fatal investigations require an
inspection of physical evidence by the assigned detective. In cases where the victim is a pedestrian, FAIT
and/or SID may be consulted to determine the appropriate forensic evaluation of the victim's clothing. The
results of the investigation shall be noted on Form 4.16.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/316 ON-CALL INVESTIGATIONS
Pursuant to Department Manual 4/437.20, the OIC, TDS, shall forward a roster of on-call investigating
officers to the Administrative Information Unit, DHD, on a weekly basis. Traffic division detectives who are
contacted by traffic division watch commanders shall respond to the following situations:
A. Hit and run felony traffic collisions in which the victim has expired, or is likely to expire, and
an immediate follow-up investigation is required which cannot be accomplished by field
units.
B. Major traffic incidents that fall under the purview of TDS for which sufficient expertise or
personnel is not available.
C. Any major traffic incident in which the concerned traffic division commanding officer
specifically requests assistance from the on-call traffic division detectives.
NOTE: The traffic division commanding officer may establish additional response criteria
by divisional order.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/400 TDS FORMS
Because of the need for specific information from Traffic Collision Reports and related investigations, TDS
shall use the following forms:
A. Form 4.16, Traffic Collision Status Report (Traffic Manual 4/500). This Form is used in lieu
of the Follow-up Investigation Report, Form 03.14.
B. Form 01.44, Investigation Case Progress Log (Traffic Manual 4/600).
This Form is used by investigating officers as an aid to organizing cases.
C. Form 04.44, Distribution Transmittal (Traffic Manual 4/700).
This Form is used by the report auditor as a guide to and record of the correct distribution
for each report.
D. Form 15.38, Notice To Contact Investigator (Traffic Manual 4/800).
This Form may be used in lieu of the Investigator Contact Card, Form 15.25.0.
E. CHP Form 556, Traffic Collision Report Supplement (Traffic Manual 3/415).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/500 TRAFFIC COLLISION STATUS REPORT, FORM 4.16
The Traffic Collision Status Report, Form 4.16, will be used as a progress report for an ongoing
investigation and as a record of that investigation after the case has been closed. It is not a supplemental
report and will not take the place of the CHP Form 556 for reporting supplemental information. A Form 4.16
will be completed for each case investigated by the traffic division detective, except in those cases with
insufficient information to warrant a follow-up. Such cases are not normally assigned and will be handled by
the assignment o fficer. At the completion of an investigation, detectives will turn in the original Form 4.16. A
copy shall be filed with the traffic collision package; Until such time when the Department computer system is
functional. At that time the Form 4.16 may be retained in the computer file.
4/501 DATE AND TIME OCCURRED
A. Enter the month-day-year, using numerals only (09-02-90), as it appears on the original
report.
B. Enter the time, using the 24-hour clock (2045).
4/502 CATEGORY
Enter a "1" or "S/I" for special investigation
4/503 DR NUMBER
Enter the DR number in the box as it appears on the original report
4/504 HIT AND RUN
Mark the appropriate box, if applicable
4/505 DRIVING UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE
Mark the appropriate box, if applicable
4/506 EVADING
Mark the box, if applicable
4/507 DEATH
Mark the box, if applicable
4/508 TYPE OF CPI
Indicate type of City property involved (power pole, curb, City vehicle, etc.).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/509 IMPOUND
The "Imp" box reflects vehicles impounded with a hold for TDS; if there is a TDS hold, mark the box.
4/510 DATE HOLD RELEASED
Enter the date that the held vehicle is released. Indicate in the "Activities and Notes" section to whom the
vehicle was released.
4/511 TYPE OF EVIDENCE BOOKED
Include in the box the type of evidence booked or indicate "None." Release evidence on all closed cases
(except unsolved fatalities) and ensure that the Property Disposition Request, Form 10.06.0, is sent to the
appropriate property facility.
4/512 DATE PROPERTY RELEASED
Enter the date the property is released
4/513 VICTIM'S NAME
Enter the first name, middle initial, and last name, if provided.
4/514 LOCATION OF OCCURRENCE
Enter the primary and secondary streets of the collision. Distances from the curb lines need not be included.
4/515 PARTY NUMBER ONE OR ARRESTEE
When party number one or the arrestee is identified, enter the name in the box.
4/516 BOOKING NUMBER
Enter the booking number, when applicable, in the box.
4/517 COURT CASE NUMBER
Enter in the box the court case number which is related to this DR Number.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/518 HIT AND RUN ONLY SECTION
A. Driver Identified - Mark the appropriate "Y" or "N" box. This box will normally be marked at
the conclusion of the investigation. The box for driver's name or description should be
completed at the end of the investigation. If identified, the driver's name shall be entered; if
not identified, enter the descent, if known.
NOTE: Investigators shall take credit for identifying a hit and run driver when there is both
reasonable evidence to establish this fact AND his complete name, age, and
physical description can be documented. The evidence necessary to show guilt
need not be absolutely conclusive; however, it must go beyond mere suspicion or
conjecture.
B. The boxes for description of the hit and run vehicle and registered owner's name and
address shall be completed at the beginning of the investigation. Additional information
shall be added in the "Activities and Notes" portion of the Form 4.16 as it becomes
available.
4/519 17(B)4 PC SUPERVISOR'S NAME AND SERIAL
Enter the name and serial number of the supervisor approving the 17(B)4 in the space provided.
4/521 CHARGE(S) FILED
The space provided for "Charge(s)" shall be completed when criminal charges are filed at the completion of
a case.
4/522 RECLASSIFIED TO
The space provided for "Reclassified To" shall be used when an investigation determines the original
classification of a report was incorrect. Hit and run reports may be reclassified to "straight traffic".
NOTE: A hit and run report shall not be reclassified to "straight traffic" until the alleged hit
and run driver has been interviewed and/or the investigation is completed.
4/523 DATE OF DEATH
The space provided for "Date of Death" shall be completed in cases involving traffic-related deaths. The
date shall reflect the actual date the victim expired as a result of the injuries sustained in the traffic collision.
4/524 CLASSIFICATION OF DEATH
The space provided for "Classification of Death" will be completed when the reason for the victim's death
(traffic collision, suicide, etc.) has been determined by the Los Angeles County Coroner's Office.
4/525 CORONER'S CASE NUMBER
Enter the coroner's case number in the space provided.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/526 BLOOD ALCOHOL (BA) - DECEASED
(Complete only on death cases.) The space provided for toxicology results will be completed upon
receipt of the toxicological results from the Los Angeles County Coroner's Office. The information will reflect
the percent of alcohol present and/or the type of drug(s) present, if detected.
NOTE: The spaces provided for "Date of Death," "Classification of Death," and
"Deceased Toxicology" shall be completed on all death cases. The detective shall
make one (1) extra copy of the Form 4.16 for TCS.
4/527 OCCURRENCE SUMMARY
The space provided for "TC Summary" shall contain a brief description of the traffic collision (auto vs. auto,
P-1 drove from scene; auto vs. ped, P-1 left vehicle at-scene; auto vs. pole, P-1 deceased; etc.).
4/528 TDS NOTIFICATIONS
A. DATE - Enter the date (01-01-90) in the box provided.
B. MODE - Detectives shall attempt to notify the victim(s) telephonically regarding the final
case disposition. When unable to make notification by telephone, detectives shall mail the
appropriate unit Form letter to the residence address of the victim(s). The mode (method)
of notification shall be entered in the space provided (telephone, mail, personal visit, etc.).
4/529 ACTIVITIES AND NOTES
A. In the space provided for "Activities and Notes," detectives shall:
1. Indicate the date the case was received.
2. Show chronological progress of the investigation. Indicate a date for each entry.
3. Detectives shall keep all cases which are assigned to them current, and in no event
shall there be more than ten (10) days between investigative activities. All activities
shall be noted on the Form 4.16. Notations need not be lengthy, but must include
enough information to allow another detective reading the entry to understand the
status of the case. The entry should include a summary of the activity, such as:
a. I/V'd R/O - took CHP Form 556 & photos - claims V-1 stolen
b. Vict. I/V'd - photo ID - Unable to ID R/O as P-1
B. Information contained in a CHP Form 556 need not be duplicated in the "Activities and
Notes" portion of the Form 4.16; however, the mere notation "C-CHP Form 556" is
insufficient.
C. On the last entry of the "Activities and Notes" section, give the final disposition of the case
(case closed - complaint filed with District Attorney Schwartz for 20001 VC).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/530 INVESTIGATION CONTINUED DATE
Enter the date the investigation was continued when:
A. The case has not been cleared or unfounded, and the investigation is continuing.
B. The case has not been cleared or unfounded, and no other case status applies.
4/531 INVESTIGATION CLOSED DATE
Enter the date the case was closed.
4/532 SUPERVISOR APPROVING
Completed reports shall be approved by the appropriate supervisor.
4/533 INVESTIGATING OFFICER
The name, serial number, and detail of the assigned detective shall be entered in the space provided. If
more than one detective completes a portion of the investigation (takes a CHP Form 556, takes photos,
releases vehicle, etc.), his name and serial number shall be entered in the "Activities and Notes" section of
the report.
4/600 INVESTIGATORS CASE PROGRESS LOG, FORM 01.44
This Form may be used by detectives to aid in organizing cases.
When this Form is used, staple one (1) copy to the investigator's copy of the report to which it relates.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/700 DISTRIBUTION TRANSMITTAL, FORM 04.44
The report auditor assigned the responsibility of auditing a Traffic Collision Report may attach a Distribution
Transmittal, Form 04.44, to the report. At the conclusion of the auditing process, the total number of copies
to be reproduced should be marked at the top of the Form as a guide for records unit personnel. The
reports shall be distributed as per the Form 04.44 and the original Traffic Collision Report forwarded to R &
I. The Form 04.44 shall reflect the date the original Traffic Collision Report is mailed; it should be attached
to the traffic division file copy of the Traffic Collision Report and kept on file for one year by the TDS auditing
unit.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/800 NOTICE TO CONTACT INVESTIGATOR, FORM 15.38
The Form 15.38 is used by detectives to contact possible suspects and witnesses in those cases being
investigated by TDS. Detectives shall fill in the necessary spaces and boxes, as applicable. The Form is
self-explanatory and should not require a detailed explanation. Detectives utilizing the "Remarks" section of
the Form 15.38 to communicate information or instructions shall ensure that the remarks are appropriate
and legible.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/900 AUDITS AND CONTROLS
Because of the specialized forms and investigative procedures involved in traffic-related investigations,
control measures/audits normally used by detective supervisory personnel will not produce satisfactory
results. The following is a list of procedures recommended for auditing and/or controlling TDS:
4/901 TIME LIMITS
A. Investigators shall have a maximum of 60 days from the date of assignment on all non-
custody cases to complete all phases of each investigation and submit the appropriate
reports for approval.
B. The OIC of TDS, at his discretion, may extend time limits on those investigations that
require special attention. All time extensions must be documented on the Form 4.16 and
shall be in increments not to exceed 30 days.
EXCEPTION:
When a death results from a traffic collision, the investigating officer shall complete and
submit the Form 4.16 within 60 days following the initial Death Investigation Report. The
report shall indicate:
1. The postmortem examination results and the final classification of death; OR
2. That the investigation is continuing and the reason for its continuance.
4/902 CUSTODY CASES
The TDS OIC shall monitor the disposition boxes on the arrest blotter to ensure that the arrestee is
processed in a timely manner.
4/903 NON-CUSTODY CASES
The TDS OIC shall audit the assignment blotter to determine which cases have reached the 60-day limit.
The OIC shall contact the assigned investigator on each case which has not been concluded within the 60-
day time limit to determine why the investigation is not progressing. The OIC may issue an extension where
justification is indicated. Extensions shall be in increments of 30 days.
4/904 MONTHLY CASE AUDIT
The TDS OIC shall, on a monthly basis, require each investigator to document the status of all investigations
within his control. This documentation shall include the number of investigations carried over from the
previous month, the number of investigations assigned during the month, and the number of investigations
completed during the month. Investigators shall also include the number and type (misdemeanor or felony)
of criminal complaints obtained during the month. Investigators shall categorize their statistics by type of
investigation (hit and run, death, etc.).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
4/905 WARRANT PACKAGE
When an investigator obtains a felony warrant on a suspect and is unable to serve the warrant within ten (10)
working days, he shall complete a warrant package and include the following information:
A. Photographs of the suspect and his vehicle
B. Warrant description
C. Due Diligence work sheet
D. A copy of the Form 4.16
NOTE: The investigator's Form 4.16 shall read "Warrant issued - see warrant package."
4/906 UNSOLVED HIT AND RUN FATALITIES
After exhausting all leads in a hit and run fatal collision, the assigned investigator shall complete an unsolved
fatal package. The fatal package shall be kept on file and shall contain the following:
A. An unsolved Death "Fly" Sheet attached to the outside of the package.
B. A copy of all the reports, notes, and photographs.
4/907 ASSIGNMENT BLOTTER
The TDS OIC shall audit the assignment blotter on a quarterly basis to ensure that dispositions are being
recorded.
4/908 INDIVIDUAL CASE INSPECTION
The TDS OIC shall randomly inspect the investigators' case assignment blotters and their investigations to
ensure that timely and accurate investigative procedures are being employed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/200 MOTORCYCLE FIELD POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
5/201 PARTNERS AND GROUPS
Except on team beats, motor officers shall patrol alone until 1900 hours or dark (whichever occurs later),
after which time assigned partners shall not separate unnecessarily. Riding in groups (more than two motor
officers) is prohibited unless for good cause.
5/202 END OF WATCH
All field motor officers shall notify their watch commander by land-line at the end of their tour of duty, giving
the box or station identification and location. Ring-offs shall be made within the officer's area of assignment
and are permitted five minutes prior to end of watch.
5/203 VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT REPAIR
Motorcycle or radio equipment shall not be repaired during patrol hours or during the last hour of a tour of
duty, except with the permission of a supervisor.
5/204 DUTY TO ASSIST
All officers in uniform with a police vehicle shall stop and give necessary aid to persons in need of
assistance on any traffic-way within or outside the City (including freeways).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/300 CARE AND USE OF MOTORCYCLES
5/301 OPERATION OF VEHICLES
Officers shall operate vehicles in accordance with the Department's policy as outlined in the LAPD Training
Bulletin on Defensive Driving Principles (Fleet Safety II), Volume VI, Issue 2.
5/302 UNAUTHORIZED USE OF CITY VEHICLES
Section 63.106 of the Los Angeles Municipal Code makes it a misdemeanor for any employee to use or to
permit any unauthorized person to ride in or upon any City-owned vehicle for a purpose other than the
execution of the official business of the City of Los Angeles.
5/303 SPEED OF MOTORCYCLES ON FREEWAYS
The maximum speed at which Department motorcycles shall be operated on the freeways, unless engaged
in an immediate pursuit, shall be no more than five miles per hour faster than the normal flow of traffic.
5/304 DIRECT ROUTES OF TRAVEL
Officers shall use direct routes of travel when operating City-owned vehicles. Trips to and from home shall
be made without unnecessary delay. Any deviations from the above routes or times must be pre-approved
by the officer's on-duty watch commander.
5/306 HEADLIGHTS
Department motorcycles shall be operated with the headlights on at all times.
EXCEPTION: When tactical considerations warrant, the motorcycle may be operated with the
headlight off.
5/307 PERMIT TO REGULARLY HOME-GARAGE A DEPARTMENT VEHICLE
Employees who must regularly home-garage Department vehicles assigned to their position shall complete
four copies of a Permit to Regularly Home-Garage a Department Vehicle, Form 1.46, and submit this to
their commanding officer.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/308 OFF-DUTY / RIDING MOTORCYCLES PROHIBITED
Officers shall not operate their City-owned motorcycles while off duty, except for:
A. Court appearance where the subpoena arises out of the fulfillment of an on-duty police task
B. Certain pre-assigned details such as parades, drill team events, escorts, and/or other
previously-authorized assignments
C. Disaster emergency use
D. With commanding officer's permission
Motor officers shall not operate City-owned motorcycles while wearing other than Department approved
uniform attire unless they are attending Department approved motorcycle training or other designated
training, as approved by their commanding officer.
EXCEPTION: Non-related motorcycle training. If motor officers have been granted permission to
commute to and from a non-motor officer related assignment to attend training or
other Department approved functions, their commute shall be conducted in Class A
or Class C uniform.
5/309 SICK OR IOD - RIDING MOTORCYCLES PROHIBITED
Any officer who has been marked "Off-Duty IOD" or "Off-Duty Sick" shall not operate a City motorcycle.
EXCEPTION: When an officer is marked off-duty IOD or off-duty sick during a work day, he may
ride a motorcycle directly home or to the station of assignment if:
A. In IOD situations, the officer obtains the approval of the contract hospital doctor or a
Worker's Compensation physician, informs the watch commander of the doctor's approval,
and obtains permission from the watch commander to ride the motorcycle.
B. In "sick" situations, the motorcycle may be ridden directly home if permission is obtained
from the watch commander.
5/310 MOTORCYCLE ASSIGNMENTS
Officers shall be assigned motorcycles based on their motorcycle seniority, (Department Manual 3/584.25).
A. New Motorcycles - Officers on the "new" motorcycle list may turn down a new motorcycle
and retain their currently assigned motorcycle. Officers may exercise this option one time
only and will maintain their position on the seniority roster. On their next regularly scheduled
issuance date these officers will be considered for a new motorcycle.
B. Used Motorcycles - Officers on the "used" motorcycle list do not have a "turn down" option
and must accept the motorcycle issued to them.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/311 MOTOR OFFICERS LOANED TO NON-RIDING POSITIONS
Motorcycle officers who are loaned to a non-riding assignment in excess of one deployment period are
subject to having their motorcycle reassigned by the Motor Garage Liaison Officer. Reassignment will be
based on fleet needs and the duration of the officer's loan. Officers will continue to maintain their motorcycle
seniority during such loans. Upon returning from a loan, officers will be issued a motorcycle consistent with
his position on the current motor list.
5/312 MAINTENANCE OF MOTORCYCLES - OFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Each officer is responsible for the following items of maintenance on an assigned motorcycle:
A. Oil level in visual sight gauge shall be checked daily.
B. Tire inspection and inflation pressure shall be checked at least twice a week to detect
unsafe wear or tire pressure problems.
C. Proper tire inflation is 36 psi (cold) for both front and rear tires for all year models.
D. After each 3,000 miles of service, officers shall turn their assigned motorcycle into the
motorcycle shop nearest to their division of assignment for a preventive maintenance check
(this includes lubrication and oil change).
E. Battery servicing as often as necessary to maintain a "safe" level of solution in the battery.
F. A frequent inspection of the rear chain to make certain it is kept adequately oiled. Proper
oiling of the rear chain is extremely important to prevent undue wear or mechanical failure of
the chain and sprockets.
G. A weekly check of all gasoline connections to discover gasoline leaks that could be a fire
hazard.
H. Appearance, including washing, polishing, and touch-up painting.
5/313 MISUSE OF MOTORIZED EQUIPMENT
Deliberate abuse or misuse of motorized equipment resulting in extra maintenance may result in disciplinary
action against the concerned officer. This includes cases where additional equipment damage results from
an officer disregarding the instructions of a supervisor or personnel of the Motor Transport Division. Officers
shall not transport any containers of volatile fuel in or upon their motorcycles.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/314 SERVICE AND REPAIR OF MOTORCYCLES
A. Motorcycles requiring minor repairs shall be left at the garage prior to roll call and picked up
at the conclusion of roll call, with the motorcycle shop foreman's approval.
B. When an officer goes to the garage for service at times other than prior to roll call, the
officer shall ascertain from the mechanic how much time the service operation will require.
If the time required will be 30 minutes or longer, the officer shall check out a spare
motorcycle unless he receives other instructions from the watch commander.
C. When a motorcycle is placed in the garage for repair, officers shall list all BO items for
repair at that time. A BO slip shall be made out for all work requested, however minor.
D. Whenever possible, officers shall make prior arrangements with the shop foreman for
preventive maintenance and major repairs. Scheduling of all repair work is determined by
the shop foreman. In the absence of an emergency, officers shall not go to the garage for
repairs between 1130 and 1200 hours.
E. Officers within the repair area shall not engage in unnecessary conversation with on-duty
mechanics. Officers awaiting repairs are directed not to loiter in the repair area or the
foreman's office. Officers are encouraged to wait in the coffee room.
F. Officers shall conduct themselves in a professional manner during contacts with Motor
Transport Division employees. If an officer is dissatisfied with the work performed, the
motor garage liaison officer shall be contacted in order to resolve the dispute.
G. When an officer and the mechanic disagree as to the serviceability of a motorcycle, the
designated motor garage liaison officer shall test-ride the motorcycle to determine if the
motorcycle is serviceable for police duty.
H. When storing a motorcycle in the City garage for vacation purposes, officers shall park in
the area set aside for storage and attach a note in a conspicuous location on their
motorcycle giving the dates of their vacation. An effort will be made to have the motorcycle
washed and serviced prior to the officer's return (Officers returning from vacation should
contact the shop foreman of the concerned area two days prior to their return).
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/315 SPARE MOTORCYCLES
Officers shall not operate other than their assigned motorcycles, except with the approval of the motor
garage liaison officer or the watch commander.
A. Whenever repair of the assigned motorcycle will require in excess of 30 minutes, the officer
shall notify the watch commander. The watch commander shall make arrangements for a
spare motorcycle to be used by the officer.
B. Prior to retaking custody of an assigned motorcycle, the officer shall return the spare
motorcycle to its proper storage location and notify the watch commander, who shall make
an appropriate entry in the spare book.
C. Spare motorcycles which are BO are not to be returned to the spare motorcycle parking
area, but are to be taken to the repair area with a BO slip made out.
D. Spare motorcycles shall not be taken home during extended days off or vacations.
E. When an officer becomes ill and will be off duty for several days, the watch commander shall
be notified and will make arrangements, if necessary, for the return of the spare motorcycle.
F. Officers should record the date, time, and name of the person in the watch commander's
office who records the issuance or return of the spare motorcycles.
5/316 SPARE MOTORCYCLES - AVAILABLE LOCATIONS
Spare motorcycles are available at the below-listed locations:
A. Central repair facilities: Central Traffic Division
B. Harbor Division repair garage: South Traffic Division
C. Pacific Division repair garage: West Traffic Division
D. Van Nuys Division repair garage: Valley Traffic Division
5/317 ADEQUATE SHELTER FOR MOTORCYCLES
Officers who have permission to home-garage a Department motorcycle shall provide adequate shelter for
the vehicle at their ordinary place of residence. "Adequate shelter" shall mean an enclosed, secure structure
with protection from the weather and from any unauthorized persons having access to the motorcycle.
"Place of residence" shall mean the address shown on Form 1.20 or other location authorized by current
Department policy.
5/318 PROTECTION OF DISABLED MOTORCYCLES
An officer who has called for tow service on a disabled motorcycle shall remain with the vehicle to protect it
from theft or damage.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/319 EQUIPMENT CHANGES ON MOTORCYCLES PROHIBITED
No addition, removal, or alteration of any type shall be made to motorcycles unless approved and performed
under the direction of the commanding officer of Motor Transport Division or the Radio Repair Shop. This
includes stickers, decals, signs or banners.
5/320 WASHING OF MOTORCYCLES
Officers may have their motorcycles washed at their geographic washing facility after obtaining an
appointment from the shop foreman. It is each individual officer's responsibility to maintain the appearance
of an assigned motorcycle.
5/321 STORAGE OF MOTORCYCLES WHEN ON VACATION OR EXTENDED ABSENCE
Before departing on vacation or any extended absence caused by sickness, IOD, or days off in excess of
seven days, officers shall store the motorcycle in an appropriate Department garage unless prior permission
to keep the motorcycle at home has been granted by the watch commander. Officers may not keep their
motorcycles at home while on suspension.
5/322 SPEEDOMETER CALIBRATION, MOTORCYCLES
Each officer shall obtain a speedometer calibration service for an assigned motorcycle semi-annually in
accordance with LAPD Manual 4/387.10. Speedometer calibration service is available at; Central repair
facilities or Van Nuys repair facilities.
5/323 CODE "B" - PRIOR TO TOUR OF DUTY
Traffic division watch commanders shall determine Code "B" days. Officers shall be familiar with and
guided by their respective divisional policy.
When Code "B" has been broadcast, officers shall not ride their motorcycles to work.
When the weather is hazardous and a Code "B" has not been broadcast, officers shall not ride their
motorcycles, but shall telephone their watch commander for instructions.
If it appears that the Code "B" conditions are going to be prolonged, the watch commander may establish
assignment rosters for the following day.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/324 CODE "B" - DURING TOUR OF DUTY
When a tour of duty is initiated Code "A" and inclement weather is encountered, officers shall:
A. Proceed cautiously to the nearest police facility.
B. Check out a four-wheeled vehicle and report the location and shop number to their traffic
division watch commander.
C. If an officer wishes to end his/her tour of duty at the inception of Code "B" weather, he shall
contact his/her watch commander and, if deployment allows, submit a deduct slip for the
balance of the watch.
5/325 HAZARDOUS WEATHER
Officers shall not engage in traffic enforcement activities on two-wheeled motorcycles when the weather
makes such operation hazardous.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/400 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT UNIFORM AND EQUIPMENT
5/401 CARRYING OF SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
In addition to the required equipment (Department Manual 3/621.10), all traffic enforcement officers shall
carry the following items, either on the motorcycle or on their person as applicable:
A. Gloves
B. Baton
C. Current California Vehicle Code
D. Current Speedometer Calibration Card (not over 180 days old)
E. A minimum of three flares
F. Motor helmet face shield
G. Blackout helmet cover
H. Supply of Traffic Collision Reports (CHP 555 Form Set, CHP Form 556, LAPD Municipal
supplements, Form 3.17, and Form 4.37 or equivalent)
5/402 CODE "B" DAYS - UNIFORM
On Code "B" days, officers shall wear the basic uniform (Department Manual 3/614.10). The basic uniform
does not include boots and breeches.
NOTE: Watch commanders shall assure that all officers assigned to field duty on a Code
"B" day are wearing an acceptable basic uniform and possess the required rain
equipment (Department Manual 3/629.10).
5/403 GLOVES
A. All officers shall wear gloves when operating a Department motorcycle.
B. Gloves shall be made of leather, either entirely or on the inside palm area, and shall be free
of unnecessary ornamentation.
5/404 ITEMS ON EQUIPMENT BELT MUST BE SAFEGUARDED
Whenever an officer leaves an equipment belt with a shine-stand employee for the purpose of having the belt
dyed or shined, all fixed ammunition, keys, guns, and handcuffs shall be removed.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
5/405 HELMETS
A. Officers shall wear the Department-furnished helmet with the chin strap securely fastened
while operating or sitting on a motorcycle.
B. Helmets shall not be stored in any manner that will damage the sensitive liner.
1. Helmets should be set on a flat surface (top side up) or hung by one of the nylon
straps.
2. The entire helmet and liner is washable (Do NOT use gasoline or any other volatile
cleaner).
3. Helmets shall be stored in a safe place inside the officer's home or in a

Department locker when not in use.
4. The helmet chin strap shall not be modified by any device.
5. Helmets left on motorcycles SHALL be secured by use of the helmet lock installed
on each Department motorcycle.
5/406 EYE PROTECTION
All officers shall wear eye protection while operating a motorcycle.
5/407 SUNGLASSES
Officers shall not wear reflective sunglasses or sunglasses of a distinctive nature which detract from their
uniform appearance.
5/408 BATON - CARRYING ON MOTORCYCLES
The baton shall be carried on the motorcycle, secured by appropriate devices installed by Motor Transport
Division.
Revision 06/01/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
6/100 COLLISION INVESTIGATION OFFICER TRAINING PROGRAM
This standardized training program is for all officers upon their assignment to a traffic division, if
the officer has had no collision investigation experience within three years of the assignment.
6/101 PURPOSE
The Collision Investigation Officer Training Program will:
A. Ensure that all trainees are provided with a uniform method of training.
B. Provide a standard for evaluating a trainee’s progress and future training needs.
C. Establish training procedures for supervisors and detectives newly assigned to

traffic divisions.
6/102 COLLISION INVESTIGATION OFFICER TRAINING PROGRAM LENGTH
The Collision Investigation Officer Training Program is to be completed in four (4) deployment
periods. Commanding officers may elect to extend the program one (1) deployment period due
to vacation, sick, IOD, or other compelling reasons.
6/105 TRAINEE’S RESPONSIBILITY
The trainee is responsible for:
A. Becoming familiar with the collision investigation officer training program and
understanding the requirements.
B. Becoming familiar with the contents of the Department Traffic Manual.
C. Maintaining the Collision Investigation Trainee Checklist and have the form
available for the training officer each working day.
6/106 COLLISION INVESTIGATION TRAINING OFFICER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Training Officer is responsible for:
A. Reviewing the Collision Investigation Trainee Checklist daily and determining the
areas in which the trainee needs additional instruction.
B. Ensuring that the trainee receives the additional instruction in the deficient areas.
C. Recording the trainee's progress on the Collision Investigation Trainee Checklist.
Revision 07/14/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
6/106
D. Completing, on a bi-weekly basis, a Collision Investigation Trainee Bi-Weekly

Evaluation Report.
1. The training officer shall discuss the evaluation with the trainee.
2. The trainee and trainer shall sign the bi-weekly evaluation report.
3. The training officer shall forward the original of the Collision Investigation
Trainee Bi-Weekly Evaluation Report to the trainee's immediate
supervisor.
6/107 SUPERVISOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The immediate supervisor of each trainee is responsible for:
A. Reviewing the Collision Investigation Trainee Bi-Weekly Evaluation Report,

making appropriate notations, and discussing the trainee's progress with the
trainee.
B. Reviewing the Collision Investigation Trainee Checklist to ensure that the training
program is progressing in a timely manner.
C. Forwarding the Collision Investigation Trainee Bi-Weekly Evaluation Report to

the division training coordinator.
D. Discussing with the training officer and the divisional training coordinator any
problems encountered with the Collision Investigation Officer Training Program
or particular trainees, and ensuring that problem areas are appropriately
addressed.
6/108 DIVISION TRAINING COORDINATOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Division Training Coordinator is responsible for:
A. Arranging and attending an orientation meeting with the trainee and the primary
training officer, within the first week of the trainee’s assignment to the traffic
division, to discuss training requirements and expectations.
B. Arranging and attending an orientation meeting with the trainee and the
commanding officer during the first two weeks of training.
C. Scheduling the trainee to attend the Basic Collision Investigation Course (this
includes newly assigned supervisors and detectives who have not served in a
traffic function for the past three years).
Revision 07/14/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
6/108
D. Provide the trainee with the following material on the first day of assignment at
the division.
1. A copy of the Department Traffic Manual
2. A Collision Investigation Trainee Checklist
E. Scheduling the trainee for a loan to the detective section of their respective traffic
division for an introduction to collision investigation follow-up procedures. This
loan shall be for three consecutive working days.
F. Reviewing the Traffic Trainee Checklist and the other requirements of the training
program to ensure they have been met.
G. Administrating the Collision Investigation Trainee Examination after it has been

determined by the training officer that the trainee has completed field training.
NOTE: The Collision Investigation Trainee Examination can be administered

by any supervisor approved by the commanding officer.
H. Evaluating the results of the Traffic Investigation Trainee Examination and

making appropriate recommendations to the commanding officer. If the trainee
does not receive a minimum score of 70 percent on the examination, comply with
Department Traffic Manual 6/117 (Remediation and Re-Examination).
I. Maintaining a trainee file of Bi-Weekly Traffic Trainee Evaluation Reports and

final examination results.
6/109 TRAFFIC DIVISION WATCH COMMANDER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Watch Commander is responsible for:
A. Ensuring, when practical, that trainees are regularly assigned to the same Police
Officer III training officer during the Collision Investigation Officer Training
Program.
B. Regularly reviewing the trainee's progress with the divisional training coordinator.
C. Ensuring that the trainee shall not be assigned as a one-officer traffic (TL) unit
during the training period.
Revision 07/14/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
6/110 COMMANDING OFFICER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The trainee's Commanding Officer is responsible for:
A. Reviewing the results of the Collision Investigation Officer Training Program with
the trainee at the end of the training.
B. Approving extensions to the Collision Investigation Officer Training Program

(Department Traffic Manual 6/102).
C. Causing the transfer of trainees who do not successfully complete the Collision
Investigation Officer Training Program.
D. Making recommendations to the Department Traffic Coordinator on

improvements to the Collision Investigation Officer Training Program.
E. Meeting with training coordinator and trainee within first 2 weeks of training.
6/111 TRAFFIC COORDINATION SECTION (TCS) RESPONSIBILITIES
TCS is responsible for:
A. Providing the traffic divisions with a standardized Collision Investigation Trainee

Examination, which shall be used to test the officers assigned to the Collision
Investigation Officer Training Program.
B. Revising the Traffic Officer Trainee Checklist and Traffic Officer Trainee Bi-
Weekly Evaluation forms as required.
C. Overseeing the Collision Investigation Officer Training Program to ensure all

newly assigned officers to a traffic division receive consistent and uniform
training.
6/115 COLLISION INVESTIGATION OFFICER TRAINING PROGRAM

EXAMINATION
The Collision Investigation Trainee Examination consists of a written examination. The trainee
must have taken and passed the Basic Collision Investigation Course, with a minimum score of
70 percent, prior to taking the collision investigation trainee examination.
Revision 07/14/04
TRAFFIC MANUAL
6/117 REMEDIATION AND RE-EXAMINATIONS
A. If the trainee does not satisfactorily complete the Collision Investigation Officer
Training Program within four (4) deployment periods, the trainee will:
1. Be given one (1) additional deployment period for training in problem

areas; AND
2. At the end of the additional deployment period, the trainee will be given
another Collision Investigation Trainee Examination.
B. If the trainee does not successfully complete the second examination, the Traffic
Division Commanding Officer should cause the trainee to be transferred to a non-
traffic assignment. The Commanding Officer may, at his discretion, retain the
officer for an additional deployment period at which time the trainee will be given
a third and final examination.
C. If the trainee does not successfully complete the third examination, the
Commanding Officer shall ensure the trainee is transferred to a non-traffic
assignment.
NOTE: All subsequent Collision Investigation Trainee Examinations and

accompanying practical application exercises will be different in content
but equal in difficulty.
6/118 NEWLY ASSIGNED TRAFFIC SUPERVISORS AND DETECTIVES
Newly assigned traffic supervisors and detective personnel that have not served in a traffic
function in the past three years shall complete a training program designed to establish a
fundamental knowledge of current policy and procedures of collision investigation.
The training program shall consist of the following:
A. During the first deployment period of assignment, new supervisors shall be

loaned to the detective section of their respective traffic divisions for a two-day
introduction to collision investigation follow-up.
B. Within the next four deployment periods, the supervisor or detective shall attend
and successfully complete the Basic Collision Investigation Course.
Revision 07/14/04

Traffic Manual Complete Fixed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Traffic Manual Complete Fixed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Traffic Manual Complete Fixed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRAFFIC MANUAL

0/100 GENERAL PROVISIONS

0/101 DEPARTMENT TRAFFIC MANUAL ESTABLISHED

0/102 ADHERENCE TO REPORTING POLICY

0/103 GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION

0/104 LEGALITY OF CONTENTS

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

AOI - Area of Impact

Department Manual - Manual of the Los Angeles Police Department

0/106 DISTRIBUTION OF THE DEPARTMENT TRAFFIC MANUAL

0/107 AMENDMENTS TO THE DEPARTMENT TRAFFIC MANUAL

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/100 CITING GUIDELINES

1/101 PATROL OFFICERS' RESPONSIBILITIES

1/102 TRAFFIC OFFICERS' RESPONSIBILITIES

1/103 VISIBLE PATROL

1/104 GENERAL CITING PROCEDURES

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/105 GENERAL ENFORCEMENT POLICY

1/106 SELECTIVE ENFORCEMENT

1/107 CITING POLICY FOR UN-LICENSED DRIVERS

1/108 VIOLATOR CONTACT

1/109 NON-RESIDENT VIOLATORS

1/110 FALSE INFORMATION TO A PEACE OFFICER - 31 VC

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/111 CITING COMMON CARRIERS

1/112 CITING EQUIPMENT VIOLATIONS

1/113 SUBSEQUENT STOPS OF THE SAME VIOLATOR

1/114 PARKING VIOLATIONS

1/115 MISDEMEANORS AND INFRACTIONS

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/116 PHYSICAL ARREST OF TRAFFIC VIOLATORS

1/117 VIOLATIONS COMMITTED AGAINST AN OFFICER

1/118 TRAFFIC COLLISION - PERSONAL SERVICE CITATION

1. The officer has successfully completed a POST approved course in collision

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

3. The below listed violations are involved:

a. 4000(a) VC through 5204 VC - Registration of Vehicles

b. 12951(a) VC - Driver's License Not in Possession

c. 16028 (a) VC - Evidence of Financial Responsibility

d. Division 12 of the VC - Equipment of Vehicles

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/119 TRAFFIC COLLISION - ABSENTEE CITATION

1/120 CITATION BY OFF-DUTY OFFICER

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/200 GENERAL TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT POLICY

1/201 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT OBJECTIVES

1/202 LEADING CAUSES OF TRAFFIC COLLISIONS - MAJOR VIOLATIONS

1/203 RIGHT OF WAY

Officers shall stop and should cite violators.

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

1/204 SPEED VIOLATIONS

LOS ANGELES POLICE DEPARTMENT

5. Radar Speed Enforcement - Radar enforcement of speed law violations shall be

1/205 TRAFFIC CONTROL

B. Enforcement Policy - Officers shall stop and should cite violators.

1/206 DRIVING UNDER-THE-INFLUENCE OF ALCOHOL AND/OR DRUGS

B. Enforcement Policy - Officers shall stop and should cite violators.

1/208 ENFORCEMENT OF BICYCLE VIOLATIONS